***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
✨ Want to work even faster? Unlock more speed with these Digits shortcuts.
* **Ask Digits for instant answers:** Type a question about your numbers in the Ask Digits bar to get data-backed answers and jump straight into the right workflow.
* **Search anything in a flash:** Hit **⌘ + K** (or **Ctrl + K** on Windows) anywhere in Digits to instantly search transactions, vendors, reports, and more.
* **Keep context with comments:** **@-mention a teammate** on any transaction, report, or key financial detail to collaborate right where the work happens.
* **Try Digits alongside your stack:** Connect Digits to your existing tools and run it in parallel while you decide if fully switching is right for you.
* **Do quick math in the Amount fields:** Type a simple expression (like `10.80+10`) in any Amount field and press Enter—Digits calculates it for you and updates the totals automatically (`+`, `-`, `*`, `/`, decimals all work).
# Businesses
Find step-by-step guides to set up your business, track finances, and manage your workflows in Digits.
Cover image
:paper-plane: Getting Started with Digits for Businesses
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Getting Started
Connect your bank accounts and business tools to Digits so transactions, bills, payroll, and payments flow in automatically—less manual entry, cleaner books, and real-time financials.
***
:paper-plane: Getting Started:
Product Guides
Step-by-step interactive tours to help you get started with Digits.
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Availability, Banks, & Currency Support
Learn where Digits is available, which countries, banks, and currencies are supported, and why Digits currently works only for U.S.-based businesses.
***
### Where Is Digits Available?
Digits is currently available **only for U.S.-based businesses** that use **U.S. banks** and operate in **USD**.
***
### Supported Countries
Digits supports businesses that:
* Are **legally based in the United States**, and
* Use **U.S. financial institutions** for bank and credit card connections
{% hint style="warning" %}
*Digits is **not currently available** in countries such as **Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia, Malaysia, or the EU**.*
{% endhint %}
***
### Supported Currencies
Digits currently supports **USD (U.S. dollars) only**.
This means:
* All reports, dashboards, and financial statements are calculated in **USD**
* **Multi-currency accounting and FX conversion are not supported** at this time
***
### When will Digits be available in my country?
International support is on our radar and on our roadmap. We don’t have a timeline to announce yet... but when support lands, you’ll see it in the [Digits Changelog](/changelog)
***
### Supported Banks & Alternatives
Digits connects to banks and credit cards through **Plaid**. If your bank appears in the connection flow, you can link it for automatic syncing.
If your bank isn’t supported (or you prefer not to connect it), you can still use Digits by dragging and dropping your bank statements or importing transactions via CSV.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note**: Digits currently supports **USD-only accounting and reporting**, so imported data should be USD.
{% endhint %}
***
### How can I check if my bank is supported?
The most reliable way to check is directly inside Digits:
1. In the left-hand menu, click **Connections**.
2. Click **All Connections**.
3. Click **Connect** next to **Banks and Cards.**
4. Search for the bank and log in securely through Plaid.
5. If it appears, it’s currently supported
Plaid also maintains a public list of institutions:
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:**
* This list is **not Digits-specific**
* It is **not updated in real time**
* A bank appearing on Plaid’s list does **not guarantee** it will work with Digits
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I use Digits if I live outside the U.S.?
Digits is designed for U.S.-based businesses. International users are not officially supported yet.
Does Digits support multiple currencies?
No. Digits supports USD only.
Can I connect a non-U.S. bank account?
No. Digits currently supports U.S. banks only.
Does Digits support international banks?
No. Digits does **not** support:
* Non-U.S. banks
* International-only financial institutions
* Foreign bank feeds, even for U.S.-based users
Digits relies on U.S. banking infrastructure and USD-based accounting.
International support is on our radar and on our roadmap. We don’t have timelines to announce yet—but when support lands, you’ll see it in the [Digits Changelog](/changelog)
Why doesn’t my bank or credit union appear in the Plaid connection?
Your bank may not appear if:
* The institution is not supported by Plaid
* The bank restricts third-party data access
* The connection is temporarily unavailable
* The institution is **outside the United States**
If your bank doesn’t show up in Digits, it usually means we can’t reliably access transaction data from it at this time.
What if I have foreign currency transactions?
Digits currently supports **USD only**. If a transaction is **not converted to USD**, it may **not sync into Digits**.
In practice, you’ll typically see one of these outcomes:
* **Converted before sync:** Many banks and providers convert foreign currency charges to USD, so Digits receives a USD transaction.
* **Not imported:** If a connection sends **non-USD, unconverted** transactions, Digits will reject them, and they won’t appear in your books.
Digits does **not** perform currency conversion, FX revaluation, or multi-currency reporting.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** If your provider doesn’t convert to USD, the best workaround is to **convert/export USD transactions** (when available) or **upload a USD CSV**.
Where this most commonly comes up: services that can produce mixed-currency transactions (like **Gusto, Stripe, and sometimes Ramp**). For many bank/card feeds, mixed-currency is uncommon—transactions are usually converted to USD automatically, or nothing imports.
{% endhint %}
What if my U.S. business has some international transactions?
Digits currently supports **USD only**. If a transaction is **not converted to USD**, it may **not sync into Digits**.
In practice, you’ll typically see one of these outcomes:
* **Converted before sync:** Many banks and providers convert foreign currency charges to USD, so Digits receives a USD transaction.
* **Not imported:** If a connection sends **non-USD, unconverted** transactions, Digits will reject them, and they won’t appear in your books.
Digits does **not** perform currency conversion, FX revaluation, or multi-currency reporting.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** If your provider doesn’t convert to USD, the best workaround is to **convert/export USD transactions** (when available) or **upload a USD CSV**.
Where this most commonly comes up: services that can produce mixed-currency transactions (like **Gusto, Stripe, and sometimes Ramp**). For many bank/card feeds, mixed-currency is uncommon—transactions are usually converted to USD automatically, or nothing imports.
{% endhint %}
Can a foreign-owned U.S. business use Digits?
Yes. Digits supports businesses that are legally registered in the United States, use U.S. financial institutions, and operate in U.S. dollars (USD), regardless of where the owner or users are located.
Digits doesn't currently support businesses that are legally based outside the United States, non-U.S. bank connections, or multi-currency accounting.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Choosing a Setup Method
When you set up your business in Digits, you can choose how to start your books:
* **Start fresh**
* **Import from QuickBooks**
* **Migrate from another tool** (like Xero, spreadsheets, etc.)
Your choice tells Digits how to build **Category Manager**, which is your **chart of accounts**—the list of categories that controls how income, expenses, assets, and more are tracked and reported.
***
### Why Your COA Strategy Matters
Your Chart of Accounts (COA) determines how Digits classifies transactions, reports financials, and automates bookkeeping.
Choosing the right setup path ensures accuracy from day one and minimizes cleanup later.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Tip:** Always finalize your Chart of Accounts setup before connecting banks or apps. This ensures transactions map to the correct categories automatically.
{% endhint %}
***
Options
Choose this option if:
Start Fresh with Digits
Create a clean, standardized Chart of Accounts automatically when you start fresh with Digits. ✨ Digits analyzes your data and generates a complete category structure that fits modern bookkeeping standards — no manual setup required.
It’s ideal for:
You’re starting bookkeeping from scratch
Your current books feel messy or inconsistent
You want a simpler, easier-to-read set of categories
Digits suggests categories you can edit, rename, or remove at any time, giving you full control while starting from a solid foundation.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Should I connect banks before or after setting up my COA?
After. Connecting accounts first can cause mismatched transaction categories.
Why can't I get past the Import Specific Categories step?
The **Import Specific Categories** step appears when you choose to upload your own **Chart of Accounts** during setup. A completed CSV is required to continue.
If you'd rather have Digits create your categories automatically, contact **Digits Support**. We'll help reset your setup so you can start over and choose the **Auto Create** option instead.
If you've created multiple Digits accounts while getting started, we can also help you identify the correct account and remove any extras.
Can I edit my COA later?
Absolutely. Use [Categories (Chart of Accounts)](/business-agentic-general-ledger/category-manager)anytime to adjust, merge, or deactivate categories.
Does Digits automatically map imported categories?
Yes. :sparkles: Digits automatically maps imported categories to align with your transaction data.
Can I start with a clean, standardized COA?
Yes. Choose Start Fresh with Digits to auto-generate a modern, editable structure.
I’m moving from Xero, Pilot, or Excel — what should I do?
See [Migrate to Digits from Xero, Puzzle, or Another Platform](/business-getting-started/migrate-to-digits)
Do you have a list of the complete gifted COA?
Yes! Below is the full list. Keep in mind that while this is the full list, Digits will only show categories used in transactions.
Number
Category
10000
Assets
11000
Bank Accounts
11500
Asset Clearing
11510
Invoice Clearing
11520
Digits - Invoice Clearing
12000
Accounts Receivable
12010
Accounts Receivable - Gross
12020
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
12500
Accrued Revenue
13000
Prepaid Expenses
13010
Prepaid Benefits
13020
Prepaid Rent
13030
Prepaid Insurance
13040
Other Prepaid Expenses
13500
Inventory
13510
Raw Materials
13520
Work in Progress
13530
Finished Goods
14000
Investments
14500
Shareholder Loans
15000
Other Current Assets
15010
Security Deposits
15020
Current Tax Assets
15030
Other Current Assets
15999
Uncategorized Assets
16000
Fixed Assets
16100
Computer Assets
16150
Accumulated Depreciation - Computer Assets
16200
Furniture & Fixtures
16250
Accumulated Depreciation - Furniture & Fixtures
16300
Other Fixed Assets
16350
Accumulated Depreciation - Other Fixed Assets
17000
Intangible Assets
17100
Domain Names
17150
Accumulated Amortization - Domain Names
17200
Patents & Trademarks
17250
Accumulated Amortization - Patents & Trademarks
17300
Research & Development
17350
Accumulated Amortization - Research & Development
17400
Leasehold Improvements
17450
Accumulated Amortization - Leasehold Improvements
17500
Other Intangible Assets
17550
Accumulated Amortization - Other Intangible Assets
18000
Goodwill
19999
Other Long-term Assets
20000
Liabilities
21000
Accounts Payable
22000
Credit Cards
23000
Liability Clearing
23100
Employee Reimbursements Clearing
23200
Payroll Clearing
23300
Bill Pay Clearing
23400
Digits - Bill Pay Clearing
24000
Accrued Expenses
24500
Deferred Revenue
25000
Other Current Liabilities
25010
Benefits Payable
25020
Income Taxes Payable
25030
Sales Tax Payable
25040
Payroll Tax Payable
25050
Payroll Deductions Liability
25060
Uncategorized Liabilities
25500
Short-term Debt
26000
Convertible Notes
26100
Convertible Notes - Principal
26200
Convertible Notes - Accrued Interest
27000
Long-term Debt
28000
Other Long-term Liabilities
30000
Equity
31000
Common Stock
32000
Preferred Stock
33000
SAFE
34000
Owner's Equity
34100
Owner's Contributions
34200
Owner's Draws
35000
Treasury Stock
36000
Additional Paid In Capital
37000
Other Comprehensive Income
38000
Retained Earnings
39999
Uncategorized Equity
40000
Revenue
41000
Sales Revenue
42000
Subscription Revenue
43000
Transaction Revenue
44000
Partner Revenue
45000
Refunds and Discounts
49999
Uncategorized Income
50000
Cost of Revenue
51000
Cost of Labor
52000
Cost of Goods
53000
Payment Processing Fees
54000
Hosting Fees
55000
Other Cost of Revenue
60000
Operating Expenses
61000
Payroll Expenses
61100
Salaries
61200
Bonuses
61300
Commissions
61400
Employee Benefits
61410
Health Insurance
61420
Retirement Contributions
61500
Employer Payroll Taxes
61600
Payroll Processing Fees
61700
Recruiting Costs
61800
Other Employee Costs
62000
Travel & Entertainment
62100
Airfare
62200
Ground Transportation
62300
Lodging
62400
Meals
62500
Entertainment
62600
Other Travel & Entertainment
63000
Professional Fees
63100
Consultants and Contractors
63200
Legal
63300
Tax & Accounting
63400
Other Professional Fees
64000
Sales and Marketing
64100
Advertising
64200
Conference and Trade Shows
64300
Promotional Items and Gifts
64400
Other Sales & Marketing
65000
Business Applications & Software
66000
Facilities
66100
Rent
66200
Utilities
66300
Repairs and Maintenance
66400
Other Facilities Expenses
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Migrate Data from Quickbooks
If you already use QuickBooks Online, you can bring your existing books into Digits instead of starting from scratch.
{% hint style="danger" %}
QuickBooks migration is only available during initial setup. If you picked the wrong cutover date or migrated before posting everything, you can [**Start Over**](/business-connections/starting-over) to reset onboarding and try again without affecting billing. Once onboarding is complete, QuickBooks migration can't be added without starting over.
{% endhint %}
### Before you migrate
Your migration brings over transactions that are **posted to your QuickBooks ledger**. Items still sitting in your QuickBooks **bank feed** ("For Review") aren't posted yet, so they won't come across. That's fine if it's intentional — for example, if you plan to start doing a given month's work in Digits, it's okay to leave that month's bank-feed items in QuickBooks. Just make sure that **anything you want to bring into Digits is fully posted from the bank feed before you migrate:**
:square-check: In QuickBooks, **categorize and post any bank-feed items you want migrated** so they're recorded in the ledger. Anything left in "For Review" stays behind.
:square-check: **Reconcile through your last completed period** so your migrated balances are clean.
:square-check: **Set your cutover date to the day after your last fully posted and reconciled period.** Your cutover date tells Digits when to take over as your system of record — it's the point from which your Digits activity begins, so pick it once your QuickBooks books are clean through the prior period.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### New to Digits or Adding Another Business?
#### Option 1: You’re New to Digits
1. Go to [**digits.com/join/business**](https://digits.com/join/business) and enter your email to create your account.
#### Option 2: You’re Adding Another Business
1. From your **Digits dashboard**, click your **business name** in the top-left.
2. Click **+ Add Business**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Follow the Prompts to Connect QuickBooks
1. Follow the prompts until you’re asked how you want to **set up your accounting categories**.
2. Choose **Migrate from QuickBooks Online**.
4. Sign in to your **QuickBooks Online** account and approve the connection.
5. **Set a cutover date**—this tells Digits when to take over as the system of record.
{% hint style="info" %}
We recommend the day after your last fully reconciled period. See: [Quickbooks Cutover Date](/business-getting-started/business-quickbooks-cutover-date)for more information.
{% endhint %}
4. Complete your **company profile** and continue through setup.
5. Digits will automatically **import your chart of accounts** (and other data) from QuickBooks—no CSV upload needed.
All data prior to the cutover date is pulled in for historical reference. Afterward, the QuickBooks connection is archived and no longer syncs. From that day forward, **Digits** becomes your system of record.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### After the Import
Once the import finishes:
1. Go to **Accounting → Categories** to confirm your **chart of accounts** looks right.
2. **Connect Banks & Apps** so new activity starts flowing into Digits.
3. Invite your **team or accountant** to collaborate, if you’d like.
From there:
* Your **QuickBooks categories and balances** are now live in Digits.
* Digits starts **auto-categorizing new transactions** based on your historical data.
* The QuickBooks connection is kept for **reference only** and no longer updates.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Tip:** After migration, check that your **opening balances** match the final reconciled figures from QuickBooks. Adjust as needed using **Journal Entries** in the **Ledger.**
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### What Migrates to Digits from QBO and What Doesn't?
:white\_check\_mark: **Migrates:**
* **Chart of Accounts (COA)** (includes active and inactive accounts; maps to the Categories in Digits)
* **Transactions** (your historical activity)
* **Journal Entries (JEs)** (included in your transaction history)
* **Classes and Locations from QBO** (you'll map these during setup so you can use them in Digits.)
* **Invoices & bills** — brought over for their accounting impact (A/R, A/P, and revenue are booked into your ledger), not as standalone invoice or bill documents
* **Customers** — Name, Website, Phone, Email, Billing Address, Shipping Address
* **Vendors** — Name
* **Products** (Includes inactive; imported and surfaced during Invoice creation)
* Products with a unit price of $0 or greater appear in the Product selection dropdown
* Products with a unit price less than $0 appear as Discount options when creating an invoice
:no\_entry\_sign: **Does NOT Migrate:**
* **Reconciliation status** (whether a transaction was previously marked reconciled in QBO)
* **Reconciliation history** (past statement periods and reconciliation reports)
* **Invoice, bill, and other document records and attachments** — the accounting impact is migrated, but the original documents, attachments, and payment status are not
* **A/R and A/P aging history** — your account balances migrate, but aging reports and open item aging do not.
* **Customers** — Website, phone, email, billing address, shipping address, payment terms, opening/current balance, notes/ memos, attachments, tax-exempt status/ resale number, preferred payment & delivery method, sub-customers/ jobs (parent-child relationships), custom fields, currency.
* **Vendors** — Website, phone, email, Address, tax ID/ 1099 setup, payment terms, account number, opening/ current balance, notes/ memos, attachments, tax settings, custom fields, currency.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Good to know:** Your QuickBooks invoices and bills migrate as ledger transactions, so your historical accounting data—including A/R and A/P balances—is preserved. The original documents, attachments, payment status, and aging history don't migrate, so recreate any open invoices or bills you still need to track in Digits.
{% endhint %}
***
### Running a Parallel Close
If you’d like to test **Digits** while still closing your books in **QuickBooks**, you can run a **parallel close** for your first month.
This lets you compare results between both systems before fully switching to Digits.
See: [Try Digits Without Leaving Your Current Setup (Parallel Close)](/business-getting-started/parallel-close)
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does Digits overwrite QuickBooks data?
No. Digits reads data from QuickBooks (up to the cutover date) but never pushes updates back.
What if I choose the wrong cutover date?
* **If this is your first (and only) business in Digits:**\
Don’t delete it—email and we’ll help you fix the setup.
* **If this is an additional business you added later:**\
You can delete that business and run setup again with the correct cutover date, or keep it and manually adjust opening balances in the Ledger.
Do Departments and Locations (Classes) import from QuickBooks?
Yes. When you migrate from QBO, you can import both Locations and Line Classes — but you'll need to map them during the import setup, since QBO and Digits use different terminology.
QBO uses a generic structure for these fields, while Digits defines them more specifically as Departments and Locations. During setup, you'll select which QBO field maps to which Digits dimension.
Common mapping:
* QBO Location (or custom name like "Business") → Digits **Departments**
* QBO Line Class → Digits **Locations**
Do products import from QuickBooks?
Yes, products are imported from QBO — but they only apply if you're using Digits Invoicing to create and manage invoices. If you're not using Invoicing, imported products won't affect your setup.
Why aren't my transactions tagged with Departments or Locations after migration?
Transaction tags won't appear until you've mapped your Departments and Locations. Here's how to do it:
1. In the left navigation, go to **Accounting → Departments** (or **Locations**).
2. Click **Import Departments** (or **Import Locations**) and follow the steps to map your QBO fields to the correct Digits dimension.
Once saved, Digits retroactively applies the tags to all matching historical transactions.
See: [Departments](/business-agentic-general-ledger/departments)| [Locations](/business-agentic-general-ledger/locations)
Are QuickBooks transactions editable after migration?
Yes. All data imported up to your **cutover date** is editable in Digits. Any changes made in QuickBooks after that date will not sync.
Why am I seeing “The app you’ve selected isn’t available for use in your country”?
This occurs when your **QuickBooks Online** account was created outside the U.S. Digits’ QuickBooks integration currently supports **U.S.-based accounts only.**\
If you have a U.S.-based QuickBooks account, connect that one instead.\
For non-U.S. accounts, you can still use Digits by importing transactions via CSV.
We know international support is important, and expanding availability is on our roadmap. If you have questions, contact .
Why Migrate from QuickBooks to Digits?
QuickBooks is a solid starting point for many small businesses—but as your business grows, it can start to feel clunky and manual.
You might notice things like:
* Spending time maintaining **rules** just to keep transactions categorized
* **Manual reconciliations** are slowing down the month-end
* Reports that only feel “real” after you **export to Excel**
* Juggling different tools and views to understand your cash and performance
✨ **Digits is built to take that weight off your plate.**
Instead of rules and spreadsheets, Digits gives you:
* **Automated Categorization** – Transactions classify themselves using AI and get smarter as you confirm them.
* **Continuous Reconciliation** – Bank and card reconciliations run in the background, flagging issues early.
* **Live Reports** – Your P\&L, balance sheet, and dashboards update automatically—no exports needed.
* **One Place to Work Together** – You and your accountant can comment, review, and fix things directly in Digits.
In short: businesses move from QuickBooks to Digits to spend **less time wrestling with their accounting** and more time running the business, with cleaner, real-time numbers they can trust.
Is it safe to run Digits alongside QuickBooks Online?
Yes. Digits' QuickBooks migration is a **one-time data pull** — it copies your data without modifying or syncing back to your QBO file. Your QuickBooks data remains fully intact.
You can continue using QBO as your primary system while testing Digits in parallel, comparing reports, and verifying accuracy before fully committing. Once you're confident everything aligns, you can transition to Digits and cancel your QBO subscription. See: [Try Digits Without Leaving Your Current Setup (Parallel Close)](/business-getting-started/parallel-close)
How do I migrate from QuickBooks Desktop 10?
See: [Migrate to Digits from Xero, Puzzle, or Another Platform](/business-getting-started/migrate-to-digits)
Do inactive chart of accounts categories import from QuickBooks?
Yes. Digits imports your entire chart of accounts, including inactive accounts, and brings them over marked as inactive ("Deactivated"). This keeps your historical transactions correctly tied to the categories they were originally posted to. Imported inactive categories still appear in your Categories (shown as Deactivated), so nothing is lost—they're just visually set aside from your active categories.
Viewing migrated Accounts Receivable balances after a QuickBooks migration
When you migrate from QuickBooks Online, Digits brings over your full history—customer information, customer balances, and transaction-level detail. However, AR balances carried over at your cutover won't appear in the AR Aging report. That report is built from invoices created in Digits, and migrated receivables come over as ledger balances rather than individual invoice documents.\
\
You can still see the same information from the Accounts Receivable category. Here's how:
1. Open the Accounts Receivable category detail page. You can get there by finding Accounts Receivable in the Ledger, or by using Ask Digits/search and typing "accounts receivable."
2. Use the date picker to set the time frame you want. To see balances as of your cutover, select the full range up to that date (e.g., all of 2024–2025 for a January 1, 2026 cutover).
3. Open the Unpaid Customers view to see the total owed by each customer for that time frame.
4. Click into any customer to see the underlying transactions that make up their balance.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Quickbooks Cutover Date
The cutover date only applies if you’re moving from QuickBooks. It’s the point where your books officially switch into Digits and Digits becomes your main source of truth going forward.
***
### What is the Cutover Date?
The **cutover date** marks the date Digits becomes your accounting system of record.
Before the cutover, Digits imports historical data from QuickBooks for reference.\
After the cutover, Digits starts managing all new transactions, reconciliations, and reports directly.
Think of it as a *line in the sand*: everything before it comes from QuickBooks; everything after it lives in Digits.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Example:** If your QuickBooks books are reconciled through **December 31**, set the cutover date to **January 1**. That way, Digits imports everything up to year-end and starts fresh from January forward.
{% endhint %}
***
### What Happens Before and After the Cutover
| Timeframe | What You Can Do | What Digits Does |
| --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Before the Cutover Date** | Finish reconciling and cleaning books in QuickBooks. | Imports transactions, balances, and categories from QuickBooks. |
| **On the Cutover Date** | Begin using Digits for daily bookkeeping and reconciliations. | Switches from import mode to live transaction tracking. |
| **After the Cutover Date** | Record new transactions, reconcile banks, and manage reports directly in Digits. | Becomes your live system of record; QuickBooks connection is archived. |
{% hint style="success" %}
**Tip:** We recommend choosing a cutover date that lines up with a clean financial period (like a month-end) and avoiding partial-month starts when possible.
{% endhint %}
***
### Can I change the cutover date?
{% hint style="danger" %}
No. Once set during onboarding, the cutover date **cannot be changed**. Contact for further help.
{% endhint %}
***
### How to check your cutover date
You can review the cutover date at any time:
1. From your **Dashboard**, click **Settings** in the left menu.
2. Select **Accounting**.
3. The **Cutover Date** appears under the setup details *(visible only for QuickBooks migrations).*
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I still edit or reconcile data from before the cutover?
Yes — once imported, you can view and edit historical data in Digits for context, but the QuickBooks connection will not update again after the cutover.
What happens to my QuickBooks data after migration?
Digits imports all data **up to** the cutover date and archives the QuickBooks connection. No new data syncs after that point.
What if I set the wrong cutover date?
The cutover date cannot be changed after setup. See: [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Reconciliations After Migrating from QuickBooks
Migrating from QuickBooks Online (QBO) into Digits gives you a clean, modern ledger — but bank reconciliations work a little differently than many users expect at first.
This article explains:
* Why do migrated reconciliations not appear as complete
* What a cutover reconciliation is (and why it matters)
* How to complete a one-time cutover reconciliation
* How this unlocks fast, accurate AI Bank Reconciliations going forward
**Behind the scenes:** Bank statements may be ingested, and AI reconciliations may begin automatically as soon as statements are uploaded or synced — even if you haven’t visited the Reconciliations page yet. This is helpful once your cutover is complete, but it’s why establishing a clean starting point first is so important.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you’re seeing a large number of uncleared transactions after migration, this is expected — and fixable.
{% endhint %}
***
### Why do the reconciliations look unfinished after migration?
When you migrate from QuickBooks:
* Digits imports **historical transactions and balances** as of your chosen cutover date
* Digits **does not import the historical reconciliation status** from QBO
This means:
* Transactions that were previously reconciled in QBO are *not* marked as reconciled in Digits
* When bank statements are uploaded or synced, Digits correctly attempts to reconcile **all visible ledger activity**
As a result, opening your first reconciliation can show hundreds or thousands of uncleared items — even though your books were already reconciled in QBO.
This does **not** mean AI Bank Reconciliations aren’t working. It means Digits needs one clean starting point.
AI Bank Reconciliations can automatically match statement lines to ledger transactions, but they cannot infer which historical transactions were already reconciled in another system. That context must be established once through a cutover reconciliation.
***
### What Is a Cutover Reconciliation?
A **cutover reconciliation** is a **one-time reconciliation** completed at the point you move from QuickBooks to Digits.
It’s different from a traditional monthly bank reconciliation:
:no\_entry\_sign: You are *not* matching every transaction line by line
:white\_check\_mark: You are confirming that Digits’ opening balance matches your **final reconciled balance in QuickBooks**
{% hint style="info" %}
**Think of it as telling Digits:** “Everything before this date was already reconciled in QBO—trust it and start fresh from here.” Once this is complete, Digits has a trusted baseline—so AI Bank Reconciliations can work efficiently going forward. It also helps you confirm that your migration to Digits is complete and accurate, since you’re validating the starting point Digits will use moving forward.
{% endhint %}
***
### When should you do the cutover reconciliation?
You should complete a cutover reconciliation **before** relying on AI Bank Reconciliations for future periods.
**Best practice:**
* Use the **last fully reconciled bank statement in QuickBooks** (for example, 12/31/2024)
* Complete the cutover reconciliation first
* **✨** Then, let **AI Bank Reconciliations automatically reconcile** your bank and credit card accounts moving forward.
***
### Before You Start
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** Complete these steps before uploading any bank statements to Digits.
{% endhint %}
#### If you have already uploaded statements
If bank statements were uploaded or synced *before* completing the cutover reconciliation, Digits may have created draft reconciliations for later periods.
We know this cleanup can feel tedious. Unfortunately, reconciliations must be completed in order, so this one-time reset is required to establish a clean baseline.
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Reconciliations**
2. Find the **earliest** draft reconciliation (the oldest period)
3. Click **Delete** — later draft reconciliations should be removed automatically
Once drafts are cleared, complete the cutover reconciliation steps below. Then, if needed, drag and drop the subsequent months’ bank statements into *Accounting → Reconciliations* so AI Bank Reconciliations can finish reconciling your post-migration periods.
**Note:** You may see duplicate statements in Vault from your earlier upload. These can be safely ignored or deleted for cleanliness—they won't affect your reconciliations.
***
### How to complete a cutover reconciliation
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Confirm Your Cutover Date
Choose the last date your bank account was fully reconciled in QuickBooks.
Example:
* Migrated to Digits effective **1/1/2025**
* Last reconciled QBO statement date: **12/31/2024**
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Create a Cutover Reconciliation for Each Account
For each bank account and credit card:
1. Go to **Accounting → Reconciliations**
2. Click **+ Start Reconciliation** in the top right corner
3. **Select the account** you want to reconcile (very top dropdown)
4. Enter your reconciliation details:
5. \- **Statement Date:** Your cutover date (e.g., 12/31/2024)
6. \- **Ending Balance:** The final reconciled balance from your last QBO bank reconciliation
7. Click **Build Reconciliation**
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Mark All Transactions as Reconciled
Once the reconciliation opens:
1. Select all transactions using the checkbox at the top of the list
2. Use **Bulk Actions → Mark as Reconciled**
3. Verify the ending balance matches (Unreconciled Difference should be $0.00)
4. Click **Finalize**
{% hint style="info" %}
All pre-cutover QBO transactions are typically marked as reconciled automatically after import. If your balance doesn’t reconcile right away, wait a moment and refresh the page—Digits may still be finishing the update. If it still doesn’t match, check for any manually added or separately imported transactions.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload Your First Post-Migration Statement
:sparkles: Now you're ready for AI Bank Recs:
1. Go to **Accounting → Reconciliations**
2. Drag and drop your first post-cutover bank statement (e.g., January 2025)
3. Digits will auto-match transactions and create a draft reconciliation
4. Review any flags, then finalize
From this point forward, AI Bank Reconciliations will work as expected—matching only the new transactions to your uploaded statements.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
Related: [Troubleshooting Cash Totals: Verifying Opening Balances](/business-agentic-general-ledger/verify-opening-balances)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why do I see hundreds of "Missing transaction" flags in my first AI reconciliation?
This happens when you upload a bank statement before completing a cutover reconciliation. Digits is comparing your statement to the ledger but doesn't know that the historical transactions are already accounted for. Complete a cutover reconciliation to resolve this.
Can I skip the cutover reconciliation?
Technically, yes, but it's not recommended. Without it, every AI reconciliation will include uncleared historical transactions, making it difficult to identify genuine issues. The cutover reconciliation takes a few minutes and saves significant time downstream.
What if my cutover date doesn't align with a month-end?
That's okay. Use whatever date represents your last reconciled point in QBO. Digits reconciliations are flexible and don't require month-end alignment.
Do I need to re-reconcile everything from QBO?
No. The cutover reconciliation marks all pre-migration transactions as reconciled in bulk. You're trusting that QBO was accurate—you don't need to re-verify each transaction.
My ending balance doesn't match. What should I do?
Double-check your ending balance from your final QBO bank reconciliation. If there's a discrepancy, you may need to adjust opening balances. See: [Troubleshooting Cash Totals: Verifying Opening Balances](/business-agentic-general-ledger/verify-opening-balances)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Migrate to Digits from Xero, Puzzle, or Another Platform
Moving from Xero, Puzzle, or another platform? Digits doesn't have a direct sync, but you can get up and running with your existing data in just a few steps.
***
{% hint style="success" %}
**Migrating from QuickBooks Desktop 2010?** These steps apply to you, too. However, if you want detailed historical transaction data, you also have the option of using Intuit's migration tool to move from QuickBooks Desktop to QuickBooks Online first, and then using the [QBO-to-Digits](/business-getting-started/migrate-from-quickbooks) sync. If you'd prefer not to go that route, just follow the steps below.
{% endhint %}
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Step 1: Join Digits and Import Your Chart of Accounts
If you want to keep your existing account structure from another platform, start by importing it into Digits.
**Option 1: You're New to Digits**
1. Go to and enter your email to create your account.
2. Follow the prompts until you see **"How would you like to get started?"**, then select your previous platform (**Xero**, **Puzzle**, or **Other**).
3. On the **Choose your accounting categories** screen, select **Manual Upload** and click **Next**.
{% hint style="info" icon="book-open" %}
If you'd prefer not to import your Chart of Accounts, you can select **Auto Create** and skip to step 2. Digits includes a default Chart of Accounts and will auto-categorize transactions as they come in.
{% endhint %}
4. Complete your company profile and click **Next**.
5. Click **Download Template**.
**Option 2: You're Adding a Second Business**
1. From your Digits dashboard, click your business name in the top-left.
2. Click **+ Add Business**.
3. Follow the same steps as above:
* Choose **Migrate from another platform**
* On **Choose your accounting categories**, select **Manual Upload** and click **Next**.
* Complete your company profile and click **Next**, then **Download Template**.
#### **Fill Out and Upload Your CSV**
In the downloaded template, fill in these fields for each category:
* **Category Name**
* **Category Number** (optional, only if you use one)
* **Category Type** (Income, Expense, Asset, etc.)
Then:
1. Save your completed CSV.
2. Back in Digits, click **Upload CSV**.
3. Review the preview screen.
4. If everything looks correct, click **Submit** to import your chart of accounts.
Also see: [Import Your Chart of Accounts](/business-agentic-general-ledger/import-coa)
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 2: Connect Your Banks & Integrations
Once your Chart of Accounts is set up, connect your bank accounts, credit cards, and integrations to Digits.
1. Follow the prompts to connect your bank accounts and credit cards.
2. On the next screen, you'll be asked if you'd like to add any additional integrations (e.g. Gusto, Stripe, Ramp). You can connect these now or skip and add them later from the **Connections** tab.
3. After completing this step, Digits will provision your account — this takes a few minutes. Once ready, you'll be directed to your **Home** dashboard.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 3: Enter Your Opening Balances
To make sure your accounts start with the correct totals in Digits, you'll need to enter your opening balances by creating a journal entry in the Ledger.
The date you use for your opening balances depends on how much historical detail you want in Digits.
**Option A: Start Fresh from Your Last Close**
*Example: If your books were last closed on 12/31/2025, enter those ending balances in Digits as opening balances dated 1/1/2026.* You'll set your integration start dates to match this date in Step 4.
{% hint style="info" icon="person-running-fast" %}
*This is the fastest way to get started. Your opening balances will be accurate, and you'll set Digits to take over as of 1/1/2026 — but you won't have a detailed transaction history from your previous platform prior to that date.*
{% endhint %}
**Option B: Include Historical Transaction Detail**
If you want detailed historical data in Digits, you'll need to set your opening balances further back.
*For example, if your books were last closed on 12/31/2025 and you want two years of prior history, enter your ending balances as of 12/31/2023 as opening balances dated 1/1/2024. Then, in Step 5, you'll import your detailed transactions from 1/1/2024 through 12/31/2025.*
**To enter your opening balances:**
1. In the left navigation menu, go to **Accounting → Ledger**.
2. In the top right corner, click **+ Add Transaction**.
3. Create a journal entry with your opening balance for each account.
See: [Journal Entries in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/journal-entries)
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 4: Set Integration Start Dates
Once your opening balances are set, you'll need to configure the start date for all your integrations so Digits pulls only transactions from your chosen start date. This applies to all connections — banks, credit cards, payroll, and any other integrated tools.
{% hint style="info" %}
The start date you set here should match the opening balance date you chose in Step 3 (e.g., 1/1/2026 for Option A, or 1/1/2024 for Option B).
{% endhint %}
1. From the left navigation menu, go to **Connections → My Connections**.
2. Click **Manage** next to each account you've connected.
3. Next, click on each individual account (e.g., *Checking Account, Credit Card*).
4. Make sure the **Import all historical transactions** toggle is to the left.
{% hint style="info" icon="toggle-large-on" %}
Toggle **left** = set a custom start date for how far back to import transactions.
Toggle **right** = import all available data, up to 2 years back.
{% endhint %}
5. Click **Select date** and choose your start date from the calendar.
{% hint style="danger" icon="calendar-days" %}
**Note:** Plaid can only pull up to 2 years of transaction history for connected bank and credit card accounts.
{% endhint %}
6. Click **Save**.
7. Repeat this for all integrations: banks, credit cards, payroll, etc. It will take Digits a few minutes to process after you set the start dates.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 5: (Optional) Import Historical Transactions
If you chose Option B in Step 3, you'll need to import your historical transactions from your previous platform for the period between your opening balance date and the date you joined Digits (e.g., 1/1/2024–12/31/2025). If you chose Option A in Step 3, you can skip this step.
1. From the left navigation menu, go to **Accounting → Ledger**.
2. Click the dropdown next to **+ Add Transaction → Import Journal Entries**.
3. Download the Digits CSV template.
4. Format your transaction data from your previous platform to match the template.
5. Upload the file, review the column mappings, and click **Next** to complete the import.
6. See also: [Journal Entries in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/journal-entries)
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Do I have to import my Chart of Accounts from my previous platform?
No. You can use the default Digits Chart of Accounts instead. Digits will auto-categorize transactions as they come in. Importing your existing Chart of Accounts is optional but recommended if you want to keep your current account structure.
Will Digits auto-categorize my imported transactions?
Yes. Once transactions are imported, :sparkles: Digits will work to auto-categorize them.
What if my balances don't match after importing?
Double-check that your opening balance date and amounts match the ending balances from your previous platform. Also, verify that your imported transactions don't overlap with the opening balance period. For more help, see [Troubleshooting Cash Totals: Verifying Opening Balances](/business-agentic-general-ledger/verify-opening-balances)
How do I migrate from QuickBooks Desktop 10?
See: [Migrate to Digits from Xero, Puzzle, or Another Platform](/business-getting-started/migrate-to-digits)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Try Digits Without Leaving Your Current Setup (Parallel Close)
You don’t have to fully switch systems to see if Digits is right for your business. You can run Digits alongside your current accounting tool and compare the results at your own pace.
***
### Why Try Digits in Parallel?
Digits is built to make your accounting:
* **Automated** – AI handles most categorization and cleanup
* **Real-time** – dashboards and reports update as new data comes in
* **Easier to understand** – clear views of cash, profit, and trends
But we get it: switching accounting tools can feel like a big decision. That’s why Digits lets you **test-drive everything** while your current system keeps running as usual.
You can:
* Keep using your existing software and accountant
* Let Digits pull in the same data
* Compare how each handles your books
No sudden changes, no disruption—just a chance to see what’s better for your business.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Start Your Digits Trial
1. Go to [my.digits.com/business](https://my.digits.com/business)
2. Choose the setup option that matches where your books live today (QuickBooks, Xero, or a manual CSV import).
3. Connect all your usual data sources:
* Bank accounts
* Credit cards
* Tools like Gusto, Stripe, Ramp, BILL, etc.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Run Your Month-End Close in Your Current System
* Close the month like you normally would in your current system.
* Complete **reconciliations, adjustments, and journal entries** as usual.
* Any manual entries or adjustments you make there should also be recorded in **Digits** so you’re comparing apples to apples.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Run Your Close in Digits
* In Digits, review your:
* Transactions
* Categories
* Account balances
* Check your **reports and reconciliations** for that same period.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Compare Your Results
* Compare **trial balances**, **profit & loss**, and **reconciliations** between Digits and your old system.
* See how Digits **automatically categorizes transactions** and make sure it lines up with your expectations.
* Note any differences and confirm everything is accurate.
Once you’re confident the numbers match and Digits reflects your business correctly, you can stop closing in your old system and manage everything in **Digits** going forward. No new setup required.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### If You Decide Not to Switch
If you’d rather stay with your current setup:
* You can [cancel directly inside Digits](/my-business-account/cancel-digits) **(**no need to contact support or explain).
* Your old system remains exactly as it was; Digits never changes or deletes anything in it.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Find a Digits Accounting Firm — For Business Owners
Find a trusted, Digits-certified accounting firm that delivers smarter, faster financial insights.
***
### What Is the Digits Accounting Firm Directory?
The [Digits Accounting Firm Directory](https://accountants.digits.com/) helps business owners find trusted, verified accounting firms that use Digits for modern, accurate, and always-up-to-date bookkeeping.
Every listed firm is Digits Certified and trained in automation, accuracy, and insight-driven financial management.
***
### Why Choose a Digits-Certified Firm
The Digits Accounting Firm Directory makes it easy to find accounting partners you can trust. Whether you're running a fast-growing startup or managing a steady services business, working with a Digits-certified firm gives you:
✅ Verified expertise — all listed firms are trained and certified by Digits\
✅ AI-powered workflows that reduce manual work and deliver real-time insights\
✅ Faster closes, cleaner books, and greater visibility into your financials\
✅ A focus on efficiency, accuracy, and proactive guidance
Each firm listing includes:
* Firm overview and specialties
* Contact info and location
* Industry focus and preferred tools
* Verified Digits Certification Badge
Tip: Use filters to search by industry, services offered, and pricing structure to find the right fit for your business.
***
### How to Find an Accountant
1. Go to the [Digits Accounting Firm Directory](https://accountants.digits.com/)
2. Filter by industry, service, or location. Review firm profiles and contact a partner directly
3. Your accountant will help connect your banks, cards, and payroll tools to start syncing live data.
**DISCLAIMER**\
*Digits Partners are accounting professionals, bookkeepers, and system integrators who specialize in implementing and optimizing accounting processes using Digits.*
*Partners listed in the Digits Partner Directory are Digits Certified, indicating a verified and advanced understanding of Digits’ platform, including best practices and more complex functionality. We recommend reviewing each Partner’s qualifications and experience to determine the best fit for your specific accounting or advisory needs.*
**Please note:**
1. Partners are independent professionals and are not employees, agents, or representatives of Digits.
2. Any services provided by a Partner are offered directly by that Partner and are solely their responsibility. Digits does not warrant, oversee, or assume any liability for services rendered by Partners.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions How are firms selected for the Directory?
All firms must be Digits Certified and meet ongoing quality standards.
How much does it cost to use a Directory firm?
Pricing is set by each accounting firm. You can contact them directly through their profile to learn more.
Do these firms only work with tech companies?
Not at all. Many Directory firms support professional services, agencies, and more. Use filters to find a match for your industry.
What if I don’t find a firm that fits?
Try the Get Matched option in the [Directory](https://accountants.digits.com/) to find the perfect fit. Still can't find a match? Reach out to us at I'm a business owner — how do I find a bookkeeper or accountant who uses Digits?
Digits maintains a directory of certified accounting partners (bookkeepers, accountants, and CPA firms) who use Digits to manage client books. You can browse the full directory at [accountants.digits.com](https://accountants.digits.com/), where you can filter by state, industry, and services offered.
If you'd prefer to be matched with a firm rather than browse yourself, use the **Get Matched for Free** option on that page, and Digits will connect you with a partner that fits your business.
Every firm listed in the directory is Digits Certified and has met active client requirements, so you can feel confident in the quality of partners you'll find there.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
# Digits Connections: Banks & Cards via Plaid
Connect your business bank and credit card accounts to Digits for real-time updates, smart categorization, and syncing with over 12,000+ U.S. financial institutions.
***
### How to Connect Your Bank
1. In the left navigation menu, click **Connections**.
2. Click **Banks & Cards**.
3. Choose a bank from the list, or use Search to find it.
4. Click **Connect**, then follow the prompts to finish linking the account.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** If you manage multiple accounts, log in to Plaid as a **Guest** to avoid linking the wrong ones.
{% endhint %}
***
### Supported Banks & Financial Institutions
Digits connects to banks and credit cards using **Plaid**. Most major **U.S. banks** and many **U.S.-based credit unions** are supported.
For more information on what banks are supported, see: [Digits Availability, Banks, & Currency Support](/business-getting-started/digits-availability-banks-and-currency-support)
What does "supported" mean?
Digits connects to banks and credit cards using **Plaid.**
A bank or financial institution is considered **supported** if:
* It’s available through Plaid, and
* It allows transaction data to be shared programmatically
Most major **U.S. banks** and many **U.S.-based credit unions** meet these requirements.
Does Digits support international banks?
No. Digits does **not** support:
* Non-U.S. banks
* International-only financial institutions
* Foreign bank feeds, even for U.S.-based users
Digits relies on U.S. banking infrastructure and USD-based accounting.
International support is on our radar and on our roadmap. We don’t have timelines to announce yet—but when support lands, you’ll see it in the [**Digits changelog**](https://updates.digits.com/changelog).
What if my bank isn't supported?
As long as your client's transactions are in USD, you can import them using a .csv.
See: [Importing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/importing-transactions)
***
### What Happens After Connection
Once your accounts are connected, **Digits automatically gets to work**:
* Imports available historical transactions from Plaid (up to 24 months, depending on your financial institution).
* Captures key transaction fields:
* Date
* Amount
* Description (including party info, where available)
* :sparkles: Categorizes transactions automatically and assigns parties intelligently.
* Starts a frequent sync to keep data continuously up to date.
***
### Can’t Connect Your Bank? Use CSV Import
If your bank isn’t supported, you can upload your transactions manually.
1. Export a **CSV file** from your bank.
2. Go to **Ledger → All Transactions.**
3. Click the dropdown next to **New Transaction → Import Bank Transactions**.
4. Download and fill out the CSV template.
5. Upload the file and map the fields.
6. Select the correct **bank or card category**, then click **Next**.
See also: [Importing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/importing-transactions)
***
### Manage Your Bank Connection
* [Change the Start Date for a Connection](/business-connections/start-date)
* [Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits](/business-connections/remove-transactions)
* [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
* [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
***
### Automatic Statement Fetching via Plaid
Digits automatically fetches official **bank statements** from supported institutions. They appear directly in the Vault, keeping everything centralized for audits and reporting.
**Currently supported banks include:**\
*Acorns, Altruist, American Bank (TX) - Business Banking, Aspire, Atlas, Bank of America, CCBank (Business & Personal), Chariot, Chase, Citibank Online, Cogent Bank - Cogent Connection, Columbia Bank (Commercial), Crew Finance, Dama Financial by LeafLink, Dappr, Double Finance, Dupaco Credit Union, Exponent, Fifth Third Bank, First Bank of Ironharbor, Gemini Credit Card, GuideStone Financial Resources, Huntington Bank, Karat Financial, Klutch, Loop Financial (US), Mass Finance Inc., Meow, Mercury, Navy Federal Credit Union, Parker, Percapita Group, Ramp, Regions Bank, Rent App, Safra National Bank, Slash, Spruce, Square, Truist, Upgrade, U.S. Bank, and Wells Fargo.*
***
### Troubleshooting & Reconnecting Banks
If data looks **stale or incomplete**:
* Reconnect the bank from the **Connections** page (using the same steps above).
* Ensure all accounts meant to sync are still selected during the Plaid flow.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does Digits have a plan for global expansion?
International support—including non-U.S. banks and non-U.S. currency functionality—is in the works. It’s a big lift, but it's on our radar as part of Digits' long-term expansion.
Why can’t I see all activity for my Mercury Treasury or investment account?
Digits supports connecting investment accounts through Plaid, including Mercury Treasury accounts. However, Mercury Treasury accounts are currently missing some transaction types, specifically dividends, interest, and management fees.
You’ll still see large transfers in and out of your Treasury account, like auto-transfers, liquidations, and investments. But the monthly activity within the portfolio, such as dividend payments from money market funds and advisory fees, is not showing up.
This is a known issue on Plaid’s side. The data feed we receive for Mercury Treasury (investment or brokerage) accounts only includes cash transfers between your bank accounts and the Treasury portfolio. The dividend, interest, and fee activity that appears on your monthly Apex Clearing statement is not currently being pulled in.
We’re actively working with Plaid to improve this. In the meantime, refer to your statements for a complete view of activity.
What if I connected the wrong bank account, or want to remove one later?
You can archive or delete the existing connection and then add the new one—no need to start from scratch.
See [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
What if my bank doesn’t support Plaid?
No worries—you can still get clean books in Digits.\
You can still import transactions into Digits by uploading a bank statement (PDF/PNG/JPG/JPEG) or a CSV file.\
See: [Importing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/importing-transactions)
How do I import bank data if the bank account is closed?
If you can’t connect to the bank via Plaid, import using CSV or PDF statements instead.\
See: [Importing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/importing-transactions)
Can I remove sub-accounts from a connection?
Some financial institutions group multiple cards or sub-accounts under a single connection (for example, employee cards or personal cards issued under the same business account). Digits currently does not support removing or deselecting individual sub-accounts within a connection when they are grouped this way by your bank.
Can I use Digits without connecting a bank account?
No. Connecting at least one bank or financial account is currently required to set up a business in Digits.
At this time, you can't onboard by importing journal entries or uploading CSV files instead of connecting a bank account.
If you'd like to see support for CSV-only onboarding or manual journal entry imports, we'd love to hear your feedback. It helps us prioritize future improvements.
Can I connect a loan account?
Loan accounts aren't supported through bank connections and won't appear as an option when linking. Track a loan by creating a liability category and importing the loan statement manually.
I reconnected my bank, and now I have duplicate accounts. How do I avoid or fix that?
When reconnecting a bank you've linked before, reconnect through the existing connection and select **Add New Account(s)**. This updates the existing connection and won't create duplicate accounts.
Selecting **Connect with New Credentials** creates a new connection and duplicate accounts. Digits doesn't automatically merge duplicate connections.
If you've already created duplicate accounts, archive and delete the duplicate connection to remove the duplicate accounts and their synced transactions.
Why are all of my bank subaccounts grouped under one account?
This depends on how your bank shares account information through Plaid.
If your bank provides each account separately, you can select and reconcile each account on its own.
Some banks group subaccounts under a primary account instead. In those cases, the subaccounts can't be selected separately, and their transactions may appear under the primary account rather than in separate registers.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Connections: Ramp
Connect your Ramp account to Digits for a seamless workflow — no manual entry required. Transactions sync directly into your general ledger.
***
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Note:** Ramp is the source of truth. Changes should be made in Ramp unless otherwise noted.
{% endhint %}
### Before You Connect
Before connecting Ramp to Digits:
* **Make sure you have admin access.** You’ll need it to sign in to Ramp and disconnect your current accounting provider.
* **Choose a transition date.** This is the date you’ll stop using your current accounting system and start using Digits.
* **Pay approved Ramp bills before your transition date.** Unpaid bills that carry over between systems can create reconciliation issues. Avoid creating new bills until the transition is complete.
* **Sync card transactions dated before the transition date** to your previous accounting system. Wait a few days for pending charges to clear, then complete the sync. Leave transactions dated after the transition date unsynced.
* **Sync approved reimbursements** dated on or before the transition date to your previous accounting system.
* **Complete a final close** in your previous accounting system. Generate and save your final financial statements or trial balance.
* **Export and delete approved but unpaid bills** from Ramp. You’ll recreate them after connecting Digits.
***
### How to Connect to Ramp
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Step 1: Disconnect Any Previous Integration
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Ramp only connects to one accounting platform at a time. If you previously used another system like Puzzle, you’ll need to disconnect it before continuing.
For detailed instructions, visit [**Ramp’s Migration Help Article**](https://support.ramp.com/hc/en-us/articles/9503285589267-Migrating-to-an-ERP-Without-a-Direct-Ramp-Integration#h_01GCVJSJ5ZH8N3F8JHTMCXAHX8)
{% endhint %}
1. Sign in to Ramp
2. Go to [Ramp's Accounting settings](https://app.ramp.com/accounting/ramp-card/needs-review/manage)
3. Scroll to Danger Zone
4. Select Disconnect Accounting
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you're importing trial balances instead of historical transactions, reports won't span both systems. Import historical transactions if you need complete reporting.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 2: Connect Ramp to Digits
1. Log in to your **Digits dashboard**.
2. From the left navigation menu, click **Connections**.
3. Go to the **Bills & Expenses** tab.
4. Find **Ramp** and click **Connect**.
5. Once Ramp is connected, you’ll be asked to **map categories** (i.e., choose where things go in your books) for:
* **Cards & Reimbursements**
* **Bills**
{% hint style="info" icon="sitemap" %}
**Tip:** These mappings ensure transactions land correctly in your chart of accounts.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 3: Post-Connection Cleanup in Ramp
After Ramp is connected to Digits, there are a few final steps to make sure everything syncs smoothly:
1. **Complete your accounting setup in Ramp.**\
Map the right **A/P (Accounts Payable)** and **Cash** accounts for cards, reimbursements, and bills.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Ramp may prompt you to enter a Cash Account Name (from your GL) and a Unique Account ID.\
These are only used for Ramp’s CSV exports and do not affect your Digits connection.\
If prompted:
* Enter n/a for both fields
* Continue with setup — your Digits sync will not be impacted
If you need help, your Ramp account manager can guide you.
{% endhint %}
2. **Remap your vendors, rules, and card programs.**\
When you switch accounting systems, your old rules and mappings don’t carry over. You’ll need to:
* Reassign vendors
* Update any automatic rules
* Re-map card programs\
so they line up with your **Digits chart of accounts**.\
The good news: you’ll only have to do this **once**.
3. **Recreate any unpaid bills you deleted earlier.**\
Add those bills back into Ramp and **assign them to your clearing account** (an account you use temporarily to hold amounts until they’re fully matched).
4. **Post a manual journal entry in Digits to clear your suspense account.**\
This step ties everything out so no leftover balance is hanging around in a “suspense” or “uncategorized” bucket. In Digits, create a journal entry like this:
* **Debit (Dr)**: Accounts Payable *(no vendor)*
* **Credit (Cr)**: Clearing Account
This moves the balance from your suspense/temporary account into the correct place.
5. **Start fresh.**\
At this point, you can:
* Resume syncing card transactions and reimbursements from Ramp into Digits
* Begin approving and paying bills as usual, with everything flowing into Digits going forward
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### How to Sync Ongoing Transactions from Ramp to Digits
{% hint style="danger" icon="siren-on" %}
Due to current Ramp limitations, transactions (including expenses and reimbursements) must be **manually marked as Ready to Export** within Ramp before Digits can sync them.
This step must be completed directly in Ramp.
{% endhint %}
#### For Credit Cards, Expenses, and Reimbursements
1. In Ramp, go to the **Accounting** tab.
2. Find the expenses or reimbursements you want Digits to sync.
3. Select each one individually, or use **bulk select** to choose many at once.
4. Click **Mark Ready** — this moves them into the **Ready to Export** state so Digits can pull them in.
⚠️ **Important:** After a transaction is marked Ready in Ramp, you **cannot** edit its category there, but you **can still change it later in Digits**.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Tip:** If a transaction doesn’t have a category yet, you can set it to **Uncategorized Expense**. Digits will automatically categorize it after it syncs in.
**Pro Tip:** Use Ramp’s bulk edit tools to assign categories and mark many transactions “Ready” in one go. It’s much faster than doing them one at a time.
{% endhint %}
***
#### If You Use Ramp for Bill Pay
No manual steps required!\
Ramp automatically syncs bills with Digits:
* When **approved**
* Again when **paid**
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
I disconnected Puzzle, but still can't connect Digits. What should I do?
Puzzle and other ledgers show up in Ramp as “Accounting.” Be sure you’ve clicked Disconnect Accounting from[ this Ramp page](https://app.ramp.com/accounting/manage).
If you still see a “PUZZLE\_FINANCIAL already connected” error, it means Ramp hasn’t fully released the previous connection. Try logging out, then logging back into Ramp and checking again—or contact Ramp support directly.
Is the Ramp integration a two-way sync with Digits?
No. Ramp → Digits is one-way. Mark transactions as “ready to sync” in Ramp, and Digits pulls them into the Ledger. Digits does not push data back to Ramp.
What should I do if the person who authorized Ramp leaves?
Have a current Ramp admin re-authorize the connection from **Digits**. Re-authorizing updates the existing connection in place, so your connection history is preserved. You don't need to archive, delete, or disconnect the existing connection first.
{% hint style="warning" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
You must re-authorize using the same Ramp business. If you authorize with a different Ramp account, you'll receive an error indicating that a different Ramp account was used
{% endhint %}
Why doesn't my Ramp account appear after I connected it through Plaid?
Make sure you connected Ramp using the dedicated Ramp connection, not Banks & Cards through Plaid.
If you've already connected Ramp through Plaid, archive the Plaid connection to preserve its history, then create a new connection using the dedicated Ramp connector.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Connections: Stripe
Connect Stripe to Digits to sync online payments automatically and cut down on manual work in your books.
***
### Sync Overview
* `payout`
* `payout_failure`
* `charge`
* `payment`
* `stripe_fee`
* `refund`
* `payment_refund`
* `topup`
* `adjustment`
If a fee or transaction type isn’t synced, you can manually add it in **Ledger** → **New Transaction.**
***
### Before You Start
Before connecting Stripe to Digits:
* Make sure you have **Admin** access to your Stripe account, or have someone with the appropriate permissions complete the connection.
***
### How to Connect Stripe
To connect your Stripe account to Digits:
1. From the left navigation menu, click **Connections**
2. Click the **Revenue** tab.
3. Find **Stripe** and click **Connect**.
4. Log in to your **Stripe account** (or have someone with access log in) and approve the permissions.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** If you use Stripe for more than one business or account, double-check you’re connecting the **right Stripe account** before you approve access.
{% endhint %}
***
### What Happens After Connection
Once connected, :sparkles: Digits will automatically:
* Import your full Stripe transaction history.
* Start analyzing and posting those transactions into your books.
* Automatically categorize transactions and assign customers or other parties.
* Begin a frequent sync to keep Stripe data in Digits up to date.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** The first import may take a while if you have a long Stripe history or a high volume of payments.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why don’t I see all invoices from Stripe in Digits?
Only invoices paid *through Stripe* are synced to Digits.
If a payment was processed outside of Stripe, the invoice won’t appear automatically — manually enter it in **Ledger → All Transactions.**
What data does Stripe sync into Digits?
Digits imports your Stripe balance transactions — including payments, refunds, fees, and payouts — directly into the Ledger for automatic categorization and reconciliation.
Does Digits sync Stripe Capital loan withholdings?
No. Stripe does not report Stripe Capital loan withholdings (paydown events) to Digits, so they won't appear automatically in your Ledger. To keep your loan balance and gross revenue accurate, we recommend exporting your Stripe Capital transactions from Stripe as a CSV and importing them manually into Digits. From there, you can categorize them to the appropriate liability account.
See: [Importing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/importing-transactions)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Connections: BILL
Connect BILL to Digits to sync bills and customer payments automatically and keep your records up to date.
***
### Sync Overview
The following diagram shows what data syncs between BILL and Digits and the direction of each sync.
***
### Before You Connect
Before connecting BILL:
* You must be a BILL administrator.
* You must have permission to create Sync Tokens in BILL.
* If reconnecting BILL, disconnect any previous integration first (if applicable).
***
### How to Connect to BILL
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Warning:** You will need administrator privileges in BILL in order to connect.
{% endhint %}
To connect a BILL account:
1. From the left navigation menu, click **Connections**.
2. Click the **Bills & Expenses** tab.
3. Find **BILL** and click **Connect**.
4. Log in to your **BILL account** to generate a **Sync Token**.
***
#### How to Generate a Sync Token in BILL
1. In BILL, go to **Settings** → **Sync & Integrations** → **Tokens.**
2. Click **New.**
3. Enter a **Name** for the Token, then click **Save.**
4. Copy the **Token Name** and **Token Password.**
{% hint style="danger" %}
**WARNING:** Save the **Token Name** and **Password** before leaving the page—they’re only shown once:exclamation:
{% endhint %}
Then, back in **Digits:**
5. Enter the **Token Name** and **Token Password** in Digits.
6. Click **Connect.**
7. Once connected, Digits begins syncing data automatically.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**If you already created a Sync Token before:**\
BILL will show only the *Token Name* — not the password.\
To get a new Token Password, you’ll need to **create a new Sync Token** (repeat step 1).
{% endhint %}
***
### What Happens After Connection
Once connected, **✨**Digits will automatically:
* Import your full transaction history from BILL
* Sync new bills, invoices, and payments automatically
* Automatically categorize and assign parties
* Start a sync to keep the Ledger updated
{% hint style="info" icon="clock" %}
Import time may vary based on the data volume and activity in BILL.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why don’t I see older transactions in Digits?
Digits imports all historical transactions available through the BILL API. If data appears to be missing, verify that the transaction history is accessible in your BILL account, or re-sync it from your dashboard.
What should I do if the BILL connection stops syncing?
Reconnect from the **Connections** tab in your dashboard. If errors persist, contact Digits Support at [help@digits.com](mailto:).
What is a Sync Token?
A Sync Token is a name and password pair used only for syncing BILL with other platforms—it can’t be used to log into your BILL or Digits account.
Will my BILL categories and GL coding carry over into Digits?
No. Digits does not sync or map category/GL coding data from BILL. Instead, Digits uses its own AI-based approach to automatically categorize imported bills and payments. If a transaction is categorized differently from what you expected, you can update it directly in the Digits Ledger.
What data syncs between Digits and BILL?
Data Element
Synced?
Direction
Notes
Vendor Bills (Invoices)
Yes
One-Way BILL → Digits
Bill details (vendor, amount, due date, status)
Vendor Payments
Yes
One-Way BILL → Digits
Payment amount, method, date, vendor
Bill-to-Payment Linkage
Yes
One-Way BILL → Digits
Shows which bills have been paid and how
Customers
Yes
One-Way BILL → Digits
Customer records
Customer Invoices (A/R)
Yes
One-Way BILL → Digits
Customer invoices
Invoice Payments
Yes
One-Way BILL → Digits
Payments and partial payments received for invoices
Credit Memos/ Vendor Refunds
Partial
One-Way BILL → Digits
May sync if supported via BILL's API
Bill Categories/ GL Coding
No
—
Digits does not sync or map BILL categories.
File Attachments (PDFs, Receipts)
No
—
Attachment support coming soon!
Approval Status/ Workflows
No
—
Approval logic and workflows are not pulled into Digits
Vendor Notes/ Internal Comments
No
—
Notes within BILL are not ingested
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Payroll Connections: Gusto
Connect Gusto to Digits to sync payroll automatically and cut down on manual bookkeeping.
***
### How to Connect Gusto
{% hint style="info" %}
New Gusto connections use our new Gusto connector automatically. No upgrade or cutover is required.
{% endhint %}
1. From the left navigation menu, click **Connections**.
2. Click the **Payroll** tab.
3. Find **Gusto** and click **Connect**.
4. In the pop-up window, log in using your **Gusto admin** credentials.
5. Back in Digits, go to the **Manage Connections** settings for Gusto.
6. Choose an **import start date** to decide how far back you want to pull payroll history.
* If you don’t pick a date, Digits will import **all available** Gusto history.
7. ✨ Digits will automatically confirm and map your payroll categories.
8. Review the settings and click to confirm to finish setup.
***
### Upgrade an Existing Gusto Connection (*optional*)
If you already have Gusto connected to Digits, you can switch to the **new Gusto connector** to unlock:
* Department-level payroll data from Gusto
* More detailed benefits (like health, dental, and vision)
#### How to Upgrade
1. Go to **Connections** and select your existing Gusto connection.
2. Click **Upgrade Gusto** and complete the authorization flow.
3. In **Manage**, set a **Cutover date** — the first date you want the new connector to own.
* *Example:* Set **Oct 1** to have the new connector record transactions from Oct 1 forward (the prior connector ends on Sep 30).
4. Click **Save.** Digits will handle the switch automatically.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Transactions on/after your Cutover date are recorded by the new connector and replace entries from the prior connector for that period.
{% endhint %}
***
### What Happens After You Connect
Digits will:
* Import historical payroll transactions from Gusto
* Begin syncing new payroll activity automatically based on your set preferences
* Starts a frequent sync to keep everything up to date
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Import time varies depending on the volume of Gusto data.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** Digits currently does **not** support off-cycle payrolls. These must be entered manually in Digits.
{% endhint %}
***
### Category Guide for Gusto Transaction Imports
Understanding how Gusto payroll shows up in your **bank account** makes it easier to review and categorize these entries in Digits.
Here’s how Gusto typically behaves:
#### Primary Payroll Debits
Gusto processes three core debits from your bank account, executed **three business days prior to payday**:
* **Employee Pay** – Direct deposit salaries
* **Employee Reimbursements** – Out-of-pocket expenses paid back to employees
* **Payroll Taxes** – Federal, state, and local tax payments
Gusto makes sure these funds reach your employees and the tax authorities on time. Digits then imports those debits and maps them to the correct payroll categories.
#### Additional Debits You May See
Depending on how you’ve set up Gusto, you may also see:
* Contractor Payments
* Gusto Monthly Invoices
* Historical Tax Payments
These will appear as separate line items in the **Ledger** and may need a quick review to ensure they’re categorized where you want them in your books.
***
### Bank Codes Reference
To make it easier to review your bank feed, Gusto tags each payroll-related transaction with a **short code** in the bank description. For example:
* `PAY` for Employee Pay
* `TAX` for Payroll Taxes
These codes help you quickly recognize what each transaction is when you’re looking at your bank feed in Digits.
You can use the full reference table from Gusto (and in your Digits help docs) to match each code to its meaning. For more details, see [**Gusto’s Help Center**](https://support.gusto.com/).
Transaction Type
Code
Transaction Type
Code
Bank Verification Credit
BVC
Credit Payroll Fee - Invoice Refund
INV
Bank Verification Debit
BBV
Credit Tax
TXP
Credit Child Support Garnishment
CSC
Credit Tax Liability Refund
TLR
Credit Contractor Pay
CON
Credit Tax Penalty
TPI
Credit Contractor Payment Refund
CRF
Credit Tax Refund
TRC
Credit Donation
DCR
Credit Wages Refund
PAR
Credit Employee Pay
PAY
Debit Child Support Garnishment
CSD
Credit Employee Savings
SAV
Debit Contractor Pay
CND
Credit Flex Pay Fee (Modern Bank)
FPF
Debit Donation
DDR
Credit Flex Pay Principal (Modern Bank)
FPP
Debit Employee Wages
PDR
Credit Flex Pay Repayment (Modern Bank)
FRP
Debit Historical Payroll Taxes
HPT
Credit Internal Error Expense (Concessions)
IEE
Debit Net Pay
NET
Credit Internal Transfer Child Support Garnishment
ITG
Debit Overpayment
DOV
Credit Internal Transfer Contractor Pay
ITC
Debit Payroll Fee
FEE
Credit Internal Transfer Employee Pay
ITE
Debit Refund
RFD
Credit Internal Transfer Fees and Penalties
ITF
Debit Reimbursement
REM
Credit Internal Transfer Invoices
ITI
Debit Tax
TAX
Credit Internal Transfer Other
ITO
Debit Tax Correction
TCD
Credit Internal Transfer Overpayment
ITP
Electronic Bank Verification - Credit Test Transaction
EBV
Credit Internal Transfer Tax Payment
ITT
Flex Pay Debit (Modern Bank)
FPD
Credit Transfer Verification
ITV
International Contractor Pay
ICD
Credit Overpayment
COV
Tax Department Payment
TAX DEP
Credit Partner Revenue Share
PRS
Wire Payment Fee
WPF
***
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Want a quick snapshot of headcount or payroll trends?
You can add a **Gusto-powered widget** to your Digits home dashboard:
1. Go to **Home → Edit**.
2. Search for the **Gusto** widget.
3. Drag it onto your dashboard layout.
See: [Customize Your Dashboard](/business-home/customize-dashboards)
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does Digits support off-cycle payrolls from Gusto?
Not yet. Off-cycle payrolls aren’t supported through the Gusto connection and must be entered manually in the Ledger.
Do I need to review mapping settings?
Yes. While Digits handles initial category and party mappings, it’s a good idea to review and update mappings regularly to ensure accuracy over time.
Will upgrading duplicate journal entries?
No. The Cutover date controls ownership. Transactions on/after that date are recorded by the new connector and replace the prior connector’s entries for that period.
How far back can the new connector import?
It can be imported back to your Gusto account’s inception.
If I'm upgrading, do I need to disconnect my current Gusto connection first?
No. Keep it connected—click **Upgrade Gusto**, set your Cutover date, and save.
Can I see payroll details broken out by type directly in Digits?
When you're viewing a report, you can hover over Gusto data to see payroll details broken down by type — such as Payroll Taxes, Employee Pay, and Gross Salary — right inside Digits. There's no need to log into Gusto separately. This makes it easy to review and analyze payroll activity as part of your regular monthly close without switching between tools.
Can I set a custom import date for Gusto payroll imports?
Yes. You can set a start date for your Gusto connection:
1. Go to **Connections** → **My Connections**
2. Click **Manage** next to **Gusto**
3. Turn off **Historical transaction import**
4. Set the **Start date** for the account
Digits will import Gusto transactions starting from that date.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Payroll Connections
Connect your payroll provider to Digits to automatically sync payroll data — no manual journal entries needed.
***
Digits supports a wide range of payroll providers, giving you flexibility to connect to the system you're already using.
### Supported Payroll Providers
Digits currently supports the following providers:
{% columns %}
{% column %}
* ADP Run
* ADP Workforce Now
* AlphaStaff
* Counter Point HCM
* ECCA
* Heartland
* Justworks
* OnPay
* Paychex Flex
* Paycom
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
* Paycor
* Payday Payroll
* Paylocity
* Proxus HR
* QuickBooks Online Payroll
* Sequoia One
* Square Payroll
* TriNet HR Platform (fka Zenefits)
* UKG Pro
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
### How to Connect Your Payroll Provider
1. In the left navigation, click **Connections**.
2. Click the **Payroll** tab.
3. Find your payroll provider in the list or use the search function at the top.
4. Click **Connect.**
5. In the pop-up window, log in using your payroll admin credentials and authorize the connection.
6. Back in Digits, go to the **Manage Connections** settings for the new connection.
7. Choose an import start date to decide how far back you want to pull payroll history.
8. Review the settings and click to confirm.
✨ Digits will automatically begin syncing payroll transactions from your provider.
#### What Happens After You Connect
Digits will:
* Import historical payroll transactions from your provider based on your start date
* Begin syncing new payroll activity automatically
* Start an automatic sync to keep everything up to date
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Import time varies depending on the volume of payroll data from your provider.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
A payroll provider I need isn't listed. Can I request it?
Yes! Through our integration partner Finch, we have access to additional providers with more involved onboarding requirements. If you're willing to test with us, let us know — we're happy to explore enabling it. Contact us at .
Do I still need to record manual payroll if my provider is supported?
No. Once connected, payroll syncs automatically. Manual payroll entries are only needed if your provider is not yet supported. See: [Broken mention](broken://pages/47AEY9vhW0bskMtlsYsh)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Recording Manual Payroll in Digits
Digits syncs payroll automatically through Gusto and 15+ other providers (including ADP, Paychex, and QuickBooks Payroll) via our payroll connector. Use a manual journal entry only for a provider that isn't on the supported list.
***
### How to Record Manual Payroll
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Step 1: Run Payroll Reports from Your Provider
1. Export a **payroll journal** from your payroll system for the relevant pay period. (CSV or Excel formats work best.)
2. Review the report to identify key categories, such as:
* **Gross salaries/wages**
* **Benefits** (e.g., health insurance, retirement contributions)
* **Employer payroll taxes**
These totals are what you’ll use in Digits.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 2: Record the Payroll Journal Entry in Digits
1. From your dashboard, go to **Accounting → Ledger**.
2. Click **New Transaction → Journal.**
3. Using the numbers from your payroll report, enter each part of payroll, for example:
* **Salaries** – Total gross wages paid
* **Benefits** – Employer-paid benefits (e.g., insurance, retirement)
* **Payroll Taxes** – Employer tax liabilities
4. For the **net pay** (the actual amount pulled from your bank by the payroll provider), post that amount to your **Payroll Clearing** account (a temporary holding account used to match payroll withdrawals).
5. Double-check all details and click **Save & Close.**
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Ensure the **Payroll Clearing** account matches the one tied to your payroll withdrawals.
{% endhint %}
**See also:** [Journal Entries in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/journal-entries)
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 3: Verify Your Bank Sync and Account Mapping
* **Verify the bank connection.**
* Confirm the payroll bank account is connected in Digits.
* See: [Digits Connections: Banks & Cards via Plaid](/business-connections/plaid)
* **Confirm mapping.**
* Make sure payroll withdrawals are being recorded in the **Payroll Clearing** account.
* **Check for missing or duplicate entries.**
* Compare your payroll report with entries in the **Ledger.**
* Add or adjust any missed transactions.
* **Recheck totals.**
* Ensure the journal entry totals match the net pay and payroll withdrawals exactly.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 4: Review and Maintain Regularly
To keep payroll data accurate, set a recurring cadence to review:
* Incoming payroll bank payments
* Posted journal entries
* Remaining balances in clearing accounts
{% hint style="info" %}
**Best Practice:** Regular reviews help prevent misstatements and keep your books clean and current.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I automate payroll if I don't use Gusto?
Digits syncs payroll automatically through Gusto and 15+ other providers (including ADP, Paychex, and QuickBooks Payroll) via our payroll connector. Use a manual journal entry only for a provider that isn't on the supported list. See [Payroll Connections](/business-connections/payroll-connections)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Linking Multiple Chase Accounts to Separate Legal Entities in Digits
If you have multiple Chase accounts under a single login and want to connect them to different legal entities in Digits, there’s a key limitation to be aware of: **Plaid and Chase do not support linking the same login to multiple connections.**
**The solution: Use separate Chase logins**
To ensure each account connects to the correct Digits legal entity:
* **Create authorized-user logins in Chase** for each account you want to connect.
* Use **each authorized user's login separately** when connecting Chase to Digits.
* **Follow these steps for each account** you want to connect in Digits.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### **Add an Authorized User on Chase**
1. Log in to your **Primary Chase** account.
2. Select **Account Management**, then **Access & Security Manager**.
3. Click **Add Authorized User.**
4. Next, add the authorized user’s information, such as name, email address, phone number, and username, and click **Next**.
5. On the next screen, select **Third-Party App Access**.
6. A pop-up will confirm if you want to enable Third-Party App Access. Click **Turn On.**
7. Select the account you want to create a login for.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** Only select one account per authorized login.
{% endhint %}
8. Review the information and click **Next.**
9. Chase will send a temporary password to the email address that was entered.
10. Once you receive the temporary password, you'll need to log in and finalize setting up the account.
11. Repeat these instructions for each business account you want to set up separately in Digits.
**Watch this video from Chase for a full walkthrough:** [How to Add Users in Chase Business Banking](https://www.chase.com/digital/customer-service/helpful-tips/business-banking/security/add-users)
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### **Log in to Digits & Connect to Chase**
Once you’ve been added as an authorized user and can access the necessary Chase accounts:
1. Go to [digits.com](https://my.digits.com/) and log in.
2. Click **Add a Business** to start setup.
3. Select your setup method:
* **Starting Fresh with Digits**
* **QuickBooks Migration**
* **Non-QuickBooks Migration**
4. Enter your basic business details and click **Add Business**.
5. When the pop-up prompts you to connect bank and credit card accounts, choose:
* **Chase** (if it appears as an option), or
* **10,000+ Other Banks** if Chase is not listed.
6. Click **Continue as Guest.**
7. Select **Chase** as the banking institution.
8. Use your authorized user name and password from Chase to link your authorized user account.
9. Follow the prompts to complete the connection.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** You can only select the account that the authorized user is permitted to access. Each login should display and link to just one account.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Important:** To add the next authorized user as a separate client in Digits, you'll need to fully log out of Digits first. Then, log back in and repeat the process starting from Step One.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Linking Only Your Chase Business Accounts to Digits
Use these steps to connect only your Chase business accounts to Digits, not your personal accounts.
***
### Before You Connect: Use the Owner Login
If you use Chase for both **business and personal banking**—or have multiple Chase accounts—start the Digits → Plaid connection using your **owner login**.
**Why this matters:**
* Only the **owner login** can choose which specific accounts to share with Digits.
* If an admin or other user starts the connection, the **account selection screen may not appear**, and **all accounts** under that Chase login can be shared with Digits.
* This is enforced by both **Plaid’s flow** and **Chase’s security settings**.
{% hint style="info" %}
If the wrong accounts keep showing up, log out of Chase completely or open the connection in an **incognito/private window** to clear cached sessions.
{% endhint %}
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Part 1: Modify Account Sharing on Chase
This part happens on the **Chase website** and controls which accounts Plaid (and therefore Digits) can see.
To share **only your business accounts** with Digits:
1. Log in to **chase.com**.
2. Go to the **Security & Privacy** tab.
3. In **Linked Apps & Websites**, find **Digits via Plaid**.
4. Click **Edit Sharing**.
5. Select **only the accounts you want to share** (your business accounts).
6. Click **I Agree** to save your changes.
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** Chase (via Plaid) only allows account access changes to be made **directly on chase.com**. Even if you remove and reconnect your Chase account in Digits:
* Any accounts you previously shared will still appear
* You **must** update your sharing settings at **chase.com** to deselect accounts
This is the **only way** to remove personal accounts from your Plaid connection.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Part 2: Disconnect the Chase Connection in Digits
Once you’ve updated sharing on Chase, you’ll clean up the old connection inside Digits.
1. Log in to your **Digits dashboard**.
2. From your main view, go to the **client/business** that uses this Chase account (if applicable).
3. Click **Connections** from the left navigation menu.
4. Click **Manage** next to your Chase connection.
5. Click **Archive**.
6. Then click **Delete**.
Archiving removes the active connection; deleting clears it fully from Digits so you can reconnect cleanly.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Part 3: Add the Chase Connection Again
Now you’ll reconnect to Chase, so only the business accounts you approved on Chase show up.
1. Go back to **Connections** in Digits.
2. Click **Add Connection**.
3. Follow the prompts through **Plaid** to connect to Chase.
4. You should now only see the **Chase accounts you approved for sharing** in step 1.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Tips & Troubleshooting
* **Still seeing personal accounts?**\
Double-check the **Edit Sharing** settings on chase.com and ensure only business accounts are selected. Then repeat the disconnect/reconnect steps in Digits.
* **Wrong Chase user showing up?**\
Try logging out of Chase completely or using an **incognito/private browser window**, then restart the connection flow from Digits using your **owner login**.
Related article: [Linking Multiple Chase Accounts to Separate Legal Entities in Digits](/business-connections/linking-multiple-chase-accounts)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Wells Fargo: Remove Unwanted Accounts and Their Transactions
If you connected Wells Fargo and accidentally shared extra accounts, you don’t need to delete your business or start over.
Due to a limitation with Wells Fargo’s Plaid connection, accounts you didn’t intend to share can still appear in Digits. The cleanest fix is to stop Digits from syncing history for the unwanted accounts—this removes their transactions from your books.
***
### Archive & Delete the Unwanted Accounts
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Step 1: Archive the Unwanted Connection
1. Go to **Connections**
2. Locate the **Wells Fargo** connection and click **Manage**
3. In the left panel, select the individual account you want to remove.
4. Click **Archive** and confirm.
5. Repeat for each unwanted account.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 2: Delete the Unwanted Account
{% hint style="warning" %}
Deleting is permanent and cannot be undone. Make sure the account is one you want fully removed before confirming.
{% endhint %}
1. After archiving, select the same account again in the left panel.
2. Click **Delete** and follow the prompts to confirm.
See: [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections) for full instructions.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
### What happens next?
* **All existing transactions** from those accounts are removed from the **Ledger**
* Those accounts will **no longer impact cash balances or reports** (including the P\&L)
* You can keep moving forward—**no reset required**
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Will the accounts still show up in Digits?
They may still appear under the Wells Fargo connection, but with no transactions syncing, they won’t affect the Ledger or reporting.
Do I need to delete and reconnect Wells Fargo?
Usually, no. The Historical Data Sync approach is the quickest way to clean things up without restarting.
Are those transactions “visual only” or are they in the books?
If transactions were imported, they are part of the Ledger until removed. After you apply the steps above, Digits removes them so they **no longer affect your books or reports**.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Developer API
Digits offers a modern API for building integrations and automations on top of an **AI-native accounting platform**—so you can send the data you already have and let Digits handle the accounting structure.
For more information, check out our **Developer docs:**
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why use the Digits API?
Digits is built to reduce the typical “integration tax” of ledger integrations (custom mapping logic, duplicate handling, brittle schemas).
With Digits, you can:
* Send raw transaction data and let the **Agentic General Ledger™** interpret and categorize it
* Avoid duplicate writes with **idempotent requests**
* Build with predictable, typed endpoints and a full OpenAPI spec
Where should I start if I just “need APIs”?
Start with our developer docs:
If you’re unsure what you need yet, email **** and describe what you’re trying to build.
What does the Digits API do?
The Digits API turns raw financial data into structured accounting entries.
It can:
* Create balanced ledger entries automatically
* Categorize transactions without custom rules
* Identify and enrich vendors from raw descriptions
* Apply context like department or location
* Prevent duplicates with idempotent writes
In short: you send transactions, Digits handles the accounting.
Who is the Digits API for?
The Digits API is designed for:
* Product teams embedding accounting into their software
* Platforms ingesting financial or transaction data
* Firms or businesses automating custom workflows
* Developers who want accounting without the overhead
If you already have financial data, the API is likely a fit.
Can I Add a Custom API Inside Digits?
Digits does **not** support creating custom APIs directly inside the product.
Instead:
* You build integrations on top of the Digits API
* Custom logic lives in your own system or middleware
* Digits provides secure API access to supported data and workflows
If you’re looking to “add a custom API,” that usually means connecting Digits to something else, not modifying Digits itself.
Where Is the Digits API Documentation?
Full technical documentation—including authentication, endpoints, and examples—is available here:
**Digits Developer Documentation** Can I integrate Digits with my own system or product?
Yes. You can build your own integration using the Digits API to send data into Digits or interact with ledger data.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Connect Digits to your favorite AI assistant to explore your financial data, pull reports, and run scenarios. Just sign in and start asking.
***
### What is MCP?
MCP helps AI tools, like Claude or ChatGPT, connect to apps like Digits so they can work with your data safely.
The Digits MCP lets your AI assistant connect to your financial data in Digits. You don’t need to set anything complicated up.
Once it’s connected, you can ask questions like “How much did I spend last month?” and your AI assistant will use your Digits data to find the answer.
{% hint style="info" icon="glasses" %}
The Digits MCP server is **read-only.** It can access and analyze your data, but cannot make any changes to your Digits account.
{% endhint %}
***
### Connect to Digits' MCP Server
Connect Digits to your AI tool using the steps below. Each tool may look a little different, but they all use the same link:
`https://api.digits.com/mcp`
You will sign in with your existing Digits account during setup. No API keys or developer accounts are needed.
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Claude Desktop" %}
#### How to Connect Digits to Claude
1. Open the Digits connector in Claude's directory:
2. Click **Connect**
3. Authorize with your existing Digits account when prompted
4. Start a new chat — Claude can now access your Digits data
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Claude Code (CLI)" %}
#### Claude Code (CLI)
1. Open your terminal and run the following command:
```
claude mcp add --transport streamable-http digits https://api.digits.com/mcp
```
1. Authorize OAuth with your Digits account when prompted
2. Start a new conversation, and Claude Code will now have access to your Digits data
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="OpenAI/ ChatGPT" %}
### How to Connect Digits to OpenAI/ ChatGPT
1. Open the Digits app in the OpenAI marketplace:
2. Click **Install**
3. Authorize with your existing Digits account when prompted
4. Start a new chat, select the Digits app, and start asking questions
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Cursor" %}
1. In your Cursor IDE, go to Cursor → Settings → Cursor Settings
2. Go to Tools & MCPs and “Add Custom MCP”, which will open or create the file `~/.cursor/mcp.json`
3. Add the following configuration:
`{`\
`"mcpServers": {`\
`"digits": {`\
`"url": "https://api.digits.com/mcp"`\
`}`\
`}`\
`}`
4. Restart Cursor and authorize OAuth with your Digits account when prompted
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Perplexity" %}
1. Open Perplexity on the web and go to Settings
2. Navigate to the **MCP Servers** section under Labs/Features
3. Click **Add Connector**
1. Name: **Digits**
2. URL: `https://api.digits.com/mcp`
4. Click **Save** and authorize OAuth with your Digits account
5. Click **+** (plus) to enable Digits in the chat UI and start a new thread
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
### What You Can Do With MCP
Once connected, ask a question about a specific account, and your AI assistant will use your Digits data to find the answer.
**Search for transactions**
> *"Show me all transactions from Chase credit card in February."*
**Access your financial statements**
> *"Show me my most recent P\&L statement."*
**Analyze your financials**
> *"How much did salary expense increase year over year?”*
**Work through scenarios**
> *"If we cut expenses by 10%, what would net income look like?”*
**Look up customers or vendors**
> *“Who are the top 5 vendors by spend this quarter?”*
**Review departments and locations**
> *“Break down revenue by department in Q1.”*
***
### Available Tools
The Digits MCP server gives your AI assistant access to a set of tools.
You do not need to use these tools yourself. Your AI assistant will automatically choose the right one based on your question.
Tool
What it does
list_businesses
Lists all businesses you have access to in Digits, including both direct and affiliated entities.
select_business
Selects a specific business to work with for subsequent queries.
list_business_users
Lists all users who have access to a given business.
query_transactions
Searches and filters individual transactions with flexible options including date ranges, amounts, parties, and categories.
search_term
Resolves customer, vendor, category, department, or location names using fuzzy text matching.
list_departments
Lists all departments and their identifiers for a business.
list_locations
Lists all locations and their identifiers for a business.
list_categories
Lists all account categories and their types for a business.
dimensional_summarize_transactions
Aggregates transactions into multi-dimensional summaries — for example, spending by category over time, or revenue by customer per quarter.
financial_statement
Generates complete financial statements: Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, and AR/AP Aging reports. Supports filtering by category, by one or more departments, and by one or more locations — so you can request a department- or location-specific P&L. Additional options include comparison lookback periods, showing account numbers, and fiscal-year start month
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What is MCP?
The Model Context Protocol (MCP) is an open standard that lets AI assistants connect to external tools and data sources. It allows your AI assistant to securely access your Digits data without requiring you to copy and paste information back and forth.
Do I need a developer account to use the Digits MCP server?
No. The Digits MCP server uses your regular Digits login. You do not need to create an app, register as a developer, or set up API keys. Just connect and sign in with your existing Digits account.
Why can't I log in to the Digits MCP?
Make sure you're signing in with the same email and credentials you use to log in to Digits. If you continue to have issues, contact .
Can I write back to Digits from the MCP?
No. The Digits MCP server is currently read-only. It can retrieve and analyze your financial data, but it cannot create, update, or delete anything in your Digits account.
Why can't my AI assistant access bills or invoices in Digits?
The MCP server currently provides access to transactions, financial statements, and organizational data (departments, locations, categories, users). Direct bill and invoice lookups are not yet available as MCP tools, but you can use the AR/AP Aging financial statements to see outstanding receivables and payables.
Is the Digits MCP secure?
Yes. All transmitted data is encrypted and accessed only when explicitly requested by you.
Why is my Digits MCP connection stuck as "Requested"?
If your Digits MCP connection stays in **Requested**, your AI workspace administrator may need to approve the Digits connector.
This is common with managed Claude and other AI workspaces, where connectors require administrator approval before they can be used.
Ask your workspace administrator to approve the Digits connector in your AI provider's admin console. Once it's approved, reconnect or refresh your AI tool.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# How Connections Work
A connection is the link between Digits and an external financial account or service. It allows Digits to automatically import and keep your financial data up to date.
***
### Types of Connections
{% columns %}
{% column %}
**Bank and Card Connections (via Plaid)**
These connect directly to financial institutions like Chase or Bank of America.
Each login creates one connection, which can include multiple accounts, such as checking, savings, or credit cards.
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
**App Connections**
These connect to tools like Gusto (payroll), Stripe (payments), Ramp (cards), or Bill.com.
They use each app’s own authorization flow and may behave differently from bank connections.
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
### Connections vs. Accounts
A connection and an account are not the same:
* A **connection** is the top-level link to an institution or service (for example, Chase)
* An **account** is an individual account within that connection (for example, a checking account or credit card)
A single connection can include multiple accounts.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** If you only need to remove or manage one account, you don’t need to remove the entire connection.
{% endhint %}
***
### How Data Flows In
When you create a connection, you choose a start date. Digits imports transactions from that date forward and continues syncing automatically.
For bank and card connections, you may occasionally need to re-authorize through your bank. This is expected and helps keep the connection active.
***
### Connection Statuses
Status
What it means
Connected
Syncing normally
Connecting
Initial setup or just re-authenticated (may take a few minutes)
Initial Sync In Progress
Waiting for the bank or service to finish adding accounts
Disconnected
Your bank requires you to log in again to resume syncing
Failed
Digits stopped syncing after repeated errors; reconnect to resume.
Re-authentication required
A specific re-authorization is needed (distinct from fully disconnected)
Setup Incomplete
Category mappings or activation steps need to be finished
Awaiting accountant
Setup is pending your accountant finalizing the connection. (This status only applies if your business is managed by an accounting firm.)
Delayed Syncing
Sync is behind. Digits is working on catching it up
Archived
Permanently disconnected; no new data will import
***
### QuickBooks is Not a Connection
QuickBooks works differently from other connections in Digits.
When you connect QuickBooks during setup, Digits imports your historical data up to a selected cutover date. This is a one-time import, not an ongoing sync.
After setup is complete, QuickBooks is no longer connected.
See: [Migrate Data from Quickbooks](/business-getting-started/migrate-from-quickbooks)
***
**Related articles**
* [Change the Start Date for a Connection](/business-connections/start-date)
* [Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits](/business-connections/remove-transactions)
* [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
* [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Change the Start Date for a Connection
Each connection in Digits has a start date that controls how far back transactions are imported. You can update this start date to adjust how much historical data is included.
***
### Before You Start
Digits uses two types of start (cutover) dates:
{% columns %}
{% column %}
**Accounting Start Dates**
Each bank, card, or integration (such as Stripe, Ramp, or payroll) has its own start date.
* Controls how far back data is imported for that connection
* Can be updated at any time
* Cannot be earlier than a QuickBooks cutover date (if one exists)
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
**QuickBooks Cutover Date (initial setup only)**
If you migrated from QuickBooks Online, Digits sets a cutover date during setup.
* Applies to your entire account
* Cannot be changed after setup
* Limits how far back any connection can import data
If you need to change this date, you’ll need to **start over**.
See: [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
{% embed url="" %}
### How to Change a Connection or Account Start Date
1. Click **Connections** in the left navigation
2. Select **My Connections**
3. Click **Manage** next to the connection
4. Click the account in the left panel
5. Turn off **Import all historical transactions**
6. Select a new start date from the calendar
7. Click **Done** to save your changes
{% hint style="danger" icon="calendar-days" %}
**Note:** Plaid can only pull up to 2 years of transaction history for connected bank and credit card accounts.
{% endhint %}
Digits updates which transactions are visible based on the new start date. Transactions before that date will no longer appear.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Cleaning up transactions from before your start date?** If you removed a connection or changed your cutover date and older imported transactions stayed behind, you can remove them individually or in bulk by going to Accounting → Ledger.
{% endhint %}
***
### When to Change the Start Date
Change the start date if:
:octagon-check: Too much historical data was imported
:octagon-check: You want to limit transactions to a specific period
:octagon-check: You’re cleaning up data without removing the entire connection
:hexagon-xmark: You can't update the QuickBooks cutover date after setup. See: [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
**Other Options:**
If updating the start date doesn’t solve your issue:
* **Delete and reconnect the connection** to fully reset imported transactions. See: [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
* **Adjust balances with journal entries** if you’re already live and need to correct historical data. See: [Journal Entries in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/journal-entries)
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Just need to remove a few transactions?** Changing the start date is best when you want to trim the historical range of imports for a connection. To remove individual synced transactions from Plaid, Stripe, or QuickBooks Online without affecting the rest of the connection, see [Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits](/business-connections/remove-transactions)
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I set a future start date?
**Yes.** However, we recommend choosing today's date or an earlier date. If you select a future start date, transactions for that account will remain hidden until that date.
After changing my connection's start date, why is my account balance incorrect?
If you move a connection's start date later, transactions before the new start date are removed, but the original opening balance entry may remain.
After updating the start date, review the account's opening balance. If it no longer reflects the correct starting balance, adjust or delete the opening balance entry.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits
Delete or remove transactions to fix mistakes or clean up imported data from connected accounts.
***
### Delete or Remove transactions in Digits
In Digits, not all transactions can be deleted individually. How you remove or adjust transactions depends on how they were created.
:white\_check\_mark: Manually entered transactions
:white\_check\_mark: Transactions imported via bank statement or CSV
:white\_check\_mark: Entire connections (which removes all transactions from that connection)
:white\_check\_mark: Individual or bulk transactions from synced connections, including QuickBooks, Plaid, Stripe, Ramp, and more
:no\_entry\_sign: Transactions that come from Digits itself (Digits Pay) cannot be deleted
**Other ways to edit or remove transactions:**
* **Re-categorize** the transaction
* **Reverse** it to preserve the audit trail
* **Remove** the connection or account
***
### Delete Individual Synced Transactions
You can delete individual synced transactions from Plaid, Stripe, and QuickBooks Online connections directly from the Ledger — no need to remove the entire connection.
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Open the transaction, or select multiple using bulk edit.
3. **Click** the **trash can** icon and **confirm**.
### Remove Transactions Before a Certain Date
Transactions that come from Digits itself (Digits Pay) cannot be deleted. Everything else can be deleted, including synced transactions. See[Editing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/editing-transactions)
Other options to remove transactions include:
* Adjust the connection start date to limit how much history is imported (*recommended*). See: [Change the Start Date for a Connection](/business-connections/start-date)
* Delete and reconnect the account or connection with a new start date. See: [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
***
### Remove Transactions by Deleting a Connection or Account
To remove **all** transactions from a bank, card, or other account, archive and delete the connection. To remove just a few synced transactions, delete them individually from the Ledger (see *Delete Individual Synced Transactions* above).
Deleting a connection permanently removes all transactions imported from that account and will impact balances, reports, and reconciliations.
See: [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
{% hint style="info" %}
For bank and card connections, you can delete a single account within a connection to remove only that account’s transactions. Other connections (such as Ramp, Stripe, or payroll providers) must be deleted entirely.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I delete all transactions at once?
Yes and no.
* To remove all imported transactions from a single account or connection, [delete the related bank connection](/business-connections/remove-connections).
* Individual synced transactions from Plaid, Stripe, and QBO can also be deleted one at a time or in bulk from the Ledger — useful when you only need to remove a handful of entries rather than wiping the whole connection.
* Manual transactions must be deleted individually or in bulk. See [Editing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/editing-transactions)
Should I just start over?
Starting over is a full reset and is not required for most cleanup tasks.
Only use it if you need to redo your entire setup, such as correcting a QuickBooks cutover date.
See: [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
How do I remove or separate personal transactions from business transactions?
The right approach depends on **where the personal transactions are coming from**. Follow the path below that matches your situation.
#### Scenario 1: Personal and business transactions are mixed in the **same bank account**
If you use **one account** for both personal and business spending:
* You can delete synced transactions, but they will continue to sync
**What you should do instead**
* Create a **Personal Expenses** category (or similar). See: [Categories (Chart of Accounts)](/business-agentic-general-ledger/category-manager)
* Re-categorize personal transactions into that category.
* Exclude that category from business reports if needed.
***
#### Scenario 2: Personal and business accounts were shared under one bank login
Many banks (like Chase) allow multiple accounts under one login. If all were shared during connection, Digits will import all of them—personal included.
**Step 1: Confirm what accounts were shared**
* Check whether both personal and business accounts were selected during the bank connection.
* If yes, Digits is behaving correctly by importing them.
**Step 2: Update account sharing at the bank**
Some banks **require changes on their own website** (not in Digits).
* Log in to your bank directly
* Update third-party access (via Plaid)
* Deselect personal accounts
* Save changes
**Step 3: Remove/Re-add the connection**
* Deletes all transactions imported from that account
* Reconnect the bank
* Only business transactions will sync back in
**Related:**
[Linking Only Your Chase Business Accounts to Digits](/business-connections/linking-specific-chase-accounts)
[Wells Fargo: Remove Unwanted Accounts and Their Transactions](/business-connections/wells-fargo-remove-transactions)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Archive and Delete a Connection
Archive or delete connections for inactive or closed accounts.
***
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
**Looking to remove just a few transactions?** Archiving and deleting a connection removes **all** transactions from that connection. To delete only individual synced transactions from Plaid, Stripe, or QuickBooks Online, see [Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits](/business-connections/remove-transactions)
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
### Important to know
Not all connection types support the same actions.
* You can archive or delete any connection
* Only bank and card connections (via Plaid) support managing individual accounts within a connection
For example, a Chase connection may include multiple accounts, such as checking accounts and credit cards, which you can manage individually. Connections like Ramp or payroll providers are managed as a whole.
:triangle-exclamation: QuickBooks is not managed as a connection in the same way as Plaid or Stripe is. To delete individual QBO transactions, do so from the Ledger (see [Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits](/business-connections/remove-transactions)). To redo your entire QuickBooks import, see [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
{% endhint %}
{% embed url="" %}
### Archive vs. Delete — What’s the difference?
Action
What it Does
Best used when...
Archive
Permanently disables an entire connection or a single account within the connection. No new data is imported; existing data remains.
The account is fully closed or no longer relevant.
Delete
Permanently removes all transactions for an archived connection or account.
You need to fully remove data.
***
### Archive a Connection or Account
1. In the left navigation menu, click **Connections.**
2. Select **My Connections.**
3. Click **Manage** next to the connection.
4. In the left panel, select the connection or account you want to archive.
* The connection appears at the top
* Individual accounts appear below
6. Click **Archive** and follow the prompts to confirm.
***
### Deleting a Connection or Account
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Warning:** Deleting a connection permanently removes every transaction synced through it, including transactions in closed accounting periods. This can affect reconciliations and reports, so review the connection carefully before proceeding.
Manually entered transactions, CSV imports, and Digits Pay activity are not tied to the connection and will remain in your ledger.
To remove only a few transactions, delete them individually from the **Ledger** instead; see:[Delete or Remove Transactions in Digits](/business-connections/remove-transactions)
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** To delete a connection or account, it must be archived first. See [#archive-a-connection-or-account](#archive-a-connection-or-account "mention")
{% endhint %}
1. In the left navigation, click **Connections**
2. Select **My Connections**
3. Click **Manage** next to the connection
4. In the left panel, select the connection or account you want to delete
* The connection appears at the top
* Individual accounts appear below
5. Click **Delete** and follow the prompts
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
If I archive a connection, do past transactions disappear?
No. Archiving stops future imports and hides the connection from active views, but existing transactions remain in the Ledger.
Can I undo a deleted connection?
No. Deleting permanently removes all transactions from that connection. Consider **archiving** instead if you might need historical data.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Starting Over in Digits
Starting over resets your account so you can begin setup again from scratch. This is typically used to correct setup issues, such as selecting the wrong QuickBooks cutover date.
***
### Before You Start
In most cases, you do **not** need to start over.
If your issue is related to a bank, credit card, or other connection, you can usually fix it without a full reset. See: Option 1.
#### Option 1: Delete and Reconnect a Connection (*Recommended*)
{% hint style="danger" %}
Deleting a connection permanently removes all transactions imported from that account. This will impact balances, reports, and reconciliations.
{% endhint %}
Instead of starting over, you can:
* Remove the connection
* Reconnect it
* Adjust the start date
This is the best option if:
* The wrong account was connected
* Too much history was imported
* You only need to fix part of your data
See: [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
***
#### Option 2: Start Over (*Full Reset*)
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Warning:** Starting over is a full reset. All data, connections, and setup will be removed. If you have already completed **verification for Bill Pay or Invoicing**, you will need to **complete verification again**.
{% endhint %}
#### When to Use Starting Over vs. Removing a Connection
* You selected the wrong QuickBooks cutover date
* Your setup needs to be redone from scratch, including all connections
***
#### What Happens When You Start Over
When you start over:
* All transactions and financial data are removed
* All connections are removed
* You'll go through onboarding again
* If Bill Pay or Invoicing was previously set up, verification must be completed again.
* Billing remains unchanged.
***
#### Requirements Before Starting Over
* Your business must have a zero outstanding balance for Digits Pay
* Your business must be in an approved and active state
***
### How to Start Over in Digits
1. Go to your organization dashboard.
2. Click **Manage Entities**.
3. Select the business you want to reset.
4. Click the **menu** in the top right.
5. Select **Start over**.
6. Follow the prompts and confirm the reset.
7. Enter a reason for starting over when prompted.
The selected business will be reset, and you'll begin the setup process again.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Should I start over?
Starting over is a full reset and is not required for most cleanup tasks.
If you only need to remove transactions or fix a connection, see:
[Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
[Change the Start Date for a Connection](/business-connections/start-date)
Can I undo starting over?
No. Starting over cannot be undone. Make sure you want to fully reset before proceeding.
Is starting over the same as deleting a connection?
No. Deleting a connection removes data from a specific account. Starting over removes all data and resets your entire setup.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Connections FAQs
Find answers to common questions about Digits Connections. Learn how to link banks, payroll, and apps, troubleshoot sync issues, and manage secure data feeds with confidence.
***
### Intergrations
Does Digits integrate with Shopify?
Not yet — but it’s on our roadmap!\
You can still bring in Shopify or other e-commerce data by uploading CSVs or creating **manual journal entries** in the Ledger.
Does Digits integrate with payroll systems besides Gusto?
Yes! See [Payroll Connections](/business-connections/payroll-connections)
Can I connect a MyCardStatement account to Digits?
Currently, no. MyCardStatement.com appears in Plaid’s connection list, but all connection attempts fail due to a known Plaid issue.
**Why isn’t it working?**\
Plaid has flagged this as a *high-friction issue* affecting all MyCardStatement, eZCard, and similar connections. There’s no fixed timeline yet.
**What can I do instead?**\
You can **manually upload transactions** from your MyCardStatement account:
* Export a CSV from your bank
* Upload it in **Ledger → Transactions → Import Bank Transactions**
Can I request a new integration?
Yes. If you don’t see the integration you’re looking for, we’d love to hear from you.
We’re always working to expand our supported connections based on what matters most to users and their businesses. If there’s a specific tool, platform, or service you rely on and would like to see integrated with Digits, please let us know using this form:
👉 [Request a new integration](https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLSe6bIkk97fBrewMzZmT51gs0JTds1uR9XHJSx5Rg_qMVmLErA/viewform?usp=dialog)
When you submit a request, please include:
* **Name of the integration** (tool, platform, or service)
* **How you currently use it** in your workflow
* **Your contact information**, in case we have questions or want to share updates
Your input helps us prioritize and shape our roadmap to better fit how you work.
We appreciate your feedback and look forward to building the connections that move your business forward.
What are common workarounds when Digits doesn’t have an integration I need?
Start with the asset account where the money lands—your bank or credit card—and book activity from there. If you need to add history, import transactions using a bank statement (PDF/PNG/JPG/JPEG) or a CSV.
Examples where this works well:
* Payment processors: Square (no Square Banking), PayPal, some Stripe setups
* Commerce platforms where deposits land in the bank: Shopify, Amazon, Etsy
* POS systems without a direct integration: Toast, Clover, Lightspeed
* Misc tools where cash movement still hits the bank: Wise, Brex, Mercury, etc.
Tradeoff: You may miss fine-grain detail that a native integration would provide (like processor fee breakdowns, payout-level detail, or rev rec), but your ledger and top-line reports can still be correct.
We'd love to hear what integrations you're missing! Shoot us a message at [help@digits.com. ](mailto:help@digits.com)
Can Digits pull bank transactions starting from a specific date?
Yes — you can set a start date for a connected account. Digits will still be limited by whatever history your bank makes available through the connection, but setting a start date controls what Digits brings in and uses going forward.
Can Digits connect to Zapier?
Yes. Digits can connect to Zapier through the Digits API. To get started, follow [Connect Digits to Zapier via the API](https://developer.digits.com/docs/zapier).
***
### Data Imports & Syncing
If something changes in a connected system, will Digits overwrite it?
Yes. Digits syncs using each platform’s **unique transaction IDs**, which prevents duplicates and ensures that edits in the source system update in Digits.
> Example: If a transaction is edited in Stripe, the next sync updates that transaction in Digits automatically — as long as Stripe flags it as changed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Some systems don’t surface backdated changes, so those might not sync automatically.
{% endhint %}
How often does Digits sync data?
Digits syncs continuously from connected accounts and apps. Bank data flows in as transactions post, while tools like Stripe or Gusto update as soon as they confirm new activity.
What happens if a bank connection expires or fails?
Digits will alert you on the **Connections** page. Simply click **Reconnect** and follow the Plaid prompts.
Can I upload transactions manually instead of connecting to a bank?
Yes! You can upload CSVs directly in the Ledger under **Transactions → Import Bank Transactions**.\
See: [Importing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/importing-transactions)
Why doesn't my Chase sub-account show up as a separate account in Digits?
Chase sub-accounts aren't listed separately under your Digits connection — but their transactions are still imported. Plaid folds sub-account transactions under the parent account, so all activity appears under the parent account; it just doesn't appear as a separate account entry in your Connections list.\
\
If you’re not seeing transactions you’d expect, take a quick peek at the **parent account’s** transaction history in your **Ledger** first — that’s where Chase tucks all the sub-account activity. If it’s still not showing up there, give us a shout at [help@digits.com,](mailto:help@digits.com) and we’ll help you track it down.
***
### Troubleshooting
My connection stopped syncing — what should I do?
Reconnect the account from **Connections → Manage**. If it still fails, remove and re-add it.
Still stuck? Contact **Digits Support** at [help@digits.com](mailto:)
I’m missing transactions — how can I fix that?
Make sure the connection is active, and all accounts were selected during the Plaid setup. For older data, re-import manually via CSV.
Contact **Digits Support** at [help@digits.com](mailto:) if you're still having issues.
Can I delete a connection?
Yes. You can archive or delete a connection to remove its data.\
See [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
Why does my bank balance look too high (or too low) in Digits?
Digits' balance is derived from your Ledger, not a live bank-reported balance. That means any transaction that impacts cash or other asset accounts will affect what you see in Digits.
Common reasons for a discrepancy:
* **Pending transactions** — These may change, post later, or disappear entirely before settling.
* **Mis-categorization** — A transaction categorized to Cash or another asset account instead of an expense (or vice versa) will shift the balance.
* **Sync timing** — There may be a short delay between your bank posting a transaction and Digits picking it up.
* **Post-authorization changes** — Amounts, dates, or descriptions can change between authorization and final posting.
* **Voided or unsettled authorizations** — Some holds never become posted transactions but may still appear temporarily.
To troubleshoot, review posted transactions in the Ledger and check categorization on any recent entries that may be affecting the balance.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# My Business Account
Manage your Digits business account in one place—log in, update company info, invite your team, manage subscriptions and payment methods, and download invoices.
***
:gear: My Business Account:
How to Log into Digits
Learn how to sign in to Digits and access your business dashboard.
# How to Log into Digits
Access Digits quickly and securely with Magic Links or Google Sign-In. No passwords, no hassle, just seamless login.
***
### Supported Login Methods
#### **Magic Link (Email Sign-In)**
1. Go to [my.digits.com/login](https://my.digits.com/login).
2. Enter the email address associated with your Digits account. Use the address you used to sign up or previously access Digits.
3. Click **Continue with Email**.
4. Check your inbox for a secure Magic Link.
5. Click the **Magic Link** in your email to access your account instantly.
Digits sends Magic Links only to email addresses already added to your account.
#### Enable Two-Factor Authentication (2FA)
Two-factor authentication (2FA) adds an extra layer of security to your account.
* If you sign in with a **Magic Link**, you can enable 2FA in Digits.
* If you sign in with **Google**, your two-factor authentication is managed through your Google account. You don't need to enable it separately in Digits.
To enable 2FA for Magic Link sign-in:
1. Sign in to Digits using a **Magic Link**.
2. Click your **organization's name** in the upper-left corner of the screen to open the account menu.
3. Select **Security** near the bottom of the menu, just above **Sign Out**.
4. Follow the prompts to complete setup.
#### **Google Sign-In**
1. On the login screen, click **Sign in with Google**.
2. Choose your account (must match the email on your Digits account).
3. You’ll be securely logged in via Google.
{% hint style="info" icon="lock-keyhole" %}
If your Google account uses two-factor authentication (2FA), it's managed through your Google account. You don't need to enable 2FA separately in Digits.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why can’t I use my password anymore?
Digits has removed passwords to improve account security. Magic Links and Google Auth are more secure and user-friendly.
What if I don’t receive a Magic Link email?
If you have multiple email addresses, first try the one you used to sign up or previously access Digits. Digits sends Magic Links only to email addresses already added to your account.
If you no longer have access to your registered login email, see [Can I change the email address I use to log in to Digits?](/my-business-account/logging-in#can-i-change-the-email-address-i-use-to-log-in-to-digits) below. That FAQ includes locked-out recovery guidance.
Then check your spam or junk folder. If it's still missing after a few minutes, click **Resend Link**.
On a work email? Corporate mail filters sometimes quarantine automated login emails before they reach you. Ask your IT team to allow mail from **digits.com**, then request a fresh link. If you have a personal email on file, you can also try logging in with that instead.
Still stuck? Reach out at , and we'll get you in.
Is 2FA supported?
Yes. Digits supports two-factor authentication (2FA) for **Magic Link** sign-in.
To enable 2FA, sign in with a Magic Link, click your **organization name** in the upper-left corner of Digits, select **Security**, and follow the setup prompts.
If you sign in with **Google**, two-factor authentication is managed by your Google account. Any security settings or multi-factor authentication you've enabled for your Google account will apply when you sign in to Digits.
How do I log in to the Digits Mobile app?
Open the Digits app on your iPhone or iPad and enter your email address. Digits will send a Magic Link to your inbox. Open the email on your mobile device and tap the **Launch Digits** button. If the app is installed, it will automatically authenticate and log you in.
***
**I'm not receiving the Magic Link email for the mobile app.**
If you're not seeing the email, check your spam, junk, or any custom folders. Email filters can sometimes route it unexpectedly. The email subject will say "Welcome back to Digits." If you still can't find it, try requesting a new link from the app. If the issue persists, contact Digits Support at .
***
**I tapped the Magic Link, but the app just shows a countdown and asks me to resend.**
This can happen if your device's browser or OS settings interfere with the link opening the app. As a workaround, instead of tapping the link in the email, press and hold to copy it, then go back to the Digits app — you should see a **Use copied link** option to complete sign-in.
Can I change the email address I use to log in to Digits?
Your login email can't be changed directly. To use a different address, invite it as a new user on your account while you're still signed in, then contact Digits Support at [**help@digits.com**](mailto:help@digits.com) to deactivate the old one. Because this requires being logged in, it's best to do it *before* you lose access to your current email — if you're already locked out, see the FAQ below.
**What if I've lost access to my login email and I'm the only user on the account?**\
If you can no longer receive mail at your login address and there's no one else on the account to invite a new email for you, don't create a second account on your own — contact Digits Support at [**help@digits.com**](mailto:help@digits.com) and we'll help you get back in. After we confirm you're the account owner, we can set you up with a new login email. Note that this creates a new login rather than restoring the old one, so some account-level details may need to be reconnected once you're back in.
Is Digits available on Android?
Not yet. The Digits mobile app is currently available for iPhone and iPad (iOS) only.
Android users can access Digits through the web app using a supported mobile browser.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Managing Your Team (Inviting/Removing Users)
Digits is built for collaboration—invite co-founders, your accountant, or ops leads to view reports and manage bills, and remove access anytime when they no longer need it.
***
### How to Add a Team Member
**How to Add a Team Member**
There are two ways to invite someone to your account:
**Option 1: From the organization dashboard**
1. Click **Manage Team**.
2. Click **+ Add Team Member** in the top-right corner.
3. Enter the person's name and email address.
**Option 2: From a business dashboard**
1. Click **Invite User** in the left navigation menu.
2. Enter the person's name and email address.
**Either way, before sending:**
* **Organization Role** defaults to Admin.
* **Entity Access** defaults to Manager.
Click **Send Invite**. They'll receive an email with a link to join your Digits workspace.
***
### How to Remove a Team Member
You can remove a team member from a specific entity or from the entire organization.
#### Remove Access to an Entity
1. From your organization dashboard, click **Manage Team** in the left navigation.
2. Select the team member you want to update.
3. In the **Entities** section, find the entity.
4. Open the role dropdown next to the entity name.
5. Select **No Access**.
The team member will no longer be able to access that entity.
#### Remove Access to the Entire Organization
1. From your organization dashboard, click **Manage Team** in the left navigation.
2. Select the team member you want to remove.
3. Open the role dropdown next to the team member's name.
4. Select **No Access**.
The team member will no longer be able to access any entities in the organization.
#### Revoke a Pending Invitation
If a team member has not yet accepted their invitation, you can revoke it instead of removing their access.
1. From your organization dashboard, click **Manage Team**.
2. Locate the pending invitation.
3. Select **Revoke Invitation**.
The invited user will no longer be able to join the organization using that invitation.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Note:** If you're viewing an individual business dashboard, click **Settings**, then **Go to Organization Settings**, and follow the steps above.
{% endhint %}
***
### Permissions and Access
Access in Digits has two levels:
* **Organization role** controls what someone can do across the organization.
* **Admin:** Can manage billing, entities, and users.
* **Read Only:** Can sign in to the organization but can't manage billing, entities, users, or other organization settings. Access to individual entities is controlled by the person's **Entity role**.
* **Entity role** controls what someone can do within each business.
* **Manager:** Full access to the business, including commenting, tagging, and sharing.
* **Read Only:** Can view the entity and add comments.
To remove someone's access to a single entity, change their **Entity role** to **No Access**. To remove them from the organization entirely, open the **Organization Role** menu and select **Remove**.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can multiple operators use the same Digits account at the same time?
Yes. There are no limits on how many users can be signed in and using Digits simultaneously. If your organization has multiple operators, each person can sign in with their own account and work in Digits at the same time.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Manage Your Organization and Business Profile in Digits
Learn how to update your business and organization settings, including names, logos, and websites, from the Business Dashboard and Organization Settings.
***
### Where to Find Business and Organization Settings
Digits has two settings areas:
* **Business settings** control details for an individual business, like the business logo, business name, and website.
* **Organization Settings** control details for the overall organization, like the organization logo and organization name.
***
### Update Your Business Settings
1. From your business dashboard, click **Settings** in the left-hand menu.
2. Click **My Business**.
3. You’ll see fields for your **Logo**, **Business Name**, and **Website**.
#### Update Your Business Logo
Upload your logo to personalize your dashboard and any views you share.
1. Go to **Settings**
2. Click **My Business**.
3. Click **Choose File** next to **Business Logo**.
4. Select your image file.
* We recommend a square logo.
* PNG with a transparent background looks best.
5. Click **Save**.
#### Edit Your Business Name
1. Go to **Settings.**
2. Click **My Business**.
3. Click the **Edit** icon next to your business name.
4. Update your **Business Name**.
5. Click **Save Changes**.
#### Add or Update Your Website
Include your website so it’s easy for others, like your team or accountant, to find more information about your business.
1. Go to **Settings.**
2. Click **My Business**.
3. Click the **Edit** icon next to **Website**.
4. Enter your website URL, for example, `https://yourbusiness.com`.
5. Click **Save**.
***
### Update Your Organization Settings
From your organization dashboard, click **Organization Settings** in the left-hand menu.
You’ll see fields for your **Organization Logo** and **Organization Name**.
#### Update Your Organization Logo
1. Go to **Organization Settings**.
2. Click **Choose File** next to **Organization Logo**.
3. Select your image file.
* We recommend a square logo.
* PNG with a transparent background looks best.
4. Click **Save**.
#### Edit Your Organization Name
1. Go to **Organization Settings**.
2. Click the **Edit** icon next to your organization name.
3. Update your **Organization Name**.
4. Click **Save Changes**.
#### Update Your Organization's Website
1. Go to **Organization Settings**.
2. Click the **Edit** icon next to **Website**.
3. Enter your website URL, for example, `https://yourbusiness.com`.
4. Click **Save**.
***
### Best Practices
✅ Keep your business name consistent with what appears on your invoices, contracts, and tax documents.
✅ Use a high-quality logo, ideally square, PNG, and transparent background, so it looks sharp in Digits.
✅ Double-check your website link before saving. Others may see it in shared reports or views.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why can’t I upload my logo?
Make sure your logo is a PNG, JPG, GIF, or SVG file under 4 MB. A square PNG with a transparent background works best. If it still won’t upload, try refreshing the page or contact [**help@digits.com**](mailto:help@digits.com) — we’ll get it sorted.
Can I change my business's name later?
Yes! You can edit your business name anytime in **Settings → My Company.**
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# How to Add Additional Business Plans
Business Owners can add and manage multiple businesses under a single Digits account. Each business has its own legal entity, subscription, and dashboard—so everything stays clean and separate.
***
### How to Add a New Business
1. Log in to your **Digits account**.
2. Click your **business name** in the top-left corner.
3. Select **Add a Business** from the dropdown.
4. Follow the prompts to complete setup for the new business.
{% hint style="info" %}
You can switch between businesses anytime using the **top-left dropdown** or from the **sidebar** (on desktop) / **mobile nav** (on mobile).
{% endhint %}
***
### Onboarding Status Labels
As you set up a new business, you may see labels that show where things stand:
* **Incomplete** – You’ve started setup, but there are still steps to finish.
* **Pending** – You’ve completed setup; Digits is finishing background processing.
***
### Not Ready to Finish Setup?
No problem.
* Click **Back to Home** at the top of the screen to exit onboarding at any time.
* You can resume later by selecting that business from:
* The **top-left dropdown**, or
* The **Shared with Me** tab (if applicable)
Digits will take you right back to where you left off.
***
### Where Your Businesses Show Up
Each business you add will appear in:
* The **top-left business dropdown**
* The **sidebar** (on desktop)
* The **mobile navigation** (on phones and tablets)
From there, you can hop between businesses in just a click.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
If I add another business, do I get a trial? When does billing start?
Yes. Today, each business is set up as its own operator organization with a separate subscription. Each new business receives its own trial, and billing for that business begins when the trial ends.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Viewing & Downloading Your Digits Subscription Invoice
You can see and download your Digits billing invoices anytime from your account settings.
***
### How to View Your Digits Invoice
From your organization dashboard:
1. Click **Organization Settings**.
2. Click **Subscription**.
3. Scroll down to the **Invoices** section.
4. View your current and past invoices, each with a status indicator.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
**Note:** If you're in a business dashboard, click **Settings**, then go **to Organization Settings** first.
{% endhint %}
***
### Invoice Status Types
Status
What it Means
Pending Invoice
Upcoming invoice with total amount and date.
Processed Invoice
Payment is complete and invoice is finalized.
Failed
The charge didn't go through. Update your payment method to retry; the invoice becomes downloadable once it's paid.
If you requested a business-plan downgrade, the pending invoice shows its prorated adjustment. See [Change Your Subscription Plan](/my-business-account/upgrade-downgrade-your-business-plan) for the request process.
**To view your billing history:**
1. Go to the **Invoices** section.
2. Click any invoice to download a PDF copy.
**To update your Billing Address:**
1. Go to the **Billing Address** Section.
2. Update the Name and Address for billing, as needed.
3. Click **Update Billing Address**.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Updating Your Payment Method in Digits
Need to change the card you use for Digits billing? You can update your payment method in just a few clicks.
***
### How to Update Your Payment Method
From your organization dashboard:
1. Click **Organization Settings**.
2. Click **Subscription**.
3. Click **Payment Method**.
4. Select **Update Payment Method**.
5. Enter your new card details.
6. Click **Update Payment Method** again to save.
You’ll see a confirmation once your card has been updated.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** If you're in a business dashboard, click **Settings**, then go **to Organization Settings** first.
{% endhint %}
You’ll see a confirmation at the bottom of your screen once your card has been updated.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What happens if my subscription payment fails?
Update your card under Organization Settings → Subscription → Payment Method.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Upgrade/Downgrade Your Business Plan
Request a business subscription plan change and understand its billing impact.
***
{% hint style="danger" %}
This guide is for **business owners and operators**. Accounting-firm subscription workflows differ. See [Upgrade/Downgrade a Client Plan](/client-management/upgrade-downgrade-a-client-plan)
{% endhint %}
Need to change your plan? We're happy to help.
* **Upgrade your plan:** Contact [**Digits Support** ](mailto:help@digits.com)with your organization's name and the plan you'd like to switch to.
* **Downgrade your plan:** Contact [**Digits Support**](mailto:help@digits.com) with your organization's name and the plan you'd like to switch to.
Our team will make the change for you.
{% hint style="info" icon="file-invoice-dollar" %}
After Support processes a downgrade/upgrade, your next invoice will show the prorated adjustment for the plan change.
Use [Viewing & Downloading Your Digits Subscription Invoice](/my-business-account/digits-subscription-invoices) to review your upcoming invoice and billing history.
{% endhint %}
***
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# How to Cancel Your Digits Business Account
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
### **Important:** These instructions are **for business owners/operators ONLY.**
If you are an **Accounting Firm**, please follow the firm-side guide instead: **→** [***How to Cancel Your Digits Firm Account***](/my-firm-account/cancel-digits)\
Firm and business cancellations work differently, so be sure you're using the correct article.
{% endhint %}
***
If you’ve connected a bank account and want to stop your paid plan, you can cancel directly in Digits.
Want to keep your business account on a lower plan? Request a plan change instead of canceling. See [Change Your Subscription Plan](/my-business-account/upgrade-downgrade-your-business-plan).
If you already canceled, contact [Digits Support](mailto:help@digits.com) to ask about reactivation and a downgrade.
{% hint style="info" %}
You’ll still have access to your account until the end of your **free trial** or **current billing period**. After that, billing stops.
{% endhint %}
#### How to Cancel Your Plan
From your organization dashboard:
1. Click **Organization Settings**.
2. Click the **Subscription** tab.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page.
4. Click **Cancel Subscription**.
5. Enter a reason for canceling. This is required.
6. Click **Cancel Plan** to confirm.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
**Note:** If you're in a business dashboard, click **Settings**, then go **to Organization Settings** first.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Will I still have access to my data after I cancel?
You'll retain access to your account until the end of your current billing period. After that, your access will end, and you will no longer be able to view your data. We recommend downloading any financials or documents you need before your billing period ends.
How do I request deletion of all my data from Digits?
Cancel your plan in Settings → Subscription, and [email support](mailto:help@digits.com) if you need full data deletion (include your account email + business name).
How do I cancel my subscription if I haven't connected a bank account?
### If You Have *Not* Connected a Bank Account
If you’ve added a **payment method** but **haven’t connected a U.S. bank account**, good news—you won’t be charged.
Digits only starts billing once a **supported bank account** is linked.
This is most common if:
* You’re located outside the U.S., or
* You created an account, but never finished connecting your bank
If you want to fully **cancel or delete your account**, contact Digits Support at [**help@digits.com**](mailto:), and we’ll take care of it for you.
Can I pause my Digits subscription?
If you're looking for a way to **pause your subscription**, Digits doesn't currently offer a subscription pause option. Instead, you can cancel your subscription at any time.
You'll continue to have full access through the end of your current billing period, so there's no interruption until your subscription ends. If you decide to come back later, you can subscribe again whenever you're ready.
Can I cancel all of my subscriptions at once?
No. Each business in your organization has its **own subscription** and must be canceled separately.
If your organization has multiple businesses, switch to each business and cancel its subscription individually. After canceling, verify that the subscription status for **each business** shows as canceled before assuming all billing has stopped.
For more information about how subscriptions work across multiple businesses, see [How to Add Additional Business Plans](/my-business-account/add-additonal-businesses)
I canceled my subscription, but I'm still being billed. Why?
If your organization has multiple businesses, you may still have an active subscription for another business. Each business has its **own subscription** and must be canceled individually.
Switch to each business, cancel its subscription if needed, and verify that the subscription status for **every business** shows as canceled. Only the subscriptions you cancel will stop renewing.
Can I cancel my subscription from the mobile app?
No. Subscription cancellation is currently available only from a supported desktop web browser.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
Learn how to manage and optimize your books in Digits, from ledger and reconciliations to invoices, bills, reporting, and documents, all in one streamlined, automated workflow built for efficiency.
:house: Home, Checklist, & Quality Control
See metrics in Home, handle tasks in Checklist, and catch issues with QC.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Home, Checklist, & Automated Quality Control
Use the Home Dashboard to monitor your business’s key metrics, the Checklist to manage tasks and follow-ups, and Quality Control to automatically check the books for issues that need review. Learn how to customize your dashboard, move around Digits quickly, and stay on top of what needs your attention.
***
:house: Home:
Your Home Dashboard: Built-In Views & Metrics
The prebuilt views and metrics in your client's Home, and what each shows.
:house: Home:
Customize Your Dashboard
Customize your dashboard with KPIs, statements, lists, and custom tiles.
***
# Your Home Dashboard: Built-In Views & Metrics
Digits comes with a built-in Overview dashboard, three permanent analysis views, and a set of standard financial metrics. This article explains what each one shows and how the metrics are calculated. To change what's on your dashboard, see [Customize Your Dashboard](/business-home/customize-dashboards)
***
### Where to find the Dashboards
1. When you log in to Digits, you'll land on your business's **Home** screen.
2. Click **Home** in the left navigation menu (if it isn't already expanded) to see everything it includes.
3. Select **Dashboards** for the dashboard view, or jump straight to the **Expenses**, **Revenue**, or **Cost of Revenue** built-in views. (Cost of Revenue appears once your books have cost-of-revenue activity.)
4. **Looking for a custom dashboard you created?** Those live at the top of the Dashboards page — shown as tabs next to Overview, or as a dropdown from the current dashboard's name when you have several — so you can switch between them directly.
***
### The Overview Dashboard
Every business starts with a built-in **Overview** dashboard showing a standard layout of the most commonly used tiles. It's the landing page under Home in the left navigation.
The Overview dashboard is fully customizable — you can add, remove, and rearrange its tiles just like any other dashboard (see [Customize Your Dashboard](/business-home/customize-dashboards)). The only difference is that it can't be deleted: Overview is always there, showing either the default layout or the version you've customized.
You can also create up to nine additional custom dashboards. All of your dashboards — Overview and any you've created — are available at the top of the Dashboards page, either as tabs or as a dropdown from the current dashboard's name.
A few things affect what appears on the default layout:
* **Connected data** — tiles populate as the related data exists. For example, the Headcount tile requires a Gusto connection.
* **Your customizations** — once you edit a dashboard, your layout replaces the default.
***
### Built-In Views: Expenses, Revenue, and Cost of Revenue
Alongside Dashboards, the **Home** section of the left navigation includes three permanent analysis views. These aren't customizable dashboards — they're always-on breakdowns of each side of your P\&L:
| View | What it shows | Broken down by |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------- | ------------------- |
| **Expenses** | Spending over time | Category · Vendor |
| **Revenue** | Income over time | Category · Customer |
| **Cost of Revenue** | Cost of goods/revenue over time | Category · Supplier |
Each view has the same three tabs:
Tab
What it shows
Overview
A chart of the total over time (for example, "Expenses Over Time"), with summary tiles
Categories
The total broken down by category ("Expenses by Category")
Vendors / Customers / Suppliers
The total broken down by party — vendors for Expenses, customers for Revenue, suppliers for Cost of Revenue
Select any row to drill into its details and the underlying transactions. Digits keeps your place when you switch views: if you're viewing Expenses by category and switch to Revenue, you land on Revenue by category.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Don't see Cost of Revenue?** That view appears automatically once your books have cost-of-revenue activity. If nothing is categorized to Cost of Revenue accounts yet, the view stays hidden.
{% endhint %}
***
### How the Built-In Metrics Are Calculated
The built-in metrics use fixed formulas that can't be modified. (If you need a metric calculated differently, add a Custom tile with your externally calculated value — see [Customize Your Dashboard](/business-home/customize-dashboards).) Here's what each one means:
Metric
What it measures
How it's calculated
Total Cash
The cash you have on hand right now
Bank account balances + undeposited funds. Other assets (receivables, investments, fixed assets) are not counted as cash.
Net Burn
How much cash you actually spent down in a month
Total spend − income, adjusted for asset and liability changes that affect cash. A negative net burn means you added cash that month.
Gross Burn
Your total monthly spending before income is counted
The "all-out" version of burn — spending only, with no income offset.
Live Runway
How many months your current cash will last at your current burn rate
Total Cash ÷ average monthly Net Burn, using your last 3 months of net burn.
{% hint style="info" icon="arrow-up-right-dots" %}
**Runway is a forward-looking projection based on your actuals.** It shows the date your cash would reach zero if the recent burn rate continued. The formula and the 3-month window are fixed. If you had an unusual month (a one-time payment in or out), the projection reflects it until that month ages out of the 3-month average
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I edit or delete these views and metrics?
The three built-in views and the metric formulas are fixed. Dashboards are different: all of them, including Overview, are fully customizable — but Overview can't be deleted.
See [Customize Your Dashboard](/business-home/customize-dashboards)
Why is my Runway different from my own model?
Digits calculates runway from your actual books — cash on hand and your trailing 3-month net burn. Models that use budgeted burn, exclude one-time items, or count non-bank assets as cash will differ. For a custom runway figure, add it as a Custom tile.
# Customize Your Dashboard
Your Home dashboard puts your metrics front and center. Add KPIs, statements, and custom tiles, and arrange your layout any way you like.
***
### Getting Started
1. From **Home**, click **Edit** in the top-right corner to enter edit mode.
***
### Adding Dashboard Components
1. Use the right-side panel to **drag and** **drop** elements onto your layout.
2. To remove any item, click the **X** on the tile.
3. Rearranging is simple—just drag tiles until you like the layout.
4. When you’re done, click **Done** in the top-right corner to save your changes.
***
* **Metrics** — Core KPIs such as cash flow, runway, burn, and profit.
* **Statements** — Add P\&L, Balance Sheet, or Cash Flow Statement tiles.
* **Lists** — Include Top Vendors, Expense Categories, and other groupings.
* **Headcount** *(Gusto users only)* — See headcount totals for the selected period.
* **Departments** — Track performance or totals by department.
* **Custom** — Add text tiles or manual KPIs for information tracked outside Digits.
* **Search** — Type to find vendors, accounts, categories, or metrics, then drag them in.
***
### Add Additional Custom Dashboards
Along with the built-in Overview dashboard, you can create up to nine custom dashboards on the Home page — ten in total.
Click the **Add Dashboard** button, give your dashboard a title, and start dragging in the components you want to highlight.
***
### Changing the Date Range
1. From the **Home** tab, open the period selector in the top-left corner.
2. Choose the timeframe (month, quarter, year, or preset periods).
3. Click **Set** to update the entire dashboard instantly.
***
{% hint style="success" %}
**Tips:**
* Start with **Cash Flow**, **Runway**, and **Profit** for a quick performance snapshot.
* Wondering what “runway” means? It shows how many months your current cash may last based on average expenses.
* Revisit and adjust your layout anytime—your dashboard should reflect what matters *right now*.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Which dashboards are available on mobile?
You can view your most-used dashboards, including Income & Expense Analysis, Total Cash, Gross Income, Trends, and Month-over-Month Deltas.
Can I change the formula behind a dashboard metric?
No — the built-in metrics (burn, runway, net/gross income, cash flow, profit) use fixed formulas. You can arrange tiles, choose which metrics to show, and add your own text notes or manual KPI tiles for values you calculate elsewhere.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Checklist
Every task the AI needs help with, including categorization, reconciliation, reports, and more, lives here, organized by workflow.
***
### Overview
The Digits Checklist is where accounting work gets organized and completed inside Digits, so your close stays on track without having to chase down tasks across different tools.
Digits handles much of the work automatically in the background. Checklist surfaces the steps that still need attention and organizes them into a clear workflow.
The Checklist is organized into three panels: a sidebar for navigating sections and filters, a task list in the center, and a detail panel on the right that opens when you select a task.
**Checklist helps you:**
* See what work needs attention, organized by workflow step
* Track ownership and progress across the close process
* Collaborate with teammates in context
* Keep close moving without dropped tasks
{% embed url="" %}
***
### Where to Find Your Checklist
1. Click **Checklist** in the **left navigation menu** to jump straight into your review items.
2. From anywhere in Digits, open the **Ask Digits** bar at the bottom or right side of the screen and click the **calendar** icon.
Collasped view of Ask Digits
Uncollapsed view of Ask Digits
***
### Checklist Sections
Checklist organizes your work by priority, time, and assignment so your team always knows what to do next.
#### Operations
:plug:Setup
The Setup section highlights anything blocking a clean start — connection issues like disconnected bank feeds or incomplete onboarding that need attention before your close.
This includes:
* Connection issues, like disconnected bank feeds or incomplete onboarding
If something breaks or needs review, you’ll see an action item here so you can resolve it quickly.
#### What you can do
* Fix connection issues
* Add context or instructions for your team
{% hint style="info" icon="bolt" %}
**Tip:** Address items in Setup before starting your close. Connection issues can lead to missing transactions, and unresolved questions can block progress.
{% endhint %}
:message-lines:Comments
The Comments section surfaces open questions and comments across transactions, bills, categories, and reconciliations, so nothing needing a response gets missed.
This includes:
* Questions and comments left on transactions, bills, categories, and reconciliations
When someone leaves a question or needs input, it shows up here as an action item so you can respond and keep work moving.
#### What you can do
* Reply to comments
* Mark conversations as resolved and close the item
{% hint style="info" icon="bolt" %}
**Tip: Use @**mentions to loop in teammates or clients. When someone replies, the conversation appears here automatically.
{% endhint %}
:file-invoice-dollar:Bills & Invoices
The **Bills & Invoices** section shows bills that need approval.
When a bill is uploaded for review, it appears here so you can **approve, reject, or delete** it. Once approved, the bill is **automatically recorded in the Ledger**.
You can:
* **Approve** → Books the bill to the Ledger
* **Reject** → Sends it back for correction
* **Delete** → Removes the bill if it's a duplicate or incorrect
✨ Digits will pre-fill the vendor details from the bill itself. Just verify and approve.
#### **Close**
:book-open:Book
The Book section is where you review transactions that still need categorization.
✨ Digits automatically categorizes most transactions. When it isn’t confident, it flags those items here for review.
For each item, you can:
* **Confirm** the suggested category, or
* **Update** the category and then confirm
Each confirmation helps improve future categorization accuracy.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
**Tip:** If the list is long at first, that’s normal. Each confirmation helps Digits learn, so the number of items requiring review decreases over time.
{% endhint %}
Click the menu in the top-right to view the transaction details or reassign the review to another user, such as a team member.
Review the transaction details. If everything looks correct, click **Confirm**. You can also update the category, department, or location before saving. To loop in a teammate, open the **Comments** tab to leave a comment or **@mention** them.
{% hint style="info" %}
Book is organized into Grouped [Quality Control](/business-home/automated-quality-control) sections (the same view used in [**Review**](#review)), so related items are batched together. You can refresh a check after it re-runs, hide checks, and use **Edit Agent Instructions** to tune what each check looks for. Without Automated Quality Control, Book appears as a single list of transactions to confirm.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
The more you review and confirm transactions, the more Digits’ AI learns and improves over time. Learn more about [How Automatic Categorization Works](/business-agentic-general-ledger/digits-ai)
{% endhint %}
:scale-balanced:Reconcile
Reconcile surfaces anything that needs attention during close.
* If Digits can't pull a bank statement, you'll see an item to upload one
* After :sparkles: AI reconciliation runs, any accounts that need review will appear here
{% hint style="info" icon="check" %}
The actual reconciliation still happens in the Reconciliations tab. Checklist simply tells you when action is needed.
{% endhint %}
:calendar:Schedules
Schedules surfaces transactions that Digits has detected as candidates for an amortization or depreciation schedule. Digits currently detects two types: prepaid expenses (amortized over time) and fixed assets (depreciated over time).
For each item you can:
* **Review & Finalize** → confirm the schedule type and details, and create the schedule. Once created, it posts its periodic entries over the schedule's term.
* **Dismiss** → ignore the suggestion if the transaction shouldn't be put on a schedule.
The schedules themselves are managed in[Schedules](/business-agentic-general-ledger/schedules); the Checklist simply flags newly detected candidates that need to be set up. An item clears automatically once a schedule is attached to its transaction.
:glasses-round:Review
Review is where [Automated Quality Control](/business-home/automated-quality-control) surfaces transactions that may need a second look before close. Digits runs quality checks continuously in the background and flags anything that looks off — for example, an unusual category, vendor, department, or location on a transaction.
Flagged items are grouped into sections, one per **quality check**, so you can work through similar issues together. (These same Quality Control sections also appear in **Book**.)
For each item you can:
* Open it to **review the details** and confirm it's correct, or
* **Correct** the category, vendor, department, or location, then resolve it
* **Refresh** a check after it re-runs to pull in the latest results
* **Hide** checks you don't want to see in the list
* Use **Edit Agent Instructions** on any section to adjust what that check looks for
{% hint style="info" icon="flag" %}
**You can fix many flags right from the item's review panel** — for example, if a transaction is flagged for a missing receipt, upload the receipt directly from the panel without opening the transaction's detail page.
{% endhint %}
:file-chart-column:Report
Report is the final step in the monthly close.
This is where you or your team reviews, finalizes, and publishes report drafts. Once published, reports will appear here for you or your team to review.
***
### About the Checklist Badge
The Checklist badge (the small number near the calendar/alarm icon) shows how many **open items** still need attention for that business.
***
### Filters & Navigation
Use the dropdown in the top left to filter:
* **All Tasks**
* **Assigned to Me**
* **Assigned to My Team**
* **Done**
***
Use the **date picker** to filter by date, such as month, quarter, or a custom date range.
***
### Automated Quality Control
:sparkles: Digits Automated Quality Control (QC) helps you catch issues in your books before close. QC runs automated checks continuously, then surfaces transactions or patterns that may need review as action items in the **Book** or **Review** section of the Checklist.
For more details, see [Automated Quality Control](/business-home/automated-quality-control)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does reviewing bills improve AI accuracy?
Yes. Digits pre-fills vendor, category, and other metadata from the bill—your review ensures accuracy, and your choices help the AI improve over time.
Can I edit transactions directly from the Checklist?
Yes. In Checklist → Book, you can update categories, departments, and locations before confirming or closing the item.
Why is the confirm button greyed out?
Most commonly, a required field is missing, especially when no category is selected. Once you fill in the required information, the button should become available.
What happens when I click a task?
Clicking a task opens a detail panel on the right. From there, you can review transaction or document details, leave comments, @mention teammates or clients, and view activity history.
Can I act on several checklist items at once?
Yes. Use the checkboxes to select multiple checklist items, then dismiss, reassign, or comment on them all in a single action.
Reopened a task by mistake, or closed one too soon?
Open the filters in the top-left of **Checklist** and click **Done**. From there**,** reopen any completed or dismissed task — it returns to your active checklist. You don't need to recreate the work.
Do people get notified when I comment or @mention them?
Yes. Comments generate notifications, delivered in Digits and by email:
* @mention someone — the person you mention is notified directly, whether it's a teammate or a client with access to the business.
* Comment without a mention — people involved with that transaction (for example, anyone following it or already in the thread) are notified that a new comment was added.
* Reply in a thread — the participants in that conversation are notified of your reply.
* Bulk comment — when you comment on many transactions at once, recipients get a single consolidated notification instead of one per transaction.
Clicking the notification takes the recipient straight to the transaction and its comment thread. To be sure a specific person sees your comment, @mention them — that guarantees they're notified even if they weren't already following the item.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Automated Quality Control
Automated Quality Control (QC) helps operators catch issues in a business’s books before close. QC runs automated checks continuously, then surfaces anything that may need review as action items in the **Review** section of the Checklist.
Digits QC is built for consistency and reliability, so operators can apply the same review standards every month without manually rechecking the same criteria.
***
### Available Checks
Check
On by default?
What it flags
Uncategorized
Yes
Transactions with no category assigned
Low Confidence Category
Yes
Transactions where Digits isn't confident in its categorization
Missing Vendor
Yes
Expense transactions with no vendor assigned
Missing Customer
Yes
Income transactions with no customer assigned
Missing Receipt
Yes
Transactions with no receipt attached
Missing Invoice
No
Transactions with no invoice attached
Missing Department
No
Transactions with no department assigned
Missing Location
No
Transactions with no location assigned
Unusual Spend
Yes
Spending that looks anomalous compared to historical patterns for that category
Material Expense
No
Flag expense transactions above 1% of annualized total expenses (annualized from average monthly Expenses and Other Expenses over the last 3 complete months), excluding Payroll Expenses
Transaction in Parent Category
Yes
Transactions categorized to a non-leaf (summary) category
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
Checks that are off by default can introduce noise if enabled without review, so they're disabled until you're ready to use them.
{% endhint %}
***
### Turning Quality Checks On or Off
1. Open the Checklist to either the Book or Review section.
2. Click **Edit Agent Instructions**, or click the **gear icon** next to any flagged check group.
3. Select the check you want to enable or disable from the left (e.g., *Uncategorized, Missing Vendor, Missing Customer*).
3. Use the **toggle** in the top right to turn the check **on** or **off**.
4. Confirm the change in the prompt that appears.
***
### How to Customize Quality Checks
Most checks can be customized with plain English instructions. Just describe what you want Digits to look for, and Digits turns those instructions into a reliable check.
**To edit a check's instructions:**
1. Open the Checklist and click **Edit Agent Instructions**, or click the **gear icon** next to any flagged check group
2. Select the check you want to enable or disable from the left (e.g., *Uncategorized, Missing Vendor, Missing Customer*)
3. Click **Edit**.
{% hint style="info" icon="pen-line" %}
**When writing or editing checks:**
:check: **Tagging vendors and categories matters**\
When writing instructions, tag vendors and categories using `@` mentions rather than typing them as plain text.
:check: **You can write naturally**\
Instructions can be written conversationally — "ignore Gusto and United Healthcare, I don't need to review these at all" works the same as more formal phrasing. The system interprets what you mean and compiles it into a check.
{% endhint %}
4. Click **Preview**
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
**How the Preview Works:**
After you enter an instruction, Digits generates a preview showing:
* A plain-English summary of the logic Digits compiled from your instructions
* Up to 20 example transactions that would be flagged or excluded by the check
:lightbulb-exclamation-on: Review the summary carefully before saving. It reflects the actual logic Digits will run, not just a restatement of what you typed.
If the summary doesn’t match your intent, revise your instruction and generate a new preview.
The preview may take a few moments to load. If your instruction includes text that the system can’t act on, Digits automatically filters it out before compiling the check.
{% endhint %}
6. Click **Save and Run** to apply your instructions and run the check. Or, click **Cancel** to go back and make changes.
:sparkles: Once you click **Save and Run**, the updated check runs immediately across transactions. Action items in the checklist will update to reflect the new results. A status indicator will show when the run is complete.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why are some checks off by default?
Checks like Missing Receipt and Missing Department can generate a large number of action items if turned on without review. They're off by default, so you can enable them intentionally when your workflow is ready.
What if my instruction doesn't do what I expected?
Read the summary in the preview panel — it describes what Digits understood. Revise your instruction and re-run the preview before saving. Tagging vendors and categories with `@` mentions rather than plain text tends to produce more reliable results.
Does the check run continuously or just once?
Continuously. Every new transaction or edit to the books triggers the check to run again. You don't need to manually re-run it each month.
Will QC items disappear after I complete a related task?
Yes — for example, once you complete a schedule for a transaction that was flagged as a material expense, that item will be resolved automatically.
# Ask Digits
***
Ask Digits is your AI command center inside Digits—an always-on assistant that helps you ask questions, start work, and stay on top of tasks without leaving the page you’re on.
At a glance, Ask Digits lets you:
* **Ask about your numbers** — cash, expenses, revenue, vendors, categories, trends, and more
* **Get product help from Digits documentation** — Ask Digits can answer “how do I…?” questions using information from **help.digits.com**
* **Kick off actions** — open flows to create transactions, invoices, or reports
* **Surface tasks** — see questions, flags, and approvals that need attention
* **Process documents** — upload or forward statements, bills, and receipts
* **Stay accurate & secure** — powered by Digits’ own modeling engine
***
### **Ask Digits about your Financials**
Ask Digits gives you fast, reliable, data-backed answers from your actual ledger.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Examples:**
* **Spend questions**
* “How much did we spend with Gusto last month?”
* “What were software expenses in Q3?”
* **Vendors & customers**
* “Show me top vendors by spend this year.”
* “How much has Acme Corp paid us in 2025?”
* **Categories & trends**
* “What did we spend on travel in October?”
* “Compare marketing spend month over month.”
{% endhint %}
***
### Open Your Checklist
Click the **calendar icon** to launch your Checklist.
{% hint style="info" %}
The badge count lets you know how many items need your attention.
{% endhint %}
***
### Start Work with Quick Actions
Ask Digits doubles as a launcher for common workflows. From the Ask Digits bar, click the + icon to open flows for:
{% columns %}
{% column %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
* **Add Transaction**
* **Create Invoice**
* **Upload Bill...**
* **Run Report**
* **Start Reconciliations**
* **Upload Document...**
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
### Search Transactions
You can search for transactions using details like a **vendor and amount** or an **invoice or reference number**.
For example, try:
* **Amazon 250**
* **Amazon: 250**
* **Find invoice INV-1042**
* **Show me transactions for INV-1042**
When you search by invoice or reference number, Ask Digits returns the invoice along with its linked source and payment transactions, making it easier to see the full transaction history.
From there, you can:
* **Expand full search results** for more context
* **Jump into the Ledger** to apply filters, review details, or take bulk actions
***
### Best Practices & Tips
* **Ask one clear question at a time.** Short, focused prompts work best.
* **Keep it simple.** Questions like *“What was Gusto payroll spend last month?”* perform better than multi-part prompts.
* **Ask follow-ups.** Use its response as a jumping-off point. Have a conversation to get more information or guide it in the right direction.
* **Use it as a starting point.** Treat Ask Digits like a helpful assistant—confirm important details in the Ledger or Financials, especially before sending anything to clients.
* **Share feedback.** If something feels confusing, incorrect, or incomplete, send an example to Support. That input directly helps improve Ask Digits.
* **Need a person** or want to speak to a human? Use Ask Digits to start a support ticket or email our support team at .
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Where can I find Ask Digits?
Log in to Digits and look for the **Ask Digits…** bar at the bottom of the screen. You can click it, or use **⌘ + K** (Mac) / **Ctrl + K** (Windows) to open it.
How do I collapse or expand Ask Digits?
You can collapse Ask Digits into the bottom-right corner of the screen to free up space while you work.
By default, Ask Digits stays expanded in main views and automatically collapses when you open a details view. You can also choose to keep it collapsed in both main and detail views.
To collapse Ask Digits, hover over it and click the **`>`** button to the right of the search bar.
What kinds of questions can I ask?
What you can ask Ask Digits to do
Supported?
Details / Examples
Answer spend questions
✅
“How much did we spend with Gusto last month?” “What were software costs in Q3?”
Answer vendor & customer questions
✅
“Top vendors by spend this year?” “How much has Acme Corp paid us in 2024?”
Answer category-level questions
✅
“What did we spend on travel in October?” “Compare marketing spend month over month.”
Help with quick navigation (jump to data/pages)
✅
Use search-like queries to jump to transactions, vendors, customers, or reports.
Use recent context for follow-ups
✅
Follow-ups like “What about last quarter?” often work within the same session.
Create reports for you
⛔
It can’t create or save new reports... yet.
Post or edit transactions / journal entries
⛔
No creating or editing entries in the ledger.
Create invoices or bills
⛔
It won’t draft or send invoices/bills for you.
Render charts or graphs directly in the chat
⛔
Planned, but not live yet.
Answer tax, legal, or compliance questions
⛔
It may decline or redirect you to support or your advisor.
Can Ask Digits create or post transactions and invoices for me?
Not yet. Ask Digits can open flows to create transactions, invoices, reports, or uploads, but **you still review and submit**.
Does Ask Digits remember everything I’ve ever asked?
No. It keeps **short-term context** for your recent questions so simple follow-ups (like “What about last quarter?”) often work, but it does not store full long-term history today.
Can Ask Digits answer tax or legal questions?
No. Ask Digits is intentionally limited here and won’t provide tax, legal, or compliance advice. Please consult your advisor for those questions.
Is Ask Digits secure and accurate?
Absolutely! Ask Digits runs entirely inside Digits, using your real ledger data. You get accurate calculations, consistent answers, and **enterprise-grade security** for your financial data.
How is Ask Digits different from regular search?
Search helps you **find specific records** (like transactions or vendors). Ask Digits can do that, *plus* answer natural-language questions, show tasks, and start common workflows from the same bar.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Navigation & Shortcuts
Find anything and get anywhere quickly. Use the global Search, follow breadcrumbs, and work faster with keyboard shortcuts.
***
### Left Navigation Menu (Sidebar) (On-screen Navigation)
#### Top of menu
| Text | What it does |
| ------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Checklist** |
Review uncategorized transactions, approve bills, resolve comments, and more The badge indicates the number of items that need action
|
### :house: Home Section
* Click to expand Home
Text
What it does
Dashboards
Your Overview dashboard and any custom dashboards you've created, with tiles for metrics, statements, and lists. Switch between dashboards at the top of the page
Expenses
Spending over time, broken down by category or by vendor. Select any row to drill into the underlying transactions
Revenue
Income over time, broken down by category or by customer
Cost of Revenue
Cost of goods/revenue over time, broken down by category or by supplier. This view appears once your books have cost-of-revenue activity
***
### :file-lines: Financials
* Click to expand Financials
| Text | What it does |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Statements** | View your core financial statements: Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, and AR/AP Aging. Filter by time period and drill into any line to see the underlying transactions |
| **Custom Reports** | Build and schedule branded custom reports |
***
#### Middle of menu
Text
What it does
Banks & Cards
View connected bank and card transactions
Vendors
Review vendor spend
Customers
Review your customers and the payments they've made to you; manage customer records and AR.
### :file-invoice-dollar: Bills & Invoices Section
* Click to expand Bills and Invoices
Your catalog of products and services for invoicing: names, prices, and active/inactive status. Items here are available to add as line items when creating invoices
### :abacus: Accounting Section
* Click to expand Accounting
Text
What it Does
Ledger
Full transaction history - your source of truth for all entries
Reconciliations
Track and complete monthly bank reconciliations
Schedules
Automated depreciation and amortization for fixed assets and prepaid expenses. Digits generates the journal entries across each schedule's life and flags new schedule candidates for review
Open your Checklist (badge shows count of items needing attention)
Search
Find vendors, amounts, categories, or transactions
***
### Ledger Toolbar
Icon/Text
What It Does
View (eye)
Read only mode
Edit (pencil)
Enter edit mode to select and modify transactions
Opposing Arrows
Expand view to full screen
Date picker
Choose the date(s) that are shown in the ledger
+ Add Transaction
Add a new transaction manually
Down Arrow (next to + Add Transaction)
Click to open dropdown. Select import bank transactions or import journal entries
Search bar
Search for transactions by date, keyword, amount, etc.
Collapse/Expand
Collapse or expand transaction detail
Filter
Narrow transactions by party, amount, source, status, etc.
### Transaction Viewing/Editing
* Click to open a transaction
Icon/Text
What It Does
View (eye)
Read only mode
Edit (pencil)
Enter edit mode to select and modify transactions
Trash can
Delete transaction (grayed out if from connected source)
Reverse arrow
Create an offsetting entry for transactions that can't be deleted
Copy
Duplicate this transaction
***
### (Bulk) Edit Toolbar
* Only appears at the top of the screen when one or more transactions are selected
Icon/Text
What it Does
Party dropdown
Change party for selected transactions
Category dropdown
Change category for selected transactions
Move to (folder with arrow)
Move tranactions to a different account dropdown
Comment (speech bubble)
Add comments to selected transactions
Department (building)
Assign/update department
Location (pin)
Assign/update location
Match (stack)
Merge two transactions into one (prevents duplicates)
Unmatch (lifting stack)
Separate previously matched transactions
Delete (trash can)
Delete a transaction (grayed out = can't delete; use Reverse instead)
Total
Total of selected transactions
X icon
Cancel and close toolbar
Apply to
Complete action for displayed number of selected transactions
***
### New Transactions Types
* Available when you click + Add Transaction from the ledger
Icon/Text
What it Does
Journal
Multi-line adjusting entries between accounts
Pay In
Record income, deposits, refunds received
Pay Out
Record expenses, payments made
Transfer
Move money between connected accounts
***
### Commenting/Audit Panel
* Appears when you click into a transaction
Icon/Text
What it Does
Comment bubble
Comments - View/add comments and tag team members
Lightbulb
Insights about the transaction
Clock
Activity Log - See history of changes
***
## Keyboard Shortcuts
* Press **Shift + /** anywhere in the app to open **Keyboard Shortcuts**.
* Or click the **shortcuts icon** in the **bottom-left corner** of the app.
Context
Action
Mac
Windows/Linux
Global
Show Keyboard Shortcuts
Shift + /
Shift + /
Global
Open Ask Digits
⌘ or Shift + K
Ctrl + K
Global
Open Ask Digits
⌘ or Shift +:up:+ F
Ctrl + Shift + F
Ledger
Open Filters
F
F
Ledger
Scroll up / down
↑ / ↓
↑ / ↓
Ledger
Scroll up ×10 / down ×10
Page Up / Page Down
Page Up / Page Down
Ledger
Open selection
Enter
Enter
Ledger
Maximize / Minimize View
M
M
Ledger
Edit Mode
E
E
Ledger
View Mode
V
V
Ledger
Expand all rows
[
[
Ledger
Collapse all rows
]
]
Ledger
New Transaction
N
N
***
## Status Indicators
### Checklist Badge
Icon/Text
Meaning
Green badge with number
Number of items needing your attention
***
### Reconciliation Status Dots
Icon/Text
Meaning
Empty circle
Not started
Yellow circle
In progress/needs attention
Green checkmark
Completed
***
### Bill Statuses (Kanban Columns)
Icon/Text
Meaning
In Review
Uploaded, needs review
Pending Approval
Waiting for approval
Awaiting Payment
Approved, ready to pay
Scheduled & Paid
Complete
***
### How do I open Search from anywhere?
1. Click the **Search** bar at the top of any page.
2. Or press **⌘ + K** (Mac) / **Ctrl + K** (Windows/Linux) to open **Global Search**.
3. Type a **vendor**, **amount**, **category**, **memo**, or **month** (e.g., “Uber”, “42.50”, “Meals”, “May 2025”), then press **Enter** to open the top result.
***
### Power tip — Do math in amount fields
1. Click into an **Amount** field (e.g., in **Ledger**).
2. Type a simple expression (e.g., **10.80+10**), then press **Enter**.
3. The field resolves to the **calculated result,** and the page totals update.
**What works:** `+` (add), `-` (subtract), `*` (multiply), `/` (divide), decimals.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** If the change affects a **closed period**, you may see a confirmation dialog before the edit is applied.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I open Search from anywhere?
Yes. Press **Command + K** (Mac) or **Ctrl + K** (Windows/Linux) to open Search from any page.
Does Search work across multiple businesses?
Search is limited to the current business workspace.
Can I enter math in any amount field?
Yes—most amount fields in Ledger accept basic arithmetic and resolve on Enter. The calculated result is saved to the transaction.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Accounting & Ledger
Manage your complete general ledger, reconciliations, categories, and tax workflows in one place for accurate, audit-ready books.
***
### **Ledger**
:book-open: Ledger:
Navigating the Ledger
Explore every business transaction with the Digits Agentic General Ledger™.
***
# Navigating the Ledger
The **Digits Agentic General Ledger™** is your business’s live source of truth for what hits your books.
Every entry, whether manual, imported, or automated, flows through this tab. It’s where you investigate anomalies and maintain complete auditability with full visibility into your data.
Whether you’re reviewing activity, troubleshooting something that looks off, or closing the month with your accountant, the Digits Agentic General Ledger™ is the foundation of accurate, real-time accounting for your business.
***
{% embed url="" %}
### How to Access the Ledger
1. In the left navigation, click **Accounting**.
2. Select **Ledger**.
You’ll land on a complete, filterable view of your financial activity.
***
### Viewing by Category
The **Category** view organizes data by chart of accounts, making it easy to review balances, reconcile activity, and validate categorization.
#### **How it works**
* The left sidebar displays your **account hierarchy**, grouped by account type.
* Accounts appear **numerically by account number**, or alphabetically if no number exists.
* Only accounts with activity or a non-zero balance are shown for the selected period.
#### **Navigation Tips**
* **Hover** over a category to reveal a checkbox and filter to that category only.
* **Click** any category name to jump directly to its section in the Ledger.
* **Transaction counts** appear on the right side of each category.
* Parent accounts include totals from all nested sub-accounts.
***
### Filters
{% columns %}
{% column valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
* Party
* Amount
* Source
* Matched Status
* Department
* Location
* Transaction Type
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
### Reviewing Past Transactions
Use the date selector at the top of the Ledger to shift across months, quarters, or years.
#### **How to change the date**
1. Click the date range (e.g., *June 2025*).
2. Choose from presets like **Last 3 Months**, **Year to Date**, or any past period.
3. Select **Custom Range** to define your own start and end dates.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does the Ledger show pending transactions or only posted transactions?
The Ledger shows posted transactions only. Pending transactions from your bank are not displayed in the Ledger.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# How AI Works in Digits
Learn how Digits uses AI to automatically book, categorize, and review transactions—so you only step in when human judgment is actually needed.
***
{% hint style="warning" icon="hand-wave" %}
**Welcome to Digits!**
If your Checklist looks busy right after you connect data, you didn’t do anything wrong — Digits is being intentionally conservative while it learns your business. **Confirm what’s right, correct what isn’t, and Digits applies that learning immediately, so the Checklist shrinks over time.**
We’ll walk through how it all works below.
{% endhint %}
### Overview
Digits is an **AI-native accounting platform**, designed to automate routine bookkeeping and surface only the items that need human judgment—without sacrificing accuracy, control, or auditability.
Unlike legacy systems where AI is layered onto an existing workflow, Digits’ AI is embedded directly into the general ledger itself. This foundation—called the **Agentic General Ledger™**—allows Digits to continuously book, categorize, reconcile, and review transactions as they come in, so you spend less time on repetitive bookkeeping and more time on exceptions and decisions.
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
Throughout the Help Center, the ✨ sparkle icon highlights features powered by Digits AI.
{% endhint %}
***
### Where Digits AI Shows Up
Digits AI primarily works across five places in the product:
* **Ledger** (categorization, matching, splitting, review)
* **Checklist** (exception queue for items needing attention)
* **Reconciliations** (statement matching + exception handling)
* **Vault** (extraction + routing into the right workflow)
* **Ask Digits** (search + navigation + analysis)
***
### What Does Digits AI Do Automatically?
#### ✨ **Automatic Transaction Categorization**
{% columns %}
{% column width="50%" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="49.999999999999986%" %}
> As transactions sync from banks, cards, payroll, and connected tools, Digits automatically:
>
> * Identifies the likely party (vendor/customer/payroll source)
> * Selects a category/account in your chart of accounts (Category Manager)
> * Applies what it has learned from your prior decisions
> * Routes uncertain items to the Checklist instead of guessing
> {% endcolumn %}
> {% endcolumns %}
***
#### ✨ **Continuous Reconciliation (Statement-Aware)**
{% columns %}
{% column %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
> When statement data is available (from a connected account or an uploaded PDF), Digits automatically:
>
> * Matches statement lines to Ledger activity
> * Drafts the reconciliation
> * Surfaces exceptions like missing, duplicate, or unmatched items
> * Keeps reconciliation status current as items are confirmed or resolved
> {% endcolumn %}
> {% endcolumns %}
***
#### ✨ **Document Extraction and Workflow Routing**
{% columns %}
{% column %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
> Digits can ingest documents like:
>
> * Bank/credit card statements
> * Bills and invoices
> * Receipts
> * Bank check images (where available)
>
> Digits identifies the document type and routes it into the appropriate workflow (Vault, Reconciliations, Bills, etc.).
> {% endcolumn %}
> {% endcolumns %}
***
#### ✨ **Ask Digits Search and Workflow Shortcuts**
{% columns %}
{% column %}
> Ask Digits helps you:
>
> * Search transactions, vendors, categories, and balances
> * Jump into workflows quickly (Ledger, Reconciliations, Vault)
> * Ask questions in natural language
> {% endcolumn %}
{% column %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
### How Digits Learns & Training Your AI
When you connect your data, Digits starts with high baseline accuracy, but it doesn’t know your unique business context... yet.
Expect the first **1–2 months to need the most review**. That’s normal. Digits is learning your vendors, naming quirks, and category preferences.
Digits **automates 95%** of your bookkeeping, so most transactions never require your attention. Anything that needs a human eye is automatically routed to your Checklist → Book for review.
Think of the **Book** in **Checklist** as your **training queue**, not your permanent workload. Every time you confirm or correct a transaction, Digits applies that feedback immediately to similar future transactions, so the system gets smarter while your review list gets quieter.
Most customers see noticeable improvement by **month 2–3**, and accuracy continues to improve over time.
***
### How Automatic Categorization Works
Digits categorizes a transaction when it appears in your Ledger (from a bank connection or an uploaded bank statement/CSV file). Then, :sparkles: Digits evaluates context such as:
* Merchant text/transaction description
* Transaction date
* Historical categorization patterns
* Amount ranges and frequency
* Related activity (e.g., transfers, deposits, fees)
* Your chart of accounts structure
* Check image details (payee, amount, memo) when available
Digits then:
1. **Proposes a category & party**, such as a vendor or customer
2. **Assigns a confidence score**
3. Either **posts automatically** (high confidence) or **routes to Checklist** → **Book** (lower confidence) for review
{% hint style="success" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
This is why Digits doesn’t rely on rules you have to build and maintain. Instead, Digits learns patterns from your data and from what you confirm or correct, and it automatically creates and strengthens its own “rules” over time.
{% endhint %}
#### Categorization for connected apps
Some connected apps, such as Stripe, BILL, and Gusto, use account mappings to categorize specific types of activity. These mappings consistently send the same type of activity to the same account. For example, Stripe processing fees can be mapped to your payment processing fees account.
If you change the category on an individual mapped transaction, the change applies to that transaction only. Future transactions continue to follow the connection's account mapping.
***
### Confidence Scoring & Checklist → Book
Even with high accuracy, Digits is intentionally conservative when certainty is low.
Every automated categorization is assigned a **confidence score**.
:up:**High confidence:** posted automatically
:down: **Lower confidence:** routed to the **Checklist**
**How to resolve an item in Checklist → Book**
1. Review the suggested category and party
2. Confirm if correct, or change to the right category
3. Save/confirm
4. Digits learns and applies it going forward
**Why the Confirm Button Might Be Greyed Out**
* **A required field is missing** (most often: no category selected).\
Select a category first, then **Confirm** becomes available.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
**Tip:** The more consistently you confirm and correct in the Checklist, the faster Digits learns. Early investment in review pays off quickly — within a few weeks, your Checklist volume should decrease noticeably.
{% endhint %}
***
### Reconciliations: What AI Does and What You Do
Digits reconciles by matching **statement activity** to your **Ledger**. When Digits has a statement (from a connection or an upload), it can keep reconciliation status up to date and surface only what needs attention.
**How it works**
* Your statement gets into Digits by:
1. Connecting a bank/credit card (when statement data is available), **or**
2. uploading a statement PDF in **Accounting → Reconciliations**, **or**
3. emailing a statement to Digits (see below)
* Digits matches statement lines to Ledger transactions
* You get a clear reconciliation status plus a short list of exceptions (duplicates, missing items, or timing differences) to review and automatically apply necessary changes
For complete instructions, see: [Using AI Bank Reconciliations in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/ai-bank-recs)
***
### Documents, Statement Uploads, and Imports
### What Happens After a Document Lands in Vault
You can bring data into Digits by connecting accounts or uploading files. What happens next depends on **how** and **where** you upload.
Below, you’ll see **what happens to each file type** (statements, CSVs, bills, receipts, and more) based on **how it enters Digits**—including **Connections, Ledger import, Reconciliations, Vault, drag & drop, and email**.
{% hint style="success" icon="key" %}
**Hint:** Where you upload a file determines what Digits does with it.
{% endhint %}
#### Document Type: **Bank or Credit Card Statement (PDF)**
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Ledger → Import Bank Transactions
Imports transactions into the Ledger and auto-categorizes them; Digits will then automatically start a reconciliation.
Upload to Vault
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Drag & Drop
Routed and stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Email to Digits
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Reconcilations
If the transactions were already imported (by bank sync or by going to Ledger → Import Bank Transactions, then Digits will automatically start a reconciliation. If the transactions were not imported, the document will be saved to Vault.
#### Document Type: **CSV**
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Ledger → Import Bank Transactions
Imports transactions into the Ledger and auto-categorizes them.
Upload to Vault
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Drag & Drop
Routed and stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Email to Digits
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
#### Document Type: **Bills**
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Upload to Vault
Automatically creates a bill for review and approval.
Drag & Drop
Routed to Vault. Creates a bill for review.
Email to Digits
Lands in Vault. Creates a bill for review.
#### Document Type: **Check image**
A single upload can include **multiple checks**, which Digits processes individually. Digits also **automatically rotates** sideways or upside-down checks and statements during processing.
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Connected Account
Extracts check images from imported bank statements, saves them to Vault, and attempts to match them to Ledger transactions.
Upload to Vault
Saves the image to Vault and attempts to match it to a Ledger transaction.
Drag & Drop
Saves the image to Vault and attempts to match it to a Ledger transaction.
Email to Digits
Saves the image to Vault and attempts to match it to a Ledger transaction.
#### Document Type: **Receipts**
| How It Gets Into Digits | What Digits Does With It |
| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Upload to Vault** | Automatically attaches to a matching transaction for easy reference. |
| **Drag & Drop** | Routed to Vault. Attaches to a matching transaction (if found). |
| **Email to Digits** | Lands in Vault. Attaches to a matching transaction (if found). |
#### Document Type**:** **Other files (Word, Excel, general PDFs)**
| How It Gets Into Digits | What Digits Does With It |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Upload to Vault** | Stored in **Vault** for organization and reference only. |
| **Drag & Drop** | Routed and stored in **Vault** for organization and reference only. |
| **Email to Digits** | Routed and stored in **Vault** for organization and reference only. |
### I got my data into Digits — what does it categorize?
:sparkles: Digits AI categorizes **transactions**, not documents.
Here’s what that means once your data is in Digits:
* **Connected accounts (Connections):** As transactions flow into your **Ledger**, Digits categorizes them automatically.
* **Ledger → Import Bank Transactions (CSV ):** Digits imports **transactions** into the Ledger and categorizes those transactions.
* **Ledger → Import Bank Transactions (Bank Statement PDF):** Digits imports **transactions** into the Ledger, categorizes those transactions, then starts a reconciliation.
* **Files uploaded to Vault (including drag & drop or email):** Digits stores the file, but **does not categorize anything** just because a document exists in Vault.
* **AI Bank Reconciliation:** Reconciliation matches statement activity to Ledger transactions. If Digits flags a missing transaction and you click **Add Transaction**, that **new transaction** enters the Ledger and is categorized like any other.
{% hint style="info" icon="folder-arrow-up" %}
**In short,** Digits categorizes transactions as they **enter the Ledger.**
{% endhint %}
***
### Control, Auditability, and Safety
Digits is designed to support professional judgment, not replace it. You always retain control:
* Transactions can be edited, reversed, or reclassified
* Bulk changes are supported
* Manual journal entries are supported
* Changes are tracked in each transaction’s Activity Log, so you can see what changed, when, and by whom
Digits is built with bank-grade security practices, including SOC 2 Type II compliance, TLS/HTTPS for in-transit data, encryption at rest, and layered infrastructure controls.
Visit for more security information.
***
### What Digits’ AI Doesn’t Do
To set clear expectations, Digits intentionally avoids certain behaviors:
:no\_entry\_sign: It does **not** auto-post transactions it isn’t confident about
:no\_entry\_sign: It does **not** override human decisions
:no\_entry\_sign: It does **not** answer tax or legal questions
:no\_entry\_sign: It does **not** perform foreign currency conversion or revaluation
:white\_check\_mark: AI in Digits is designed to **assist and accelerate professional judgment**, not replace it.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does Digits use rules?
Yes and no. Digits doesn’t use rules you build and maintain. Instead, Digits relies on machine-learning models that learn patterns from your data, and you confirm/correct actions. Over time, Digits effectively creates and reinforces its own “rules” automatically—without you managing rule logic.
How accurate is Digits AI?
Digits’ AI is built for accounting — not retrofitted for it. It’s trained on **170M+ real transactions totaling $825B**, so it recognizes the patterns behind actual books (and the weird edge cases that show up in the real world).
We believe accuracy claims should come with receipts. That’s why we benchmarked Digits against leading general-purpose LLMs (**including GPT-5, Claude, and Gemini**) on accounting-specific tasks. In internal testing, Digits performed **43% better**.
For full methodology and results, download a copy of the full [Agentic General Ledger whitepaper.](https://www.digits.com/agl)
**What does this mean for you?**\
Digits automates up to 97.8% of your bookkeeping over time — so most transactions never require your attention. The exceptions that need a human eye are automatically routed to your Checklist.
Digits improves quickly as it learns your business's vendors, naming conventions, and category preferences. Every confirmation or correction is applied immediately to similar future transactions, so accuracy increases as you work. Most users see noticeable improvement by **month 2–3**.
Will Digits ever auto-post something incorrectly?
Digits applies confidence thresholds to avoid risky automation. When confidence is low, items are surfaced for review instead of being auto-posted.
Does Digits improve over time?
Absolutely! Digits improves over time as it learns your patterns.
* When Digits first connects to a new business, it doesn’t yet know your vendors, naming conventions, or category preferences, so you’ll usually see more items routed to the Checklist.
* Every time you **confirm** a category or **correct** a transaction, Digits applies that feedback to similar future transactions, so fewer items need review.
Does Digits use AI to extract information from uploaded documents?
Yes. Digits uses AI to extract and structure data from supported statements, bills, and receipts.
What's the difference between the Ledger & Book (Checklist)?
The **Checklist is for review**. The **Ledger is the system of record**.
Digits separates *review work* from *recordkeeping* so you only spend time where judgment is needed.
If I upload statements, will Digits automatically categorize the transactions?
Yes — if you upload a bank/credit card statement in the Reconciliations workflow, Digits will extract the statement transactions, match them to what’s already in your Ledger, and help categorize anything that becomes a new Ledger transaction.
The key detail:
* **Uploading a statement does not directly “categorize the PDF.”**
* Categorization happens **when transactions enter the Ledger**.
#### What typically happens when you upload a statement PDF
1. Digits reads the statement and starts an **AI Bank Reconciliation**.
2. It matches statement lines to existing Ledger transactions.
3. If the statement contains **missing items** (i.e., not in the Ledger), Digits surfaces them as exceptions.
4. When you click **Add Transaction** (or otherwise create those missing Ledger transactions), **Digits will categorize them using its normal AI categorization models**.
**If you want Digits to create Ledger transactions from a statement**
Use the upload path that creates/feeds Ledger transactions (e.g., statement upload via Reconciliations + adding missing items, or “Import Bank Transactions” where available). Once those transactions exist in the Ledger, Digits will categorize them.
What’s the difference between CSV import and PDF statement upload?
The difference depends on **where you upload the file**.
* **Ledger → Import Bank Transactions (CSV or PDF)**\
Imports transactions into the **Ledger** and automatically categorizes them.\
**Does not start reconciliation.**
* **Accounting → Reconciliations (PDF statement)**\
Starts reconciliation. Digits reads the statement, matches transactions to the Ledger, and surfaces exceptions.
* **Upload to Vault, Drag & Drop, or Email**\
Files are stored in **Vault**.\
If the file is a bank or credit card statement PDF, Digits will try to start reconciliation. If it can’t find anything to reconcile, the file stays in Vault.\
CSV files uploaded this way are stored only; they do not import transactions.
**In short:**\
Use **Ledger → Import Bank Transactions** to add transactions.\
Use **Accounting → Reconciliations** to reconcile a statement.
Can I categorize based on the memo field?
No. Digits doesn't use fixed if-this-then-that rules, and the **memo** is a note for you—it isn't a signal the categorization AI reads.
Instead, categorization learns from **each transaction line's description**, the party, the amount, your chart of accounts, and how you've categorized similar transactions before.
The best way to "set a rule" is to correct a transaction. Digits applies what it learns to similar transactions, and your first month or two of corrections have the biggest impact on future categorization.
Why didn’t Digits learn from my category change for a connected app?
For transactions from connected apps such as Stripe, BILL, and Gusto, some activity is categorized using the account mappings configured for that connection.
If you change the category on an individual mapped transaction, your change applies only to that transaction. It does not update the connection’s account mapping, so future transactions of that type will continue to use the mapped account.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Pay In/ Pay Out Transactions
Learn how to manually record Pay In and Pay Out transactions in Digits. Add income, expenses, refunds, or reversals directly from your Ledger with control and accuracy.
***
### Create an Add Pay In / Pay Out Transaction
1. Go to **Accounting → Ledger.**
2. Click **Add Transaction** in the top-right corner.
3. Choose **Pay In** or **Pay Out** based on the transaction type.
4. Enter transaction details:
Field
Description
Required/Optional
Party
For Pay In, select the pay-from party; for Pay Out, select the pay-to party.
Required
Reference Number
Tracking or reference number for the transaction (e.g., invoice or receipt number).
Optional
Date
Choose the transaction date.
Required
Memo
Internal note for context or reference.
Optional
Category
Choose the correct ledger category.
Required
Description
Short description of the transaction.
Optional
Amount
Enter the amount.
Required
Department
Assign the transaction to a department, if applicable.
Optional
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Add extra lines for multi-split entries by clicking **+ Add Line** at the bottom.
{% endhint %}
5. When finished entering your details, you can choose how to save:
* **Save & Close** — Save and return to the Ledger.
* **Save** — Save and stay on the current entry.
* **Save & New** — Save and immediately start another transaction.
***
### Recording Refunds or Reversals
Need to enter a refund, return, or adjustment?\
You can enter **negative amounts** in both *Pay In* and *Pay Out* transactions.
Common use cases include:
* Vendor or customer refunds
* Reversing incorrect entries
* Recording partial credits or bank fee adjustments
Digits automatically processes negative entries correctly for reporting and reconciliation.
***
### Need to record a journal entry instead?
If your entry affects multiple accounts or adjusting entries, use **Journal Entries** instead of Pay In/Pay Out. See: [Journal Entries in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/journal-entries)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I edit or delete a Pay In / Pay Out transaction later?
Yes. Open the transaction in the Ledger, make your changes, and click **Save**. You can also delete it from the dropdown menu.
What’s the difference between Pay In, Pay Out, Journal, and Transfer?
* **Pay In:** Incoming cash or income transactions.
* **Pay Out:** Outgoing payments or expenses.
* **Journal:** Adjusting or non-cash entries between accounts.
* **Transfer:** Moves money between connected accounts (e.g., checking → savings).
Will Pay In and Pay Out affect reconciliations?
Yes. These transactions are included in reconciliation workflows, so ensure categories and dates are accurate.
Can I add a transaction from a party or category page?
Yes! You can add a new transaction directly from any party page (vendor or customer) or category detail page — no need to navigate back to the Ledger. Just click **+ Add Transaction** from the page you're on.
Can I assign a different customer or vendor to each line of a Pay In or Pay Out?
No. A Pay In or Pay Out can be split into multiple lines with different amounts and categories, but the transaction can have only one Party.
If you need different customers or vendors on individual lines—for example, a single deposit split across multiple customers—change the transaction's Type to Journal, or create a Journal Entry instead. Journal entries let you assign a different Party to each line.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Journal Entries in Digits
Record and manage journal entries in Digits to capture multi-account activity, balance debits and credits, and maintain accurate financials —all in one place.
***
### **Creating a Journal Entry**
1. From the left navigation menu, go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
2. Click **New Transaction** in the top-right corner.
3. Choose **Journal** as the transaction type.
4. Enter journal details:
Field
Description
Required/ Optional
Reference Number
Tracking or reference number for the transaction (e.g., invoice or receipt number).
Optional
Date
Choose the transaction date.
Required
Memo
Internal note for context or reference.
Optional
Description
Short description of the transaction.
Optional
Category
Choose the correct ledger category for each line.
Required
Debit/Credit Amount
Amounts must balance.
Required
Party
Add the Party if the transaction relates to a specific vendor, customer, or employee. Leave blank for internal adjustments (e.g., depreciation, reclassifications, accruals).
Optional
Department
Assign the transaction to a department, if applicable.
Optional
Location
Assign the transaction to a location, if applicable.
Optional
6. Add additional lines if needed (minimum of two required).
7. When finished entering your details, you can choose how to save:
* **Save & Close** — Save and return to the Ledger.
* **Save** — Save and stay on the current entry.
* **Save & New** — Save and immediately start another transaction.
***
### Importing Journal Entries
You can also import journals via CSV for faster onboarding or multi-line adjustments.
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
2. Click the dropdown next to **Add Transaction** → **Import Journal Entries.**
3. Download the **CSV template.**
4. Fill in your entries using the template.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
**Tip:** Enter the exact customer or vendor name in the **Party** column for each line that should be associated with a party. If you leave the **Party** column blank, Digits may assign a party automatically. If needed, you can update the assigned parties later using the **bulk Party editor** in the **Ledger**.
{% endhint %}
3. Upload your completed file and review the mapping preview.
4. Click **Next** to complete the import.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Each row in your file represents **one line** of a journal entry.\
Lines with the same **Reference Number** are grouped into a single entry.
Best for:
* Opening balances
* Multi-line adjustments
* Catch-up entries during onboarding
Just make sure your **debits and credits balance** within each group — :sparkles: Digits handles the rest automatically.
{% endhint %}
***
### Copying or Reversing a Journal Entry
Need to fix a mistake or repeat a recurring entry? Copying and reversing make it quick.
1. Go to **Accounting → Ledger.**
2. Locate the entry by category, party, or amount (or press **Command + K** to search).
3. Click the **Edit** icon at the top of the entry.
4. Choose **Copy** to duplicate or **Reverse** to create an offsetting entry.
5. Click **Submit** to save.
***
### Editing Journal Entries
**Need to make changes after posting?**\
Journal entries can be edited just like any other transaction in Digits — update fields, add lines, or reverse entries as needed.
For step-by-step guidance, see: [Editing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/editing-transactions)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What is a journal entry?
It’s the basic record of a financial transaction in double-entry accounting. Every entry has equal **debits** and **credits**, updating the general ledger.
* **Date**
* **Affected Categories**
* **Debit and Credit amounts**
* **Optional details:** memo, party, or reference number
Every line must include a selected category, and **total debits must equal total credits**.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Pro Tip:** A journal entry is just one type of accounting entry. Other entries—like [Pay In/ Pay Out Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/pay-in-pay-out)—capture simpler transactions affecting bank or credit card accounts.
{% endhint %}
Can I create a journal entry for a future date?
Yes. Add them manually or import them into your existing workflows. Once a future-dated transaction exists, the period selector will automatically update, allowing you to navigate to future periods.
Can I import journal entries from QuickBooks?
Not directly — journal imports are supported via CSV. For QuickBooks migrations, Digits automatically brings over the Chart of Accounts and transaction history up to your cutover date.
What happens if my debits and credits don’t balance?
Digits won’t let you save the entry until totals match. Check each line and ensure every debit has a corresponding credit.
Can I copy or reuse recurring journals?
Yes — use the Copy function in the Ledger to duplicate existing entries, then adjust details as needed.
How long does an import take?
Imports typically process within 1–10 minutes, depending on size. If it takes longer, reach out to [help@digits.com](mailto:).
Why can't I find a specific account when creating a journal entry?
Digits supports journal entries to any account in your Chart of Accounts, including Retained Earnings, partner equity, and distributions. If an account doesn't appear when you're creating a journal entry, it likely hasn't been added to your Chart of Accounts yet. Go to Category Manager, create the category under the appropriate parent (e.g., Retained Earnings under Equity), and it will be available immediately. See: [Categories (Chart of Accounts)](/business-agentic-general-ledger/category-manager)
Can I delete or edit an opening balance?
Absolutely! See: [Troubleshooting Cash Totals: Verifying Opening Balances](/business-agentic-general-ledger/verify-opening-balances)
Can I add attachments to a journal entry?
You can attach optional supporting documents after saving a journal entry.
1. Open the journal entry.
2. Open the review panel on the right.
3. Click the comments icon.
4. Browse or drag & drop your attachment.
What happens if I save a journal entry in a closed period?
If you save a journal entry dated in a closed period, Digits warns you that the entry will affect closed-period balances and asks you to confirm before continuing.
If you select **Save**, the journal entry is posted to the ledger.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Bank Transfers
Transfers move money between two accounts — like paying off a credit card from a checking account. You can record and review these directly in Ledger.
***
### Create a Transfer Transaction
1. From your **Dashboard**, go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
2. Click **Add Transaction** in the top-right corner.
3. Choose **Transfer** as the transaction type.
4. Enter transaction details:
Field
Description
Required/Optional
Reference Number
Tracking or reference number for the transaction (e.g., invoice or receipt number).
Optional
Amount
Enter the amount.
Required
Date
Choose the transaction date.
Required
Memo
Internal note for context or reference.
Optional
To/From Account
Source and destination accounts.
Required
Category
Choose the correct ledger category.
Required
5. When finished entering your details, you can choose how to save:
* **Save & Close** — Save and return to the Ledger.
* **Save** — Save and stay on the current entry.
* **Save & New** — Save and immediately start another transaction.
***
### View Transfer Transactions
Digits has a dedicated view for Transfers, showing:
* Total amount
* Source and destination accounts
* Memo
* Associated vendor or institution
Use **filters or search** in Ledger to find specific transfers.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Note: Accounts must be set as **Bank** or **Credit Card** subtypes in Category Manager to show in the Transfers view.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I use Transfers for inter-account payments like a credit card payoff?
Yes! Transfers are ideal for these scenarios and keep your ledger clean.
Why isn’t my account showing up in the From/To options?
Check Category Manager — the account must be a **Bank** or **Credit Card** subtype.
Will Transfers sync from connected banks?
If the transfer is recognized across linked accounts, :sparkles:Digits will attempt to match both sides automatically. Manual entry is always an option.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Splitting Transactions
Some transactions include multiple expense types—like travel, lodging, and meals. Use transaction splitting in Digits to assign each amount to the right category for accurate books.
***
### How to Split a Transaction
1. From the left navigation menu, go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Click **Edit** in the header to enter edit mode.
3. Scroll or search for the transaction, then click it to open it.
4. Click **Add Line** to divide the amount across categories.
5. **Enter details** for each split:
* Assign the correct **amount** and **category** to each line.
* (*Optional*) Add **descriptions**, **memos**, or **departments** for clarity.
* Ensure the total of all split lines matches the **original transaction** amount.
6. Click **Save & Close** when finished.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** If the transaction has already been reconciled, Digits will alert you that changing categories may impact prior reconciliations.
{% endhint %}
***
### Example Use Cases
* **Mixed reimbursements:** A single deposit includes multiple reimbursable expenses.
* **Vendor payments:** One payment covers multiple invoices or departments.
* **Credit card charges:** Shared costs between business and personal use.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I split both income and expense transactions?
Yes. You can split *any* transaction—income, expense, or transfer—as long as it originates from a connected account.
What happens if I edit a reconciled transaction?
Digits will warn you before applying changes. Updating splits on a reconciled transaction may affect your past reconciliation balance.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Editing Transactions
Whether you're fixing a typo or reclassifying a category, Digits makes it easy to edit transactions across all sources — including manual entries, CSV imports, and bank-connected data.
***
### Edit a Single Transaction
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Use filters (category, party, amount) or **Command + K** to find the transaction.
3. Click **Edit** in the header.
4. Update fields inline — such as **Party** or **Category** — or click the transaction to open full edit options.
### Bulk Edit Transactions
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
2. Click **Edit** in the header.
3. Select one or more transactions by checking the checkboxes next to them. Once selected, a bulk editing bar will appear at the top of the screen.
4. Use the icons in the toolbar to apply changes across all selected transactions:
* **Category** – Move transactions to the correct category
* **Department** – Assign or update departments
* **Location** – Assign or update locations
* **Party (Vendor / Customer)** – Update the associated party
* **Comments** – Add notes or questions
* **Reverse or Delete** – Where supported, based on transaction source
5. Click **Apply** to save changes.
***
### Delete a Transaction
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Open the transaction.
3. Click the **trash can icon** in the top-right corner.
4. Confirm the deletion.
#### When deletion isn’t available
Transactions that originate inside Digits, such as Digits Pay payments, can't be deleted. Schedule-generated transactions, such as depreciation and amortization entries, can't be edited or deleted individually. To modify or remove them, edit or delete the schedule that created them.
Everything else, including QuickBooks-imported transactions, bank and card feed transactions, CSV imports, and manual entries, can be deleted individually or in bulk.
***
### Reverse A Transaction
Use Reverse when you want to cancel out a transaction's impact on balances and reports but keep it visible in the Ledger.
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Find and open the transaction.
3. Click the **reverse icon** in the top-right corner.
4. Confirm the reverse action.
***
### Editing Similar Transactions
When you change the **category** on a transaction, :sparkles:Digits automatically checks for other transactions that may match. If it finds any, you’ll see a **Review** prompt.
1. Click **Review** to see potential matches.
2. You can apply changes to all, some, or none.
***
### Editing Transactions in Closed Periods
If you open a transaction from a closed period, a message appears at the bottom of the screen
To edit a transaction in a closed period:
1. Reopen the period that contains the transaction.
2. Edit the transaction.
3. Close the period again to re-lock your books.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Reopening a period unlocks all transactions in that period, not just the one you're editing. Close the period again as soon as you're finished to keep your books protected.
{% endhint %}
For step-by-step instructions, see [Closing & Reopening Periods](/business-agentic-general-ledger/close-date)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What types of transactions can I edit?
All transaction types can be edited — including connected (Plaid), QuickBooks imports, CSV uploads, and manual entries.
Transactions in a closed period cannot be edited unless you reopen the period. See [Closing & Reopening Periods](/business-agentic-general-ledger/close-date)
What fields can I edit on a transaction?
You can edit categories, departments, locations, parties (vendors/customers), notes, and more—either individually or in bulk from the Ledger.
How does Digits identify similar transactions?
Digits looks for:
* The same starting category
* The same opposite-side (paired) category
* The same credit/debit direction
* Transactions after the most recent closed period
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Refunds are excluded from suggestions.
{% endhint %}
Need to fix or repeat an entry?
Use **Copy** to duplicate a transaction or **Reverse** to create an offsetting entry. This is especially useful for corrections, refunds, or reclassifications.
Why can't I delete some transactions?
Transactions that originate inside Digits — Digits Pay payments and schedule-generated entries like depreciation and amortization — can’t be deleted. Everything else — bank/card feeds, CSV imports, QuickBooks-imported transactions, and manual entries — can be deleted individually or in bulk. (Schedule-generated entries also can’t be edited individually — edit the schedule instead.)
Can I edit transactions directly from the Checklist?
Yes. When reviewing items in Checklist → Book, you can update categories, departments, and locations directly before resolving the item.
Can I edit transactions from a closed period?
Yes, but you’ll need to unlock editing for that transaction to make changes. See: [Closing & Reopening Periods](/business-agentic-general-ledger/close-date)
How do I remove old transactions from a bank connection?
You have three options, depending on the scope:
* **A few transactions:** delete them individually from the Ledger (open the transaction → trash can icon), or select multiple in bulk edit mode and delete them together.
* **All transactions from a connection:** archive and delete the connection itself. See [Archive and Delete a Connection](/business-connections/remove-connections)
* **Trim historical imports only:** adjust the connection's start date. See [Change the Start Date for a Connection](/business-connections/start-date)
How do I remove a large number of transactions from my ledger?
It depends on where those transactions came from:
**If they came from a bank connection (Plaid):** Adjust the connection's start date to control how far back Digits pulls data. In the left navigation, go to **Connections**, click **Manage** next to the connection, update the **Cutover Date** to the date you want data to start from, and save. Digits will remove transactions before that date.
**If they came from a QuickBooks migration:** There's no way to selectively remove migrated transactions. You'll need to start over and choose a later migration date.
See: [Starting Over in Digits](/business-connections/starting-over)
**Note:** There is no bulk reverse option. Reversals must be done one transaction at a time.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Match or Unmatch Transactions
:sparkles: Digits automatically matches transactions across connected sources, such as Stripe, Ramp, or your bank, to merge them into a single, clean record. This prevents duplicates and keeps your books audit-ready.
Most matches happen automatically, but during reconciliation, you can manually match or unmatch transactions if something looks off.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Changes may take a few minutes to reflect in the Ledger and Reconciliations view.
{% endhint %}
### How to Match Transactions
1. From the left-hand menu, go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
2. Click the **Edit** icon in the header to enter edit mode.
3. Scroll or use filters to find the two transactions you want to match.
4. Click the checkbox next to each transaction.
5. A toolbar will appear at the top — click the **Match** icon.
6. Or click the **Unmatch** icon in the toolbar.
7. Confirm when prompted.
***
### Matching Requirements
* The **amounts must be identical.**
* Other fields (like date, party, or category) help guide matching but aren’t required.
* Transfers and duplicate payments are the most common match scenarios.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What kinds of transactions can be matched?
You can match transactions that have the same total amount, including payments, deposits, and transfers.
Transactions in a closed period can't be matched.
What happens when transactions are matched?
Digits merges the two entries into one consolidated record, removing duplicates and syncing the data across your Ledger and Reconciliation views.
Do matches affect reports?
Yes — matched transactions are counted once across financial reports, ensuring your totals remain accurate.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Importing Transactions
Manually import your bank transactions using a bank statement or CSV file. Upload, map, and categorize your data with ease, so your Ledger stays complete even when a direct connection is not available
***
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** To trigger categorization, transactions must be added to the Ledger (for example, by importing a bank statement). Uploading files to Vault or Reconciliations does not categorize them. See [How AI Works in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/digits-ai)for more information.
{% endhint %}
### Import Transactions from Bank Statements
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
2. Click the dropdown next to **+ Add Transaction** → **Import Bank Transactions**.
3. Browse to select a file, or drag and drop a bank statement (PDF, PNG, JPG, and JPEG).
4. Click **Import Statement**.
5. :sparkles:Digits attempts to categorize imported transactions and assign parties automatically, but when it isn't confident enough, a transaction can come in as Uncategorized (for example, Uncategorized Expense) or with a low-confidence category. You don't have to hunt for these — Digits surfaces them for you in your Checklist. Open the flagged transaction, set the correct category, and confirming it helps Digits improve future suggestions.
{% hint style="info" icon="money-check-dollar" %}
**Check images** in imported statements are automatically extracted to Vault and matched to Ledger transactions when possible. Unmatched ones stay in the Vault for manual linking.
{% endhint %}
***
### How to Import Transactions via CSV
1. **Download a CSV file** from your client’s bank or provider.
2. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger.**
3. Click the dropdown next to **+ Add Transaction** → **Import Bank Transactions**.
4. Download the **CSV import template** in the pop-up window.
5. Fill in the template with the transaction information.
6. Upload the completed file and map each column to the correct Digits fields.
* For bank transactions, select the appropriate **Bank** or **Credit Card** category.
7. Click **Next** to review and complete the import.
8. :sparkles: Digits attempts to categorize imported transactions and assign parties automatically, but when it isn't confident enough, a transaction can come in as Uncategorized (for example, Uncategorized Expense) or with a low-confidence category. You don't have to hunt for these — Digits surfaces them for you in your Checklist. Open the flagged transaction, set the correct category, and confirming it helps Digits improve future suggestions.
***
{% hint style="info" %}
#### **Important Notes About Imports:**
* **Account visibility:**\
Don’t see an account? Make sure it’s set as a **Bank** or **Credit Card** subtype in **Category Manager** — that’s how Digits identifies eligible accounts.
* **Multi-account statements:** \
If a bank statement includes more than one account, Digits detects them during import and lets you choose which account(s) to bring into the Ledger.
* **Journal Entries:**\
Need to import journal entries instead? See Journal Entries in Digits.
* **Processing Time:**\
Imports typically finish within **1–10 minutes,** depending on file size. If processing takes longer than 30 minutes, contact **Digits Support**.
* **Editing & Deleting:**\
CSV-imported transactions can be fully **edited** or **deleted** as needed.
* **Cutover Dates:**\
If you migrated from QuickBooks Online (QBO), CSV imports are only allowed **after** the cutover date. Transactions before that date are managed by the QBO sync.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Do I need a CSV import if I use a major bank?
Usually not. If your bank connects through Plaid, transactions sync automatically. But CSV imports are still useful for historical data or unsupported accounts.
How can I export transactions from my bank?
If you need to download a CSV file manually, check the bank’s export options. Here are direct guides for popular institutions:
* [Bank of America](https://info.bankofamerica.com/en/digital-banking#paperless-statements-faqs)
* [Bench](https://help.bench.co/article/financial-reports)
* [Chase Bank](https://www.chase.com/content/dam/chaseonline/en/legacy/content/secure/sso/document/cco_account_activity_quick_reference-lores.pdf)
* [Silicon Valley Bank](https://svbtravelandexpense.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/articles/16786397639437-How-can-I-export-my-expense-data-CSV-and-PDF)
For other banks, search your online banking portal for **“Export CSV”** or **“Download Transactions.”**
What types of data can I import with CSV?
You can import transaction data, including Date, Amount, Description, plus optional Department and Location. Balances and statements are managed automatically by connected banks.
Why is my CSV import not showing up?
Ensure your CSV matches the template format exactly. Missing headers, blank rows, or incorrect account subtypes may cause the import to fail.
How long does it take to process an import?
Usually within 1–10 minutes, depending on file size. Larger imports may take longer.
How do I import business expenses that were paid on a personal credit card?
If you have business expenses that were charged to a personal credit card not connected to Digits, you can import them using a CSV file.
1. Export a CSV from your personal credit card's online banking portal.
2. Remove any personal expenses so the file only contains business-related transactions.
3. In Digits, go to **Ledger → Import Bank Transactions**. Under **Select Category**, you can click **Create New** to create a category for these transactions.
4. Use the Digits CSV template to format your transactions, then import.
Once imported, :sparkles: Digits will work to auto-categorize the expense side of each transaction.
Why aren't my transactions showing up after I uploaded a bank statement?
If you uploaded your file to Vault, it was saved for reference only. Vault does not import transactions into the Ledger.
To import transactions, go to **Accounting → Ledger**, then open the dropdown next to **Add Transaction**. From there, drag and drop your statement or upload a CSV file.
Should I import a statement if the account is already connected?
Generally, no. If an account is connected and transactions are already flowing into Digits, importing the same statement can create duplicates or confusing matching/unmatching.
Only import a statement when you’re:
* filling missing history (the connection didn’t pull far enough back)
* validating a period during reconciliation
* working with an account that can’t connect reliably (common with certain banks or card programs)
This scenario often comes up with:
* bank connections via Plaid (Chase, Wells Fargo, credit unions)
* processor statements for PayPal, Square, Stripe
* card programs where statements are available, but the feed is incomplete
Is there a file size or row limit for CSV imports?
No. Bank transaction CSV files of any size are supported — there's no need to split large files before uploading. Larger files may simply take a bit longer to process.
Are there file size or upload limits?
Yes. Upload limits vary depending on what you're uploading.
* **Vault, Attachments, Reconciliations, and Checklist statement uploads:** Up to **50 MB per file** and **25 files per upload**.
* **Bill Pay document uploads:** Up to **10 files per upload**.
* **Bulk bank statement uploads:** Up to **25 files per upload**.
Some documents may also take longer to process or not convert successfully. These aren't upload limits, but they can affect document processing:
* PDFs over **approximately 15 pages** may not convert successfully.
* Very large (approximately **7 MB+**) or highly formatted bank statements may take longer to process or return incomplete results.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Closing & Reopening Periods
Closing a month prevents edits, imports, and automations from changing past periods. Use this when you’ve finished reconciling and want clean, final numbers.
***
### Close a period (lock a month)
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Hover the month you want to lock and click **Manage Close**.
3. Select the **Close Date** (pick the last day of the month you’re closing), then click **Close Period**.
4. The ledger will now show a **lock icon** to confirm the period is locked.
***
### Reopen or change a closed period
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Hover the month you want to adjust and click **Manage Close**.
3. Click **Open All Periods**, then click **Open** to confirm.
4. Confirm the period shows as **Open**.
5. The ledger will now show an **edit icon** to confirm the period is open.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does locking one month lock earlier months too?
Yes. Digits uses a cascading lock—locking a month locks that month and all prior months. The current month stays open.
How do I unlock just one month?
Use Open all periods to reopen everything, make your change, then lock again on the latest month you consider final.
Will closing a month change my reports or exports?
No. Closing prevents changes; your reports and exports will reflect stable totals for locked periods.
What does the “Editing transactions from a Closed Period” warning mean?
You’re about to change something that affects a closed month’s balances. Proceed only if you intend to update historical numbers. Otherwise, cancel or reopen the period, make changes, and close it again.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Exporting Data from the Ledger
The Ledger gives you flexible export options so you can review your data, share it with your accountant, or prep for audits and lenders.
***
### Export Options
From the **Ledger** tab, click the **menu** in the top-right corner.
You’ll see three options:
* **Download CSV -** Export a **.csv file** of the transactions in the ledger for the selected date range.
* **Export CSV to Vault -** Send the filtered CSV **directly to the Vault** in Digits.
* **Download Financial Package -** Export a **full financial package** that includes:
* Ledger
* Trial Balance
* Profit & Loss
* Balance Sheet
* Cash Flow
* AR Aging
* AP Aging
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I export my Chart of Accounts?
Yes. You can export it from **Categories** (not from the ledger export menu):
1. Open **Categories**.
2. Click the **⋯ menu** in the top-right.
3. Choose **Download CSV** to save it to your computer, or **Export CSV to Vault** to save it to your Vault.
The file uses the same format as Digits' Chart of Accounts import template, so you can make changes in a spreadsheet and import them back into Digits without reformatting.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Reconciliation Dashboard
The Reconciliation Dashboard gives you a quick view of your progress each month — including what’s started, what’s pending, and which reconciliations are finalized.
***
### How to Access Reconciliations
1. In the left navigation, click **Accounting**.
2. Select **Reconciliations.**
### Reconciliation Overview
At the top of the screen, you’ll see summary tiles for:
* No Activity
* Not Started
* Drafts
* Finalized
Use the **← / → arrows** beside the month name to navigate between periods. The summary tiles update automatically, and you can **click any tile** to filter the list based on status.
***
### Account List
Below the summary cards, you’ll see a list of all accounts organized by category:
* Assets (e.g., Bank Accounts, Checking, Savings)
* Liabilities (e.g., Credit Cards, Ramp Card, Mercury Card)
Element
Description
Account Name + Number
The name and last four digits of the account (e.g., Mercury Checking 1231).
Timeline
Displays each month in sequence. Filled or colored icons indicate reconciliation activity for that period.
Month Status Icons
• Empty circle – No reconciliation created
• Circle with Pencil – Manually created draft • Green/black sparkle icon - AI-created draft • Yellow Exclamation icon – Reopened (manually or automatically due to a balance mismatch)
• Green Checkmark – AI drafted and/or finalized reconciliation • Purple checkmark – Finalized manually started reconciliation • No icon – Reconciliation spans multiple months
Action Button (right-hand side)
Shows the current action available for that period:
• Add Statement — Upload or start a new reconciliation.
• Finalize — Reconciliation is ready to finalize.
• Finalize Again — Re-finalize if changes were made.
✨ Digits will automatically reopen a reconciliation (and any following months) if the statement balance no longer matches the ledger balance.
***
### Sorting the Reconciliation List
Click the **Sort icon** in the top-right corner of the Reconciliations dashboard to open sorting options.
You can sort accounts by **category name**, **category number,** **category subtype,** or **last reconciliation** to quickly find what you need.
***
### Download Reconciliations
To download a reconciliation, click the menu in the top right of the page, then select **Download PDF**.
***
### Key Actions
* **Add Statemen**t → Upload a statement and :sparkles: Digits will automatically begin reconciling — no manual setup needed.
* **Finalize Again** → Reopen a previously finalized month if adjustments are needed.
* **New Reconciliation** → Start a manual reconciliation for an account with no activity.
***
### Hover for Quick Insights
Hover over any **month icon** on an account timeline to see a quick activity summary — such as when a statement was uploaded or when an **auto-reconciliation started**.
If **multiple reconciliations** occurred in the same month, **dots will stack vertically** to represent each event. Hover over the stack to view the full list.
{% hint style="info" icon="calendar-days" %}
Can't find a reconciliation? Check the month containing the statement's **end date**. Even if a statement starts in one month and ends in the next, it appears under the month where the statement ends. For example, a **May 4–June 4** statement is shown under **June**.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why is a previously finalized month showing a yellow exclamation icon?
Digits automatically reopens a reconciliation (and any subsequent months) if transactions have been edited in a way that affects the reconciliation.
Once you’ve reviewed and re-finalized the period, the icon will return to a checkmark.
Can I change the order of accounts on the dashboard?
Yes. Click the Sort icon in the top-right corner to organize by name, type, or reconciliation status.
Can I filter by reconciliation status?
Yes. Click any of the summary tiles (No Activity, Not Started, Drafts, Finalized) to filter the account list by that status.
What does “Finalize Again” mean?
“Finalize Again” appears when a previously finalized month has been reopened — for example, if a balance changed or transactions were edited after finalization.
Can I hover over a stacked set of dots?
Yes! Stacked dots represent multiple reconciliation events for the same month (e.g., a statement upload and an auto-reconciliation start). Hover to see a summary of all related actions.
Why can't I find my reconciliation for a statement that spans two months?
Reconciliations are organized by the **statement end date**, not the start date.
For example, a statement covering **May 4–June 4** appears under **June**, because the statement ends in June.
If you're looking for a reconciliation, check the month containing the statement's end date. You can also open the reconciliation or uploaded statement to confirm the full statement period.
Why does Digits say "Resolve prior period" when I try to reconcile?
Reconciliations must be finalized in order, oldest first. This message means an earlier period still has an open (unfinalized) reconciliation, so you can't finalize — or keep editing — the current one until that earlier period is done. It also appears if a period you'd already finalized was reopened.
Why doesn't my bank or credit card account appear in Reconciliations?
Only bank and credit card categories with the correct subtype appear in Reconciliations.
In Category Manager, make sure the account is set up with the appropriate subtype:
* Bank accounts should use a Bank subtype.
* Credit card accounts should use the Credit Cards subtype under Liabilities.
For example, if a Ramp, Brex, or American Express card is categorized as Other Current Liabilities instead of Credit Cards, it won't appear in Reconciliations.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Using AI Bank Reconciliations in Digits
Digits continuously compares your bank statements to your ledger, flags anything that needs review, and lets you finalize reconciliations in a few clicks.
***
### Overview
Digits uses AI to reconcile bank and credit card accounts **continuously**, not just at month-end.
Instead of manually matching transactions or maintaining reconciliation rules, Digits automatically compares **bank feeds, uploaded statement PDFs, and ledger activity** to keep accounts tied out inthe background. When everything lines up, reconciliation is completed automatically. When something doesn’t, Digits surfaces a small number of clear exceptions for review.
**The result:** faster closes, fewer surprises, and reconciliations that feel like review, not busywork.
{% embed url="" %}
***
### How to Use AI Bank Reconciliations
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Step 1: Upload a Statement
You can upload your bank or credit-card statement in two ways within Digits: from **Reconciliations** or from **Vault**.
**Option 1: Upload from Reconciliations**
1. Go to **Accounting → Reconciliations**.
2. You’ll see all your accounts listed (for example, *Mercury Checking or Ramp Card*).
You have several ways to upload your statement here:
To upload without matching it to a specific account
* Drag and drop your statement PDF into any white or open space on the Reconciliations screen.
* Digits will automatically detect the correct account and match it in the background.
**To upload directly to a specific account**
* Drop the file onto that account’s row (e.g., *Mercury Credit Card 1234*)
* Click the month you’re reconciling and choose Add Statement from the dropdown
* Click Add Statement on the right-hand side of the account row
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** This method is a bit faster since Digits can skip the account-matching step.\
**Only use it if you’re confident about which account the statement belongs to.**
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** If you drop a statement onto the wrong account, Digits will still process it and likely surface many Missing flags. Use Bulk actions to clean up or delete any incorrect transactions.
{% endhint %}
**Option 2: Upload from Vault**
1. From the left navigation menu, click **Vault**.
2. Upload your statement PDF.
3. Digits will automatically reconcile it once it’s linked to the right account.
**Automatic Sync Between Reconciliations and Vault**
* Any statement uploaded in Reconciliations is also added to Vault.
* Likewise, any statement added in Vault is automatically matched to a reconciliation (when possible).
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 2: Let Digits Auto-Match
✨ Digits automatically compares your statement lines to your ledger to create a draft reconciliation.
* Typical time: 2–5 minutes per statement (longer for large files).
* What’s happening: Digits reads the PDF, identifies transactions, and matches them to your ledger.
When complete: You’ll see a green-and-black Draft icon on the month timeline — your draft reconciliation is ready.
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
**Automatic gap-filling for skipped months** If you upload a statement for a month that's later than your last finalized reconciliation, Digits also auto-creates draft reconciliations for the months in between.
***Example:*** *Your books are reconciled through January, and you upload a March statement. Digits will start a draft for February as well, so you don't end up with a gap in your reconciliation history.*
The intermediate drafts use existing ledger activity (and any statements already in Vault). You can review and finalize each draft in order — see Step 3.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 3: Review flagged items
When processing finishes, click the month or the Draft icon to open the reconciliation.
What You’ll See:
Section
Purpose
Left
The uploaded statement with detected lines outlined.
Middle
The ledger transactions for that account.
Right
The Flags panel, which lists any issues or unmatched items.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Hover over any statement line to highlight the matching ledger transaction. Click either side to open the transaction detail.
{% endhint %}
**Flag Types and Recommended Actions**
Flag Type
What it Means
What to Do
Missing transaction
Digits found a line on the statement, but nothing in the ledger.
Click Create to add it to the ledger (single or in bulk). Or dismiss the flag.
Date mismatch
The same transaction exists, but the ledger date falls outside the statement period (e.g., posted 6/1 vs. statement 5/31).
Accept the suggested date correction or dismiss the flag if the date is intentional.
Potential Duplicate
A ledger transaction appears to duplicate what’s on the statement.
Match the two transactions to confirm they're the same entry, delete the duplicate, or dismiss the flag.
Potential Mismatch
Two statement lines were accidentally combined into one ledger item (or vice versa).
Unmatch to resolve the mismatch or dismiss the flag.
***
**Track Your Progress**
* Click the menu on a flag to Create a Transaction, Dismiss, or Mark as Complete.
* Completed flags expand to show changes (e.g., “Date adjusted by \[user]”) with a link to the transaction.
You can also use Bulk actions to clear or create multiple items at once.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Step 4: Finalize the Reconciliation
Before finalizing, confirm that:
* The Unreconciled Difference is $0.
* The ending bank balance matches the ledger balance.
When you're ready, select **Finalize**, then **Confirm** to complete and lock the reconciliation.
That’s it! 🎉
{% hint style="warning" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
Having trouble? You can only finalize a reconciliation once the period before it is finalized — reconciliations finalize in order, so all earlier periods must already be complete. If you reopen an earlier period, finalize it again (and any periods after it) before you can finalize the current one.
{% endhint %}
After you finalize all accounts for the month, **close the month** to lock changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### After Finalization
{% hint style="info" %}
Digits may automatically reopen a finalized reconciliation if transactions in that period are added, removed, or edited. When this happens, you’ll see what changed, and any later periods will be locked until the reconciliation is finalized again.
{% endhint %}
#### Reopen a Reconciliation
You can reopen a finalized reconciliation if you need to make changes. This returns it to Draft so you can update it.
1. Open the finalized reconciliation
2. Click **Reopen** in the top right
3. Click **Reopen** in the prompt to confirm
{% hint style="info" %}
Reopening a period also reopens any subsequent periods for that account. You’ll need to finalize them again.
{% endhint %}
#### Reconfigure a Reconciliation
1. Open the reconciliation (must be in draft)
2. Click **Reconfigure** in the top right
3. Update any of the following:
* Statement Date
* Statement Ending Balance
* Deposits (*optional*)
* Withdrawals (*optional*)
4. Click **Reconfigure** to save
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I upload multiple statements at once?
Yes, in two ways:
* **Multiple files at once:** drag and drop several statement PDFs onto the Reconciliations screen or into Vault. Each file is processed independently.
* **One statement, multiple accounts:** combined statements (e.g., checking + credit card from the same bank) are supported. Digits detects each account in the file and routes the transactions to the matching reconciliation.
**My multi-account statement was rejected. Why?**\
Digits treats a statement as multi-account only if each account has its own complete summary — a beginning and an ending balance. When it does, the category you're reconciling has to match exactly one of those accounts: the account's last four digits (or its final digits, for shorter account numbers) must appear in the category name, and match only one account. If it matches none or more than one, the statement is rejected — fix the category name or your selection rather than splitting the PDF.
What if my statement isn’t supported?
Digits works with any bank or credit card statement; just drop the PDF, PNG, or JPG into Digits. If you drop an unsupported format, you’ll see a message indicating that the format isn’t recognized — you can retry later or re-upload as a different format.
Do I need to create bank rules?
Nope. Digits uses **AI to match transactions automatically** — no setup or rule maintenance required.
What happens if I upload a statement to the wrong account?
If you drop a statement onto the wrong account, Digits assumes that’s intentional and will attempt to reconcile it — but you’ll likely see many “Missing transaction” flags.
We suggest deleting the reconciliation and starting again with the correct account.
If you drop a statement into open space (not a specific account) and Digits detects a mismatch, it will usually warn you or show an “Incorrect statement” error.
How long does it take to auto-match a statement?
Typically 2–5 minutes per statement, depending on file size and transaction count. You’ll see a notification and progress indicator while Digits is processing.
Can I start mid-year or skip months?
Yes. You can start reconciling any month, even if earlier periods aren’t complete.\
Digits will simply flag older unmatched transactions as “Missing”, but won’t block you from finalizing.\
**Note:** When you upload a statement for a later month, Digits will auto-create draft reconciliations for the months in between so your reconciliation history stays continuous. You can leave those drafts unfinalized if you don't intend to reconcile those periods.
What if my reconciliation doesn’t balance?
Digits won’t allow you to finalize until the difference is $0.\
You can resolve this by reviewing flagged items, creating missing transactions, or adjusting dates.
My reconciliation shows a $0.00 difference, but I still can't finalize.
A $0.00 difference is required, but not the only condition. Check, in order:
1. An earlier month for the same account is still in Draft— finalize it first (reconciliations finalize in order).
2. Your entered Deposits/Withdrawals totals don't add up to the statement's balance change.
3. A prior period was reopened— reopening any month reopens all later ones; refinalize in order.
Open flags don't block finalizing by themselves, but an unresolved flag usually leaves a non-zero difference. Resolve it so the difference returns to $0.00.
Where is the Finalize button in reconciliation?
Top-right—and it only becomes clickable when Unreconciled Difference = $0.00. If it’s greyed out, review flagged items until you’re balanced.
Can I undo changes?
You can unmatch, edit, or delete any added transaction before finalizing. There’s no single “undo all” option — once transactions are created, they behave like regular ledger entries.\
If something was reconciled incorrectly, you can reconfigure or delete the reconciliation.
What does Reconfigure do?
Use Reconfigure to make changes to a draft reconciliation.\
This reopens the setup screen where you can adjust:
* Ending date
* Ending balance
* Deposits/withdrawals or charges/payments
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Note:** You can’t change the date if it overlaps with another reconciliation in the same account.
{% endhint %}
What if I need to delete a reconciliation?
Click **Delete** in the top-right menu to remove it entirely. Use this if you started one by mistake or need to redo it from scratch.
What happens after finalization?
Once finalized, a reconciliation is locked and read-only. You can still view details, hover matches, and review the Audit log, but you’ll need to *reconfigure* or *delete* to make edits.
How does Digits handle multiple accounts?
Each account is reconciled separately. Document integration ensures that statements are automatically linked to the correct accounts, enabling faster setup.
What’s shown in the Audit Trail?
The Audit Trail records key reconciliation-level actions, including:
* When a reconciliation is started
* When it’s reconfigured or reopened
* When it’s finalized or deleted
* When a statement is uploaded or linked to a reconciliation
It does not track individual flag resolutions or transaction-level edits — those appear in the Completed Flags section within the reconciliation itself.
This provides a clear, auditable history of all major reconciliation activities for accountants and reviewers.
Can I bulk-create transactions for missing items?
Yes. If many transactions are missing, you can use Bulk actions → Create to add them all at once.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** Once created, they’re live in your ledger and must be edited or deleted manually if incorrect.
{% endhint %}
How do I export reconciliation data as a PDF?
You can export a PDF in two ways: **from a single reconciliation** or **in bulk**.
**Option 1: Export a single reconciliation**
1. Go to the **Reconciliations** page.
2. Click on the month for the reconciliation you want to export.
3. In the pop-up, click **Download PDF**.
**Option 2: Export multiple reconciliations at once**
1. Open the **Reconciliations** page for the month you want to export.
2. In the upper-right corner, click **Download PDF**.
3. Select the time period you want to download, and click **Download**.
Why did Digits create draft reconciliations for months I didn't upload?
When you upload a statement for a later month, Digits automatically creates draft reconciliations for any months between your last finalized reconciliation and the uploaded statement. This prevents gaps in your reconciliation history. Review and finalize each draft in order; if you don't have a statement for one of those months, you can still review the draft against existing ledger activity or upload the missing statement later.
Why wasn't a reconciliation created when I uploaded my statement?
When you upload a statement to the general Reconciliations area, Digits looks for existing ledger transactions that match the statement. If there are no transactions for that statement period (common when you're working only from statements instead of a live connection), Digits can't create the reconciliation automatically.\
To reconcile the statement, either:
* Drop the statement directly onto the correct account.
* Import the statement first, then create the reconciliation manually.
How does Digits match a statement to an account?
If you upload a statement without selecting an account, Digits first looks for matching ledger transactions. If none are found, it uses the last four digits of the account number on the statement to identify a matching account in Digits.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
Including the last four digits in your account name can improve matching accuracy.
{% endhint %}
A statement didn't auto-match — how do I attach it?
Drop the statement file onto the specific account (category), or use "Browse or Drag & Drop" on the reconciliation. This re-uploads the file (you can't pick one already in Vault) and starts a targeted reconciliation. Requires Automated Bank Reconciliations + Vault enabled and permission to create or edit reconciliations.
What does a "failed" reconciliation mean?
A reconciliation itself doesn't fail. Instead, the uploaded statement may fail to process.
If this happens, you'll see an **Invalid Document** message. Common causes include:
* The file is unreadable or corrupted.
* The statement is for the wrong account.
* The statement isn't supported or can't be processed.
To continue, upload a clean statement for a single account. A failed statement doesn't prevent other reconciliations from processing successfully.
Why does a statement show "Invalid Document"?
Digits couldn't read the uploaded file as a bank statement. There's no separate "failed" status and no retry button — re-upload a valid statement (or the correct PDF) to try again.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Creating a Manual Reconciliation
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
**Already have a statement?** Just drag and drop it. :sparkles: Digits will automatically start reconciling for you.
See: [Using AI Bank Reconciliations in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/ai-bank-recs) to learn how it works.
{% endhint %}
Manual reconciliations are an additional option for situations where:
* An account isn’t automatically matched to a statement, or
* You’re setting up historical periods for the first time.
* Accounts that don't have a statement - like Payroll Liabilities
* The reconciling account is not a bank account or credit card — for example, asset or liability categories like loans or equipment financing.
***
**Before You Start**
* **Auto-reconciled transactions**\
Transactions from connected banks are marked as settled by default.
* Manually created or CSV-uploaded transactions must be marked as reconciled within the reconciliation view.
***
### Start a Manual Reconciliation
From the **Reconciliations Dashboard**, you can start a reconciliation in two ways:
1. **Click + Start Reconciliation** at the top of the screen. (*Use this if you don’t see the account listed*)
2. Click a month in the timeline, then select **Start Manually**
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
**Already have a statement?** Just drag and drop it. :sparkles: Digits will automatically start reconciling for you.
See [Using AI Bank Reconciliations in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/ai-bank-recs)to learn how it works.
{% endhint %}
### Start a Manual Reconciliation
From the **Reconciliations Dashboard**, you can start a reconciliation in two ways:
1. Click **Start Reconciliation** at the top of the screen. (*Use this if you don’t see the account listed*)
2. Click a month in the timeline, then select **Start Manually**
Then enter your reconciliation details:
* **Statement Date**
* **Ending Balance**
* (*Optional*) **Deposits/Withdrawals or Charges/Payments** (for liability accounts)
3\. When ready, click **Build Reconciliation**. Digits will generate your reconciliation view.
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
**First-Time Setup**: Digits doesn’t import reconciliations from QBO. To get started, create reconciliations for prior periods. You can reconcile by month or in one bulk action. All pre-cutover QBO transactions are marked as reconciled by default.
{% endhint %}
***
### Reconciling a Category
Once you’ve started a reconciliation, you’ll land on a detailed view like the one below:
#### What You’ll See
* All transactions from the last finalized reconciliation up to your selected end date.
* Unsettled transactions carried forward from earlier periods.
#### Available Features
* Filters for narrowing results by amount, date, or status.
* Checkboxes for bulk or individual reconciliation.
* Counts for reconciled and unsettled transactions.
* Manual Transaction button to add missing entries.
* Status icons show which transactions are complete and which need review.
***
### Bulk Editing Transactions
1. **Select the checkboxes** next to the transactions you want to update — a bulk actions bar appears.
2. **Choose your changes.** You can combine several in one pass:
* **Party** — assign or correct the vendor/customer
* **Category** — recategorize everything selected
* **Department or Location** — tag the selected transactions with a dimension
* **Status** — mark as **Reconciled** or **Unsettled**
* **Comment** — post one comment to all selected transactions
* **Delete** — remove the selected transactions
3. **Click Apply** — the button shows how many transactions you're updating (e.g., **Apply 12**). Nothing changes until you click it, and **Cancel** discards your pending edits.
As you select, a **running total** of the selected amounts is shown — useful for confirming a reconciliation balances before you make changes.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
**Good to know:**
* You can bulk-edit up to **200 transactions at a time**. For more, complete a batch and repeat.
* Transactions in a **closed period** and transactions generated by a **Schedule** can't be bulk-edited. Hover a disabled action to see why.
{% endhint %}
***
### Finalize, Reconfigure, or Delete
In the top right corner, you have the following options:
Action
When to Use It
What It Does
Finalize
When all transactions are matched and the balance is correct.
Locks the period to prevent accidental edits.
Reconfigure
If you need to change a draft reconciliation.
Reopens the setup screen to adjust the ending date, ending balance, or deposits/withdrawals. Note: You can’t change the date if it overlaps with another reconciliation for the same category.
Delete
If the reconciliation was started by mistake or needs to be redone.
Removes the reconciliation completely so you can start fresh.
After you finalize all accounts for the month, **close the month** to lock changes → [Closing & Reopening Periods](/business-agentic-general-ledger/close-date)
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why don’t I see a category listed?
If a bank or credit card isn’t showing, it usually means the account has no activity for the selected period.
Accounts with no transactions and a zero balance appear under No Activity by default.
If you drag and drop a statement onto the Reconciliations screen (not onto a specific account), Digits may not be able to match it to a category because there’s no existing activity to compare it against.
In that case, you can start the reconciliation manually by clicking Start Reconciliation and selecting the correct category.
Why can’t I finalize my reconciliation?
Digits only allows finalization when everything balances to $0.00.\
If the Finalize button is still greyed out, check for:
* A remaining net difference in the reconciliation amount
* A prior period that hasn’t been finalized yet
* Or any unresolved flags from a statement you uploaded
Flags may appear if transactions need review or correction before Digits can finalize.
Why are some transactions missing?
Make sure the transactions exist in your Ledger and fall within the reconciliation’s date range.
If they were uploaded separately or imported from a CSV file, confirm they include valid transaction dates.
Why am I seeing too many transactions?
Also note that unsettled transactions from earlier reconciliations automatically carry forward into the current one until they’re matched or finalized.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Categories (Chart of Accounts)
Categories is your smart chart of accounts, where you set up and organize categories to track income, expenses, assets, and more so your business finances stay clear and easy to review anytime.
***
### What are Categories in Digits?
The **Categories** (your Chart of Accounts) organize every account, category, and connection in Digits.\
From here, you can:
* Create and edit categories
* Import or bulk update accounts
* Add subcategories for detailed reporting
* Review which categories are linked to synced banks or tools
***
### How to Access Categories
From your home dashboard:
1. Click **Accounting** in the left-hand menu.
2. Select **Categories**
***
### Creating a New Category
1. Click **+ New Category** in the top right corner.
2. Fill in the details:
* Name
* Parent Category (e.g., Assets, Revenue)
* Subtype
* Icon (optional)
* Category Number (optional)
* Description (optional)
3. Click **Create**.
***
### Editing or Deactivating a Category
To edit a category:
1. Hover over any category and click the **Edit** icon.
2. Make updates — rename, reassign parent, or change icons/numbers. You can also deactivate the category if it's no longer needed.
3. Click **Save** when done.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** If the category is linked to a connected account (like a bank or app), you must first remap it to another active category before deactivating.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Child Categories
To create a subcategory:
1. Hover over the parent category.
2. Click the **Add Child** icon.
You can add multiple layers of hierarchy — ideal for firms that use detailed reporting structures.
***
### Viewing Connections
If a category is linked to a synced account (like a bank, card, or app), you’ll see a connection icon next to it.
Click the icon → **View Details** → click **Connections** to jump to the main connection page.
{% hint style="info" %}
You can also filter by **Connections** to quickly see how each synced account maps to your chart of accounts.
{% endhint %}
***
### Bulk Importing Categories
If you’re setting up Digits for your business, the fastest way is to import your existing chart of accounts as a CSV during setup, but you can also bulk import or update categories anytime.
**Use bulk import when:**
* You’re restructuring categories
* Your Chart of Accounts needs cleanup or standardization
* You want to make large updates without editing manually
**How to bulk import:**
1. From Categories, click the down arrow next to **+ New Category** → **Import Categories.**
2. Download the CSV template.
3. Add your data (names, types, optional parents).
4. Upload and click **Next.**
5. Review column mappings.
6. Click **Submit** to complete the upload.
See also: [Import Your Chart of Accounts](/business-agentic-general-ledger/import-coa)
***
### How to Export Your Chart of Accounts from Categories
1. In the left navigation menu, go to **Accounting** → **Categories**.
2. Click the **menu** in the top right corner, next to New Category.
3. Select either **Download CSV** or **Export CSV to Vault**.
{% hint style="success" %}
The export matches the import template, so you can make changes in a spreadsheet and import them back into Digits without any reformatting.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I deactivate a category that’s linked to a connection?
Only after remapping. Move the connection to another active category first, then deactivate.
What happens if I import duplicate categories?
Digits will alert you before submission and ask which to keep or merge.
Can I use the same category name more than once?
Yes — as long as it’s under a different parent category.\
For example, you can have a child category called **“Gas”** under both **“Plane”** and **“Boat.”**\
Digits prevents duplicates only within the same parent, not across the entire Chart of Accounts.
Why isn't a category showing up when I create a transaction?
If a category doesn't appear when creating a journal entry or transaction, it may not exist in your Chart of Accounts yet. If you're using a custom Chart of Accounts, add any missing categories manually in Categories under the correct parent. If you're using the Digits template Chart of Accounts, some categories may be inactive by default — check the inactive list and enable them. Once a category is active, it's available everywhere in the Ledger.
Do you have a list of the complete gifted COA?
Yes! Below is the full list. Keep in mind that while this is the full list, Digits will only show categories that have been used for a transaction.
Number
Category
10000
Assets
11000
Bank Accounts
11500
Asset Clearing
11510
Invoice Clearing
11520
Digits - Invoice Clearing
12000
Accounts Receivable
12010
Accounts Receivable - Gross
12020
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
12500
Accrued Revenue
13000
Prepaid Expenses
13010
Prepaid Benefits
13020
Prepaid Rent
13030
Prepaid Insurance
13040
Other Prepaid Expenses
13500
Inventory
13510
Raw Materials
13520
Work in Progress
13530
Finished Goods
14000
Investments
14500
Shareholder Loans
15000
Other Current Assets
15010
Security Deposits
15020
Current Tax Assets
15030
Other Current Assets
15999
Uncategorized Assets
16000
Fixed Assets
16100
Computer Assets
16150
Accumulated Depreciation - Computer Assets
16200
Furniture & Fixtures
16250
Accumulated Depreciation - Furniture & Fixtures
16300
Other Fixed Assets
16350
Accumulated Depreciation - Other Fixed Assets
17000
Intangible Assets
17100
Domain Names
17150
Accumulated Amortization - Domain Names
17200
Patents & Trademarks
17250
Accumulated Amortization - Patents & Trademarks
17300
Research & Development
17350
Accumulated Amortization - Research & Development
17400
Leasehold Improvements
17450
Accumulated Amortization - Leasehold Improvements
17500
Other Intangible Assets
17550
Accumulated Amortization - Other Intangible Assets
18000
Goodwill
19999
Other Long-term Assets
20000
Liabilities
21000
Accounts Payable
22000
Credit Cards
23000
Liability Clearing
23100
Employee Reimbursements Clearing
23200
Payroll Clearing
23300
Bill Pay Clearing
23400
Digits - Bill Pay Clearing
24000
Accrued Expenses
24500
Deferred Revenue
25000
Other Current Liabilities
25010
Benefits Payable
25020
Income Taxes Payable
25030
Sales Tax Payable
25040
Payroll Tax Payable
25050
Payroll Deductions Liability
25060
Uncategorized Liabilities
25500
Short-term Debt
26000
Convertible Notes
26100
Convertible Notes - Principal
26200
Convertible Notes - Accrued Interest
27000
Long-term Debt
28000
Other Long-term Liabilities
30000
Equity
31000
Common Stock
32000
Preferred Stock
33000
SAFE
34000
Owner's Equity
34100
Owner's Contributions
34200
Owner's Draws
35000
Treasury Stock
36000
Additional Paid In Capital
37000
Other Comprehensive Income
38000
Retained Earnings
39999
Uncategorized Equity
40000
Revenue
41000
Sales Revenue
42000
Subscription Revenue
43000
Transaction Revenue
44000
Partner Revenue
45000
Refunds and Discounts
49999
Uncategorized Income
50000
Cost of Revenue
51000
Cost of Labor
52000
Cost of Goods
53000
Payment Processing Fees
54000
Hosting Fees
55000
Other Cost of Revenue
60000
Operating Expenses
61000
Payroll Expenses
61100
Salaries
61200
Bonuses
61300
Commissions
61400
Employee Benefits
61410
Health Insurance
61420
Retirement Contributions
61500
Employer Payroll Taxes
61600
Payroll Processing Fees
61700
Recruiting Costs
61800
Other Employee Costs
62000
Travel & Entertainment
62100
Airfare
62200
Ground Transportation
62300
Lodging
62400
Meals
62500
Entertainment
62600
Other Travel & Entertainment
63000
Professional Fees
63100
Consultants and Contractors
63200
Legal
63300
Tax & Accounting
63400
Other Professional Fees
64000
Sales and Marketing
64100
Advertising
64200
Conference and Trade Shows
64300
Promotional Items and Gifts
64400
Other Sales & Marketing
65000
Business Applications & Software
66000
Facilities
66100
Rent
66200
Utilities
66300
Repairs and Maintenance
66400
Other Facilities Expenses
67000
Supplies & Materials
67100
Computers Expense
67200
Office Supplies
67300
Other Supplies & Materials
68000
General Operations
68100
Memberships & Dues
68200
Insurance
68300
Bank Fees
68400
Other General Operations
69000
Bad Debt Expense
69999
Uncategorized Expense
80000
Other Income
81000
Interest and Dividends
82000
Credit Card Rewards
83000
Other Miscellaneous Income
90000
Other Expenses
91000
Depreciation & Amortization
91100
Fixed Assets Depreciation
91200
Intangibles Amortization
93000
Interest Expense
94000
Taxes
95000
Other Miscellaneous Expenses
Can I change a category's type (for example, from Asset to Liability)?
No. A category's type (Asset, Liability, Equity, Income, or Expense) is set when the category is created and can't be changed later. When you edit a category, you can update its name, parent, subtype, number, icon, and description — but not its type. This commonly comes up after importing a chart of accounts (for example, a credit card that imported as an Asset but should be a Liability).\
To move an account to a different type, create a replacement of the correct type and move its activity over:
1. Create a new category with the correct type. In Categories add a new category and choose a parent that's under the correct type(e.g., a Liability parent for a credit card). The new category takes its parent's type.
2. Move the transactions. In the transaction list, select the transactions booked to the old category and useMove toto reassign them to the new category. You can move up to200 transactions at a time, so large accounts may take a few passes.
3. Deactivate the old category. Open the old category and click Deactivate Category.
How do I set up an accumulated depreciation account?
Digits doesn't have a dedicated **Accumulated Depreciation** subtype. Because child categories inherit the subtype of their parent account, create your accumulated depreciation category under the appropriate fixed asset account using the **Fixed Asset** subtype.
You can name the category **Accumulated Depreciation** so it appears correctly in your chart of accounts. The **Fixed Asset** subtype is used only behind the scenes to support the account structure.
Can I export my Chart of Accounts?
Yes. You can export it from **Categories** (not from the ledger export menu):
1. Open **Categories**.
2. Click the **⋯ menu** in the top-right.
3. Choose **Download CSV** to save it to your computer, or **Export CSV to Vault** to save it to your Vault.
The file uses the same format as Digits' Chart of Accounts import template, so you can make changes in a spreadsheet and import them back into Digits without reformatting.
Does Digits track inventory items?
Not yet. Digits helps you account for inventory, but it doesn't track item-level quantities or stock on hand.\
Use your Inventory, Raw Materials, Work in Progress, and Finished Goods categories to record inventory purchases and adjustments. The [Products & Services Catalog](/business-bills-and-invoices/products-and-services-catalog) is designed to speed up invoicing by saving reusable items—it isn't an inventory management system.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Import Your Chart of Accounts
Import your Chart of Accounts into Digits using a CSV file.
***
### When to Use a CSV Import
If your books were previously managed outside of Digits, for example, in Xero, Puzzle, or a custom spreadsheet, you can import your Chart of Accounts (COA) manually using a CSV file.
{% hint style="danger" icon="triangle-exclamation" %}
A CSV import brings in your **categories only** (your chart of accounts). It **does not** import transactions or opening balances.
You can add opening balances later by importing or manually creating **journal entries** in the Ledger.
{% endhint %}
***
### How to Upload a Chart of Accounts via CSV
You can upload your chart of accounts (categories) by CSV either when you first sign up, or when you add another business later.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### New to Digits or Adding Another Business?
#### Option 1: You’re New to Digits
1. Go to [digits.com/join/business](https://my.digits.com/join/business) and enter your email to create your account.
2. Follow the prompts until you’re asked how you want to set up your accounting categories.
3. Choose **Get started fresh** or **Migrate from another platform** (anything **except QuickBooks**, since QBO brings its own chart of accounts).
4. On the **Choose your accounting categories** screen, select **Manual Upload** and click **Next**.
5. Complete your **company profile** and click **Next**.
6. Click **Download Template**.
#### Option 2: You’re Adding a Second Business
1. From your Digits **dashboard**, click your business name in the top-left.
2. Click **+ Add Business**.
3. Follow the same steps as above:
* Choose **Start Fresh** or **Migrate from another platform** (not QuickBooks).
* On **Choose your accounting categories**, select **Manual Upload** and click **Next**.
* Complete your company profile, click **Next**, then click **Download Template**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Fill Out and Upload Your CSV
In the downloaded template, fill in these fields for each category:
* **Category Name**
* **Category Number** (optional, only if you use one)
* **Category Type** (Income, Expense, Asset, etc.)
Then:
1. Save your completed CSV.
2. Back in Digits, click **Upload CSV**.
3. Review the **preview** screen.
4. If everything looks correct, click **Submit** to import your chart of accounts.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Filling Out the Template CSV
Column
What to Enter
Tips & Examples
Category Name
The account or category name.
Any text. This field can’t be blank. Avoid using commas or extra spaces. ✅ Example: Prepayments
Category Number
An optional account number.
Use your firm’s standard numbering system (if applicable). ✅ Example: 11110
Parent Name
Indicates if a category should be nested under another in the Categories (your chart of accounts). • Use only for subcategories. • Leave blank for top-level categories like Assets, Liabilities, or Revenue.
This field is optional, but if used, keep in mind: • First-time uploads: The parent must appear in Column 1 (Category Name). Placement in the file doesn’t matter. • Use the exact name of the parent as listed in Column 1. • If the parent already exists in Digits, don’t include it again — doing so may trigger a duplicate name error. ✅ Example:
Type
The category’s financial type.
Must match one of the following exactly: Bank, Credit Card, Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Revenue, Cost of Revenue, Operating Expenses, Other Income, or Other Expenses. ✅ Example: Assets
Status
Active or inactive.
Optional — defaults to Active if left blank. ✅ Example: Active
Description
Optional short description.
Helps your team understand the purpose of the category. ✅ Example: Monthly rent and utilities
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tips:**
* Expand **Row 2** in the template for built-in instructions.
* Remove all blank lines before uploading.
* Ensure **Category Type** matches one of Digits’ accepted types: *Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Revenue, Cost of Revenue, Operating Expenses, Other Income, or Other Expenses.*
{% endhint %}
***
### Review and Adjust Categories After Import
Once your import is complete:
1. From your **Dashboard**, go to **Accounting → Category Manager**.
2. Review all categories for accuracy and completeness.
3. **Reorganize, rename, or deactivate** categories to match how you want to see your books.
4. Add **subcategories** for better organization and reporting.
For more details, see [Categories (Chart of Accounts)](/business-agentic-general-ledger/category-manager)
***
### Already Set Up in Digits? Bulk Import Later
The steps above are for importing your chart of accounts during **initial setup**.
If your business is **already set up** in Digits and you want to:
* Upload new categories in bulk, or
* Restructure and update existing categories, use **Bulk Importing Categories** directly from **Category Manager** instead.
See: [Bulk Importing Categories](/business-agentic-general-ledger/category-manager#bulk-importing-categories)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Do I have to use the Digits CSV template?
Yes. All uploads must follow the official **Digits CSV template** to ensure proper formatting and field recognition.
How should I handle parent and child categories?
* Ensure parent categories are added as a separate row in the CSV file or already exist in your chart of accounts in Digits (i.e., if this is not a first-time category upload) and are correctly named.
* Ensure to leave this field blank if the parent is one of the following top-level categories: Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Revenue, Cost of Revenue, Operating Expenses, Other Income, Other Expenses
What formatting rules should I follow?
* Keep the **header row** intact — do not rename or delete it.
* Expand **Row 2** in the template for built-in field instructions.
* Remove any blank lines at the end of your file before uploading.
* Save the file in **.csv** format before uploading.
Why am I seeing the error "Category names exist on inactive categories" when importing my chart of accounts?
This error means a category in your import has the same name or account number as an existing inactive category in Digits. Even though the category is inactive, it still can't be duplicated.
To resolve the error:
1. Open Categories.
2. Filter to show Inactive categories.
3. Either:
* Reactivate and reuse the matching category, or
* Rename or remove the conflicting category in your CSV.
4. Import your chart of accounts again.
Is the AI-generated Chart of Accounts GAAP compliant?
Digits’ auto-generated COA is GAAP-aligned in structure, but GAAP compliance depends on how entries are recorded (depreciation, accruals, adjusting entries).\
If you have a preferred GAAP template (by industry/firm standard), you can import your own COA via CSV.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Departments
Departments allow you to segment your books to track performance across teams, service lines, or business units.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Step 1: Set up your Departments
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Departments** in the left-hand menu.
2. Click **Add Department** to create one manually.
3. (Optional) If the account is connected to QuickBooks Online (QBO), click **Import Departments** to bring in your existing structure.
4. Organize departments into a hierarchy as needed — *for example: Sales **→** East Coast.*
{% hint style="warning" %}
You won’t see the import option unless your firm is connected to QBO.
{% endhint %}
To make changes, hover over a department name to:
* Click the **Pencil** to rename or modify the department.
* Click the **Hierarchy** icon to add a child department.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 2: Tag transactions with a Department
Once your departments are set up, you can start tagging transactions.
**To tag one transaction:**
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger**.
2. Click into a transaction.
3. Click **Edit** at the top of the screen.
4. Use the **Department** field to assign a tag.
**To tag one or more transactions at once (Bulk Tagging):**
1. From the **Ledger**, click **Edit** at the top.
2. Check the boxes next to the transactions you want to tag.
3. Click the **Department** icon in the toolbar at the top.
4. Select the **department** from the dropdown.
5. Click **Apply** to save your changes.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Unsure about the right department?** You can leave a comment or question on any transaction to confirm with a teammate, accountant, or client.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 3: Report by Department
After transactions are tagged, you can view department-level reporting.
**To view Profit & Loss by Department:**
1. Go to **Custom Reports** → **Profit & Loss.**
2. Click the **Options** at the top of the report.
3. In the Options panel, find **Drill down by**.
4. Open the dropdown and choose **Department**.
5. Under **Multiple**, select the departments you want to include—or choose **all**.
6. (Optional) Use:
* **Hide Other Departments** to show only the departments you selected
* **Hide Unassigned Departments** to exclude anything not tied to a department
This lets you break down your Profit & Loss by department so you can compare revenue and expenses across teams.
**You can also add department-specific widgets to Reports:**
1. Go to any **Custom Report** (like Executive Summary).
2. Click **Options** at the top of the report.
3. Select the **Department** tab in the **Add Graphs** panel.
4. Choose from available department-based graphs — including category-level breakdowns.
5. Add your desired widget(s), then click **Done**.
**To add department charts to your Dashboard:**
1. Go to **Home.**
2. Click **Edit** in the top-right corner.
3. Click the **Department** icon in the chart selector panel.
4. You’ll see available charts for each department.
5. Drag and drop the ones you want onto your dashboard.
6. Click **Done** to save your changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### **Frequently Asked Questions**
Can I import transactions with Departments and Locations?
**Yes!** You can import transactions with **Departments** and/or **Locations**. Here’s how it works, depending on how you import:
#### CSV import
If you use the Digits CSV template, include a **Department** and/or **Location** column.
* **If the Department/Location already exists in Digits:** Digits applies it during import.
* **If it doesn’t exist:** Digits creates a **new Department or Location** in your **Dimensions** list and tags the transaction.
* **If Digits can’t create or apply it:** The transaction imports **without a tag** (and it won’t go to the Checklist). No stress — you can tag it later in the Ledger, either one at a time or in bulk.
#### Statement import (PDF/PNG/JPG/JPEG)
Transactions imported from a bank statement also go through Digits’ AI categorization flow.
* If Digits has seen **past Department/Location patterns** on similar transactions, it will try to apply them during import.
* If Digits can’t create or apply a dimension, the transaction imports **without a tag** (and it won’t go to the Checklist). You can tag it later in the Ledger — individually or with bulk edit.
Can I report by both Location and Department at the same time?
Not yet. Today, you can drill down by either Location *or* Department per report. Multi-dimensional P\&Ls (using both) are on the roadmap.
Will departments import automatically from QuickBooks Online, or do I have to create them manually?
If your Digits account is connected to QBO, you can import Locations just as you can import Departments. Digits can pull from QBO’s Location or Line Class fields, depending on how your file is set up. You can also choose to skip import and build your Locations structure manually in Digits.
Will Departments/Locations sync automatically from connected tools like Ramp or Gusto?
**Ramp:** No — Departments/Locations do **not** sync from Ramp into Digits automatically.\
**Gusto:** **Departments do sync from Gusto** (Departments only — **not** Locations).
Can I view Departments and Locations on Balance Sheet reports?
Not yet. Department and Location breakdowns are currently available on Profit & Loss reports only.
Can I rename the Departments dimension to "Projects"?
No. The dimension names (Departments and Locations) are fixed. You can name the individual entries inside a dimension anything you like, but you can't relabel the dimension itself.
Why don't I see Departments?
Departments are available on select plans (part of Digits' Dimensions feature, along with Locations). If you don't see Departments, Dimensions isn't included in your current plan. To add it, upgrade your plan — see [Upgrade or downgrade your business plan](https://help.digits.com/my-business-account/upgrade-downgrade-your-business-plan). For the plans that include Dimensions, see [Digits pricing](https://digits.com/pricing).
*If Dimensions is included but you don't see any departments yet, you may just need to create them first.*
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Locations
Locations allow you to segment your books by geography, region, or site so you can track performance across different places your business operates.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Step 1: Set up your Locations
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Locations** in the left-hand menu.
2. Click **New Location** to create one manually.
If your firm is connected to **QuickBooks Online (QBO)**, you can also import your existing structure:
3. Click **Import Locations** to bring in locations from QBO’s **Line Class** or **Location** fields.
{% hint style="warning" %}
In QBO, “Location” may appear under a custom name (for example: *Territory*, *Region*, or *Department*).
You won’t see the **Import Locations** option unless your firm is connected to QBO.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 2: Organize Your Locations
You can organize locations into a hierarchy as needed (for example, California → San Francisco).
To make changes, hover over a location name to:
1. Click the **Pencil** to rename or modify the location.
2. Click the **Hierarchy** icon to add a child location.
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Note**: Editing is not available for locations imported from QBO.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 3: Tag transactions with a Location
Once your locations are set up, you can start tagging transactions.
**To tag one transaction:**
1. Go to **Accounting** **→** **Ledger**.
2. Click into a transaction.
3. Click **Edit** at the top of the screen.
4. Use the **Location** field to assign a tag.
**To tag one or more transactions at once (Bulk Tagging):**
1. From the **Ledger**, click **Edit** at the top.
2. Check the boxes next to the transactions you want to tag.
3. Click the **Location** icon in the toolbar at the top.
4. Select the location from the dropdown.
5. Click **Apply** to save your changes.
**Tag directly inside Checklist action items:**
When reviewing a transaction from your **Checklist**, you’ll see **Location (and Department) dropdowns** right next to the Category field.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
✨ Once you've set up Locations, Digits will auto-assign Locations to transactions based on learned patterns. Anything Digits isn't sure about is surfaced in the **Checklist** for review, so you stay in control.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Unsure about the right location? You can leave a comment or question on any transaction to confirm with a teammate or accountant.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 4: Report by Location
After transactions are tagged, you can view location-level reporting.
**To view Profit & Loss by Location:**
1. Go to **Custom Reports → Profit & Loss**.
2. Click the **Options icon** at the top of the report.
3. Click the dropdown next to **Drill down by** and select **Location**.
This lets you filter and break down P\&L reports to compare revenue and expenses across locations.
**You can also add location-specific widgets to Reports:**
1. Go to any **Custom Report** (like Executive Summary).
2. Click **Add** at the top of the report.
3. Select the **Hierarchy** tab in the **Add Graphs** panel.
4. Choose from available location-based graphs.
5. Add your desired widget(s), then click **Done**.
**To add location charts to your Custom Dashboard:**
1. From **Home**, click **Edit** in the top-right corner.
2. Click the **Hierarchy** icon in the chart selector panel.
3. You’ll see available charts for each location.
4. **Drag and drop** the ones you want onto your dashboard.
5. Click **Done** to save your changes.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Location charts currently use **transaction data for Expenses and Income.**
You *can* still tag other transaction types (like **Assets or Liabilities**) with a Location for filtering and review, but these will **not** appear in Location dashboard charts or balance-sheet drill-downs yet.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I import transactions with Departments and Locations?
**Yes!** You can import transactions with **Departments** and/or **Locations**. Here’s how it works, depending on how you import:
#### CSV import
If you use the Digits CSV template, include a **Department** and/or **Location** column.
* **If the Department/Location already exists in Digits,** Digits applies it during import.
* **If it doesn’t exist:** Digits creates a **new Department or Location** in your **Dimensions** list and tags the transaction.
* **If Digits can’t create or apply it:** The transaction imports **without a tag** (and it won’t go to the Checklist). No stress — you can tag it later in the Ledger, either one at a time or in bulk.
#### Statement import (PDF/PNG/JPG/JPEG)
Transactions imported from a bank statement also go through Digits’ AI categorization flow.
* If Digits has seen **past Department/Location patterns** on similar transactions, it will try to apply them during import.
* If Digits can’t create or apply a dimension, the transaction imports **without a tag** (and it won’t go to the Checklist). You can tag it later in the Ledger — individually or with bulk edit.
Can I report by both Location and Department at the same time?
Not yet. Today, you can drill down by either Location *or* Department per report. Multi-dimensional P\&Ls (using both) are on the roadmap.
Will Locations import automatically from QuickBooks Online, or do I have to create them manually?
If your Digits account is connected to QBO, you can import Locations just like Departments. Digits can pull from QBO’s **Location** or **Line Class** fields, depending on how your file is set up. You can also choose to skip import and build your Locations structure manually in Digits.
Can I view Departments and Locations on Balance Sheet reports?
Not yet. Department and Location breakdowns are currently available only in Profit & Loss reports.
Will Departments/Locations sync automatically from connected tools like Ramp or Gusto?
**Ramp:** No — Departments/Locations do **not** sync from Ramp into Digits automatically.\
**Gusto:** **Departments do sync from Gusto** (Departments only — **not** Locations).
Why don't I dont see locations?
Locations are available on select plans (part of Digits' Dimensions feature, along with Departments). If you don't see Locations, Dimensions isn't included in your current plan. To add it, upgrade your plan — see [Upgrade or downgrade your business plan](https://help.digits.com/my-business-account/upgrade-downgrade-your-business-plan). For the plans that include Dimensions, see [Digits pricing](https://digits.com/pricing).
*If Dimensions is included but you don't see any locations yet, you may just need to create them first.*
Is there a limit on how many Locations I can create?
No. There's no fixed limit on the number of Locations you can create or how many levels you can nest.
For reporting, you can compare up to six Locations at a time side by side on a Profit & Loss report. To compare additional Locations, run another report. This reporting limit doesn't affect how many Locations you can create or use.
If I report on a parent Location, does it include its child Locations?
Yes. When you filter or drill into a report by a parent Location, Digits automatically includes everything assigned to its child Locations.
For example, with a hierarchy of Market → Property → Unit, a P\&L filtered to a Market includes transactions assigned directly to that Market, plus everything assigned to its Properties and their Units.
Filtering to a single Property or Unit narrows the report to that branch only.\
Assign transactions at the most specific level that makes sense, usually at the Unit or Property level. Parent-level reports automatically roll those amounts up.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Schedules
Digits Schedules automates depreciation and amortization for fixed assets and prepaid expenses, detecting transactions, generating journal entries, and keeping your books current automatically.
***
### What Types of Schedules Does Digits Support?
Digits currently supports two schedule types:
* **Fixed Assets** – For tangible assets like computer equipment, machinery, and furniture that are depreciated over their useful life.
* **Prepaid Expenses** – For costs paid upfront but recognized over a future period, such as annual software subscriptions, insurance premiums, and prepaid rent.
***
### How to Find Schedules
There are two ways to access Schedules in Digits:
1. From the left navigation menu, click **Accounting** → **Schedules**.
2. Individual ledger transaction → **Create Schedule** – If a transaction is in an eligible balance sheet category, a **Create Schedule** option will appear directly on the line item.
***
### Automatic Schedule Detection
:sparkles: Digits automatically identifies transactions that may need a fixed asset or prepaid expense schedule and adds them to your [Checklist](/business-home/checklist) for review.
Each action item includes:
* The detected schedule type, such as **Fixed Asset** or **Prepaid Expense**
* A brief explanation of why the transaction was flagged
Click the action item to start creating the schedule. Digits will pre-fill the suggested category, but you can update it before finalizing.
After you create the schedule, any related [Automated Quality Control](/business-home/automated-quality-control) items associated with that transaction are automatically resolved.
**Detection thresholds:**
Schedule Type
Default Threshold
Fixed Asset
$2,500
Prepaid Expense
$500
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
For prepaid expenses, Digits also considers the transaction category. High-confidence categories, like software, insurance, and rent, are more likely to be flagged. For example, a $500 meal transaction will not be flagged as a prepaid expense.
{% endhint %}
***
### Creating a Schedule
You can create a schedule from three places:
* **Schedules:** Click **Accounting** → **Schedules**, then click **New Schedule**.
* **Close checklist:** Click a schedule detection action item.
* **Ledger:** Open the transaction in your ledger, then click **Create Schedule** on the line item.
#### Complete the Schedule
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Digits will attempt to select the schedule type and asset type, but if you need to change the selection, click the **Pencil** icon to the left.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Review the schedule details. :sparkles: Digits pre-fills fields based on the asset type. For example, computer equipment may default to 60 months, while a software subscription may default to 12 months.
Update any details as needed, such as service date, end date, depreciation category, or salvage value.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click **Create Draft Schedule.** You'll be directed to a draft of your schedule. Adjust if needed.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Once your Schedule is ready, click **Finalize**.
After you finalize, Digits creates the journal entries across the life of the schedule.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Requirement:** A source transaction must already exist in the ledger. Schedules cannot currently be created from contracts or documents alone.
{% endhint %}
***
### Understanding Your Schedule
Once a schedule is active, the detail view gives you full visibility into how it works.
|
Events
Each schedule is made up of a timeline of events:
Instantiating event – Marks the start of the schedule (e.g., "Purchased" or "Prepaid Expense").
A balance chart shows how the asset or prepaid balance declines over the life of the schedule.
|
|
Generated Transactions
All journal entries created by the schedule are listed here, with links to the individual transaction records in your ledger.
|
|
Activity Log
Every change to the schedule is recorded—who edited what and when—giving you a complete audit trail.
|
|
Related Schedules
If multiple schedules share similar traits, they'll appear here for easy cross-referencing.
|
***
### Editing a Schedule
You can edit an active schedule at any time, as long as the period you're modifying hasn't been locked.
* Editable fields include: name, description, dates, event variables (amounts, depreciation method, categories), and term.
* **If a period is locked** (financials are closed), you must unlock that period before making edits that affect it.
1. To edit, click **Schedules** from the left navigation menu.
2. Select a schedule to edit.
3. Enter edit mode at the top of the screen.
4. Make edits, then click **Save and Close**.
***
### Deleting a Schedule
You can delete an active schedule at any time, as long as the period you're modifying hasn't been locked.
* Editable fields include: name, description, dates, event variables (amounts, depreciation method, categories), and term.
* **If a period is locked** (financials are closed), you must unlock that period before making edits that affect it.
1. To edit, click **Schedules** from the left navigation menu.
2. Select a schedule to delete.
3. Click the **Trash Can** icon in the top-right corner of the screen.
4. Confirm that you want to delete the schedule.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What depreciation methods does Digits support?
Digits supports straight-line depreciation for fixed assets in this release. Additional methods may be added in future updates.
Can I create a schedule if the transaction doesn't exist in Digits yet?
No. A source transaction must already be recorded in your ledger. Enter the transaction first, then create the schedule.
Can I delete a schedule?
Yes. Deleting a schedule removes all associated journal entries. This action cannot be undone, so confirm that any affected periods are correct before proceeding.
Does Schedules work for cash-basis companies?
No. Depreciation and amortization schedules are accrual-basis accounting concepts and are not applicable to cash-basis reporting.
What happens when I finalize a schedule?
Digits generates all expected journal entries across the life of the schedule and links them back to the source transaction. The checklist item is marked complete, and the schedule becomes active and visible in your Schedules tab.
Are schedules exportable?
Generated transactions appear in your standard ledger and can be exported alongside your other transaction data.
Who can use Schedules?
Schedules are included with select plans. See
Because schedules are an accrual-basis accounting tool, they are not applicable to cash-basis companies.
Can I create schedules for transactions that are already in my books?
Yes — you can create a schedule from any existing transaction directly in your ledger. However, if you have existing depreciation or amortization entries created manually outside Digits Schedules, there is no way to import them yet. You have two options:
1. Manually recreate those transactions and create schedules from them (deleting the original entries).
2. Wait for the upcoming import feature, which will allow Digits to match existing ledger entries to schedule objects.
Why don't I see Schedules?
Schedules are available on select plans. If you don't see Schedules, it isn't included in your current plan. To add it, upgrade your plan — see [Upgrade or downgrade your business plan](https://help.digits.com/my-business-account/upgrade-downgrade-your-business-plan). For the plans that include Schedules, see [Digits pricing](https://digits.com/pricing).
Schedules is an accrual-basis tool (for depreciation, prepaid amortization, and deferred revenue), so it isn't applicable to cash-basis companies.
How do I stop a depreciation schedule when I dispose of an asset?
If you dispose of a fixed asset before its depreciation schedule ends, add a **Disposal** event to the schedule.
When you add a disposal event, :sparkles: Digits automatically:
* Stops generating depreciation after the disposal date.
* Creates the journal entry to remove the asset and its accumulated depreciation.
* Records any gain or loss on the disposal.
* Records any proceeds from the sale, if applicable.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** If the disposal would change or remove entries in a closed period, you'll need to reopen or resolve the closed period before updating the schedule
{% endhint %}
Does Schedules support MACRS or Section 179 depreciation?
No. **Schedules** calculates **straight-line book depreciation** only. It doesn't support tax depreciation methods such as **MACRS** or **Section 179**.
If you need to record tax-only depreciation, enter those adjustments manually or work with your tax professional to record the appropriate entries.
Why can I see Schedules in the Checklist but can't use them?
Schedules appear in the Checklist for all users, but creating and managing schedules requires a plan that includes the **Schedules** feature.
If you don't have access, you'll see the Checklist item but won't be able to open or use Schedules.
To compare plans and see which ones include Schedules, visit [**digits.com/pricing**](https://digits.com/pricing).
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Cash vs. Accrual in Digits
Digits supports both cash and accrual accounting, so you can track your finances in the way that best fits your business.
***
**What’s the Difference?**
* **Cash accounting**: Income and expenses are recorded when money moves in or out of your account.
* **Accrual accounting**: Income and expenses are tracked when they’re earned or billed—even if the cash hasn’t moved yet.
Not sure which method is right for you? Check out our blog for a quick breakdown: [Cash vs. Accrual Accounting for Startups](https://digits.com/blog/cash-vs-accrual-accounting-startups/)
***
### Accrual-Based Behavior in Digits
Many integrations post on an accrual basis by default:
* **Gusto:** Payroll entries are posted based on the end of the pay period (accrual), not the payment date.
* **Ramp/Bill.com:** Bills are recorded on the invoice date, regardless of when cash is paid.
* **Revenue Recognition:** Prepaid contracts currently require manual journal entries to defer and recognize revenue over time.
* **Digits Pay & Invoicing:** Automatically record entries to the ledger on an accrual basis. Once mappings are set in Settings, it’s truly “set it and forget it”—no manual entries needed.
These behaviors support firms that need audit-ready accrual financials.
***
### When Digits Is Cash-Based
Some integrations always post on a cash basis:
* **Stripe:** Entries are recorded when a cash transaction occurs in the Stripe account. We do not currently recognize Stripe invoicing.
* **Banks & Credit Cards:** Transactions are recorded when cash moves in or out.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
✨ Digits automatically categorizes transactions, but accrual-heavy items (like fixed asset purchases or prepaid expenses) may still need review.
{% endhint %}
***
### Manual Adjustments You May Need
Accrual accounting often requires manual journal entries for items such as:
* Prepaid expenses
* Depreciation or amortization
* Accrued expenses
* Deferred revenue
* Complex revenue recognition
You can create journal entries at:\
**Accounting → Ledger → New Transaction**
If you’re unsure whether adjustments are needed, reach out to your accountant or Digits Support.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I switch between cash and accrual in Digits?
**Yes.** Digits supports both **cash** and **accrual** accounting—no setting or toggle required.
Because Digits uses a full general ledger, you can record transactions using the accounting method that fits your business. Unlike software that switches between simplified cash and accrual views, Digits gives you the flexibility to book transactions correctly from the start, without software-imposed limitations.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Get Tax-Ready with Digits: 1099s, W-9s, & Year-End Prep
Tax season doesn’t have to be stressful. Digits helps you stay organized and easily share everything your accountant needs—without the usual scramble.
***
### Store & Track W-9s in Vault
Keep all W-9s organized for year-end in [Vault](/business-documents/documents-overview).
### Upload W-9s to Vault
1. Go to **Vault**.
2. Click **Upload Document** (top right) and select the W-9 file.
3. (Optional) Add a description or tags that match your naming conventions.
4. Click **Save**.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** :sparkles:Digits auto-recognizes and names common W-9 formats.
{% endhint %}
### Filter and find W-9s fast
1. In **Vault**, open **Filters**.
2. Set **Document Type = W9** (or **1099**) to list just the forms you need.
3. Use **Search** (vendor name) or **Sort** (newest first) to narrow results.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Request W-9s once a vendor crosses your 1099 threshold. This minimizes year-end cleanup.
{% endhint %}
***
### Share with the Tax Accountant
You can collaborate in two ways:
* [**Invite Your Team**](/my-business-account/managing-your-team)**:** Add your accountant as a no-cost user to view exports and documents directly.
* **Publish a Year-End Report:** Export or send a **PDF/web report** if they don’t need live access.
#### Need everything in Excel?
Go to **Accounting → Ledger →** **Download Financial Package**.\
Digits exports one Excel file for each report:
* Ledger
* Trial Balance
* Profit & Loss
* Balance Sheet
* Cash Flow Statement
* AR Aging
* AP Aging
***
### Need to Catch Up a Full Year—Fast?
If you’re behind on the books, you can still get tax-ready quickly:
1. **Connect what you can** (banks, payroll, payments). ✨ Digits begins categorizing instantly.
2. **Bulk import the rest** from CSV.
3. Use **Checklist** to review only items where the AI needs your confirmation.
4. **Reconcile → Review → Publish → Lock.**
***
### **Frequently Asked Questions**
Does Digits file 1099s or tax returns?
No. Digits provides the **Taxes** workspace to evaluate eligibility and track W-9s. Use your preferred filing solution or CPA to file forms.
Can I lock the tax year after we file?
Yes. **Lock Periods** prevent edits once finalized.
What if I can’t connect to a bank?
Bulk import CSVs into **Ledger**, or upload bank statements (PDFs) to **Documents** to auto-convert them into CSVs for import.
What if I don’t have a CSV file for bank transactions?
No problem—upload the statement PDF to **Documents**, click the menu in the top-right corner, and choose **Export as CSV** to import directly into the Ledger.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Troubleshooting Cash Totals: Verifying Opening Balances
Opening balances make sure Digits starts with the right cash number so your reports and dashboards stay accurate.
***
### What an Opening Balance Is
In Digits, an **Opening Balance** is the amount in your bank account when Digits first starts tracking your data.
That number becomes the **starting point** for:
* Total Cash on your **Dashboard**
* Other cash and balance-related reports
If the opening balance is wrong, your cash metrics and history can look off.
***
### How Digits Gets Your Opening Balance
Digits will try to pull your opening balance automatically in a few ways.
From QuickBooks Online (QBO)
If you connected your data from QuickBooks Online, Digits brings in the opening balance from QBO automatically.
You’ll see this logged as “Digits generated opening balanc” in the Activity Log.
From the Bank (via Plaid)
If you connected your bank directly:
Digits uses Plaid to pull up to 2 years of transactions.
If your account activity falls within that window, Digits uses those transactions to calculate the balance on the date you connected.
When No Data Is Available
If Digits can’t see far enough back (usually because the account is older than what Plaid can provide) it does its best to estimate:
Digits calculates an opening balance based on the first transaction it can see.
It books that as a journal entry labeled “Digits generated opening balance.”
***
### When You Might Need to Adjust (or Remove) the Opening Balance
You may need to update the Opening Balance if:
* The client’s **Total Cash** appears incorrect
* Older transactions are missing
* The opening balance doesn’t match the bank statement as of the connection date
* You want to replace the generated balance with a more accurate one
***
### How to Find the Opening Balance Entry
Because the Opening Balance represents the start of history, it’s often far back in the Ledger.
To locate it:
1. Go to **Accounting → Ledger → All Transactions**
2. Use the **date filter** to jump to the earliest available date
3. Look for a **Journal Entry** labeled:
* *Digits generated opening balance*
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** If scrolling is slow, narrowing the date range to the first month of activity usually surfaces the entry quickly.
{% endhint %}
***
### Updating or Removing an Opening Balance
Opening Balances in Digits are recorded as manual journal entries, so you have full control over them. Unlike transactions pulled in through a bank connection, opening balance entries can be edited or deleted.
If an Opening Balance doesn’t look right, it’s usually best to delete it and recreate it with the correct amount, rather than trying to offset it later with additional entries.
#### **Option A:** **Edit the Existing Opening Balance**
1. Go to **Accounting** → **Ledger** → **All Transactions**.
2. Locate the Opening Balance entry (Journal Entry or Pay In).
3. Toggle to **Edit** mode at the top of the screen.
4. Adjust the amount.
5. Click **Save & Close**.
### **Option B**: **Delete and Recreate the Opening Balance**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
**Step 1: Delete the Existing Entry**
1. Open the Opening Balance journal entry.
2. Toggle to **Edit** mode at the top of the screen.
3. Click **the Trash** icon in the top right to delete.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
**Step 2: Create a New Opening Balance**
1. Go to **Ledger → All Transactions**
2. Click **New Transaction → Journal Entry**
3. Enter the correct opening balance amount
4. Assign the appropriate accounts
5. Click **Save & Close**
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Not sure what the right amount is?** Look at your **bank statement** for the date when Digits started tracking the account.
{% endhint %}
***
### Backfilling Historical Data (Optional)
If you have a CSV of older transactions, you can backfill to improve accuracy:
1. Go to **Ledger → All Transactions**.
2. Click the dropdown next to **New Transaction → Import Bank Transactions**.
3. Upload your CSV file and confirm the field mappings.
4. Click **Next** to complete the import.
:sparkles: Digits will incorporate this data and improve the overall accuracy of metrics and history.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Accounting & Ledger FAQs
Explore FAQs on ledger behavior, category logic, cash vs. accrual treatment, journal entries, and reconciliation workflows to keep your books accurate.
***
How does category behavior work in transactions?
Digits shows categories differently depending on where you’re working:
* **In category-focused views** (Ledger, Banks & Cards, Reconciliations, Category Details), Digits displays the **category from the other line** of the transaction.
* **In all other contexts**, you’ll see the **source category**—the category applied to the line you’re actively viewing or editing.
* **During bulk actions**, “Category” always refers to the **category visible in the table** you’re working from.
This helps keep category-based reviews consistent and predictable across your workflow.
Can I switch from cash to accrual basis reports?
Yes. Digits fully supports both cash- and accrual-based accounting—**no toggle required**.\
Instead of switching views like QuickBooks, Digits gives you a **true general ledger**, allowing your team to book transactions exactly how you want. It’s flexible, professional, and designed for firms that customize accounting treatment at the client level.
For more details, see: [Cash vs. Accrual in Digits](/business-agentic-general-ledger/cash-vs-accrual)
Can I use A2X to import Shopify or Amazon data into Digits?
Yes. While Digits does not yet have a direct integration with Shopify or Amazon, you can use **A2X** to aggregate your e-commerce activity. A2X creates clean summary entries that you can then **journal into Digits** for accurate revenue and COGS tracking.
Does Digits learn from my coding decisions?
Yes—Digits learns from the edits you make **within each specific client file**, improving future categorizations for that client.\
Learning is **not shared globally** across clients, ensuring each business gets tailored, file-specific intelligence based on your input.
Do I need to reconcile accounts that never carry a balance?
Usually, no. If an account is just a pass-through and it always ends near $0, reconciling it usually adds extra work without changing your books. In that case, the important money movement is already showing up in your main bank account.
This often happens with tools like PayPal, Square (without Square Banking), Stripe payouts, and other payment wallets, where everything eventually lands in the bank.
You should reconcile the account if it:
* keeps a balance (money stays there)
* has fees, disputes, or chargebacks
* doesn’t match the bank cleanly (timing differences, net vs. gross amounts, etc.) How do I record sales tax or use tax in Digits?
Digits doesn't calculate or track sales tax or use tax, but you can record tax amounts manually.
Add the tax as a line item and categorize it to the appropriate tax expense or liability category, such as **Sales Tax Payable**.
For tax rates, reporting, and filing, consult your tax professional or dedicated sales tax software.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Invoices & Bills (AR/AP)
In Digits, **Banks & Cards**, **Bills**, and **Invoices** all represent how money moves in and out of your business. These are your financial “inputs.”
Once that activity is connected or entered, Digits automatically categorizes it, reconciles it to your bank, and rolls it into your Ledger and reports, so you can understand your numbers and close the books with confidence.
***
{% hint style="danger" %}
To send invoices through Digits, your client must complete **Business Verification**. They can complete this themselves, or you can complete verification on their behalf (with authorization).
See: [Getting Set Up for Digits Bill Pay & Invoicing](/business-bills-and-invoices/business-verification)
[Document Requirements for Verification](/business-bills-and-invoices/verification-documents)
{% endhint %}
***
### Banks & Cards
:building-columns: Banks & Cards:
Overview
View and manage all bank and card transactions in one place.
# Getting Set Up for Digits Bill Pay & Invoicing
Before you can send invoices or pay bills through Digits, your business needs to be verified. This is a standard step for any product that moves money.
***
{% hint style="warning" icon="credit-card" %}
**Re-Verification for Credit Card Support**
Digits is working to expand payment support to include **credit cards,** **Apple Pay,** and **Google Pay.** To enable card payments, every business needs to sign a standard PCI DSS Self-Assessment Questionnaire (SAQ).
* **New customers** will complete the PCI SAQ automatically as part of their initial business verification — no extra steps needed.
* **Customers who have already completed verification** will see a yellow banner at the top of their Bill Pay or Invoicing page prompting them to sign the PCI SAQ.
Clicking **Verify My Business** will take you to the verification portal. Since they've already been verified, most sections will show as **Verified** — the only new step is signing the **PCI DSS questionnaire**.
\
The questionnaire looks extensive, but all that's required is signing the form at the bottom. No additional documents or information are needed.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Before you begin (recommended)**
Digits will send you to our secure third-party verification partner to complete KYB/KYC. The flow is much smoother if you have these ready first:
* **Business info:** legal business name, EIN, state of registration
* **Owner/signatory info:** SSN, physical business address (PO Box cannot be used)
* **Documents:** your tax/EIN documentation and any business formation/registration documents you have. See: /link
* **ID & device access:** government-issued ID + a camera for the selfie/facial scan
**Tip:** Plan for about **10–15 minutes** and try to complete the flow in one sitting.
{% endhint %}
***
## **Part 1**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Start the Verification Process
1. From your **Home Dashboard** (operator) or your client’s dashboard (firm), go to **Bill Pay** or **Invoicing** using the left navigation menu.
2. If verification is required (first-time or re-verification), you’ll see a **yellow banner** at the top of the page.
3. Click **Verify My Business** to begin.
4. Next, you’ll see a **Business Verification** screen with a short checklist (what you’ll need, how long it takes, and what to expect).
5. Review the checklist, then click **Begin Verification** when you're ready.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Choose Your Company Type
On the **Business Verification** screen, you’ll first select how the business is registered. This choice controls which fields you’ll see next.
{% hint style="warning" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Note:** You can change the company type only while the application is **Unverified**. Once verification begins, this setting is locked.
{% endhint %}
Which business type do I choose?
If your business is…
Choose
Quick rule of thumb
A freelancer/individual business not registered with a state
Individual/ Sole Proprietor
Usually uses your SSN (may not have an EIN)
All LLCs (including single-member and pass through
Business Entity
Registered with a state (often has an EIN)
A Corporation (C-Corp or S-Corp)
Business Entity
Registered with a state and has an EIN
An LLP/LP or other registered entity
Business Entity
Registered with a state
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Enter Your Business Details
This information is collected in Digits before you move to our verification partner.
{% hint style="warning" %}
The business details section must be completed by a company owner and signatory.
{% endhint %}
#### :arrow\_right: If you chose Individal/ Sole Proprietor
This section is labeled **Your personal information**. You’ll enter **your**:
* First and last name
* Social Security number (SSN)
* Date of birth
* Registered physical business address (PO Box cannot be used)
#### :arrow\_right: If you chose Business Entity
This section is labeled **Owner’s personal information**. You’ll enter the **owner’s**:
* First and last name
* Social Security number (SSN)
* Date of birth
* Registered physical business address (PO Box cannot be used)
#### :arrow\_right: Business Information (Same for Both)
For **either company type**, you’ll enter:
* Legal name of the business
* Industry code
* Annual revenue
* Company website (optional)
* Registered physical business address (PO Box cannot be used)
FAQ: Industry Code
#### What is the industry code?
The industry code is a required classification that helps our payments partner understand **what the business does**. It’s used for compliance and risk checks—it does **not** affect your accounting or reporting in Digits.
***
#### How do I know which industry code to choose?
Most businesses won’t see an exact match. That’s expected.
* Start typing a keyword related to what the business does.
* Select the **closest reasonable option**.
You don’t need to know an official code—just pick the best fit.
***
#### What if none of the options feel quite right?
Choose the option that’s **closest**, even if it’s not perfect. For example:
* Software companies often select something like *Computer Software Stores* or *Digital Goods*
* Holding companies or passive LLCs can choose a general or professional category
***
#### Will choosing the “wrong” industry code delay verification?
In most cases, **no**.
Verification usually only flags industry codes if the selection falls into a **restricted or regulated category**. Choosing a close match is fine and won’t cause issues for typical businesses.
***
#### Can I change the industry code later?
If verification requests a change, the section will switch to **Add** and prompt you to update it. Otherwise, you usually won’t need to revisit it.
***
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Don’t overthink this field. Pick the closest match and move on—most verifications succeed without issue.
{% endhint %}
When you’re done, click **Start Verification**.
{% hint style="info" %}
After you click **Start Verification**, you’ll move into our verification partner’s flow to finish the process (**Part 2**).
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## **Part 2**
After you click **Start Verification** at the end of Part 1, you’ll move into our verification partner’s portal to finish the process. This is where **identity checks**, **document review**, and **final approvals** happen.
The portal is organized into sections. Each section is reviewed independently and may move through different statuses.
You can safely return to Digits at any time.
***
{% hint style="info" %}
Once each section is complete, you’ll see a checkmark and "Verified" to confirm it was submitted correctly.
* **In review** — Information was submitted and is being checked.
* **Verified** — This section is complete.
* **Add / Needs attention** — More information or documents are required.
**Important:** It’s normal for a section to show **Verified** and later switch back to **Add** if additional information is needed. If that happens, open the section and follow the on-screen request.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Business Details
The **Business details** section consists of five parts: **Basic details**, **Company structure**, **Additional details**, **Tax Document**, and **Summary**.
#### 1. Basic details
FAQ: Proof of Signatory
For proof of signatory, the document must contain the following information:
1. The name of the person acting as the authorized signatory
2. The name of the company the authorized signatory represents
3. A date of issuance not older than 12 months, OR the document has been signed and dated by a legal representative within the past 12 months
Acceptable documents include:
* Articles of Organization or Incorporation
* Operating Agreement
* Corporate Resolution
* Secretary's Certificate
* Certificate of Good Standing (if it includes signatory information)
Please note that this can also be an internal company document if your state registry cannot provide documentation that meets the above requirements.
|  |
Country/region of establishment: Where your business was legally formed (usually shown on your formation or registration documents).
Business legal name: The name on your Articles of Incorporation, LLC Agreement, or state registration.
Employer Identification Number (EIN): Your federal tax ID (commonly found in your IRS confirmation letter, such as Form SS-4 or CP 575).
State where your business is registered: The state listed on your formation documents or business registration certificate.
State registration number (optional): Often found on your state’s business registry website or on a certificate of good standing.
|
| ------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
#### 2. Company Structure
|  | Select your business type from the available options (for example: **private company**, **public company**, **incorporated partnership**, **non-profit/charitable organization**, **governmental organization**, or **incorporated association**). |
| ------------------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
#### 3. Additional business details
|  |
DBA name (if applicable): The trade name your business uses publicly (often shown on a DBA registration or local business license).
Registered physical business address: The official address used for government and other legal purposes. (PO Box cannot be used)
Principal place of business: The main office or physical location where the business is managed.
|
| ------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
#### 4. Tax document
|  | Upload an allowed tax document based on your business type. |
| ------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------- |
#### 5. Summary
|  | Review the details and submit the **Business details** section. |
| ------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| {% endstep %} | |
{% step %}
### Decision Makers
Next, add the people associated with the business.
You must include:
* **At least one controlling person**
* **All owners**
* **At least one signatory**
Each required person may be asked to complete identity verification, including uploading an ID, providing proof of residency, and completing a facial scan.
Basic Details
Fill out beneficial owner details:
* First/Last Name
* Job Title
* Email address
* Phone Number
Uploading a government-issued ID
The guided experience will prompt the decision-maker to upload a **government-issued ID** to verify their identity.
1. Select the document type you want to upload, such as:
* **Driver’s license**
* **National identity card**
* **Passport**
2. Upload a photo (or scan) of the document.
*Example for driver's license:*
3. Click **Continue.**
4. Next, you’ll be asked to enter the decision-maker’s personal details **exactly as they appear on the document**.
* Country/Region
* Address
* DOB
* SSN
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Use the full legal name (including middle name or suffix, if shown) to avoid verification errors.
{% endhint %}
Uploading proof of residency
The guided experience will ask the decision-maker to upload a document that confirms their **current residential address**.
**Choose a document type**
Select the type of document you’re uploading (for example, a **bank statement**).
Commonly accepted documents include:
* Bank or credit card statement
* Utility bill
* Lease or mortgage statement
* Government-issued letter
**Requirements**
To be accepted, the document must:
* Be **addressed to the decision-maker**
* Show a **current residential address**
* Be **dated within the last 3 months**
* Be **fully visible** (not cut off)
* Be **clear and readable** (not blurry)
* **Not be expired or damaged**
**Upload the document**
* Upload a clear photo or PDF of the full document
* Supported file types: **JPG, JPEG, PNG, PDF**
* Max file size: **4 MB** (1 page)
You can optionally add a short description if helpful.
When you’re done, click **Continue**.
Completing a facial scan/selfie
To enhance our platform’s safety and to help prevent those individuals attempting impersonation fraud, we require all users to verify themselves through the evaluation of a live selfie photo that’s matched against their photo ID.
1. When prompted, click **Start recording**.
2. Position your face fully within the frame.
3. Slowly turn your head to both sides, following the on-screen instructions.
4. The recording will end automatically once the scan is complete.
This step helps confirm you’re a real person and matches your ID to your identity.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Tips for success**
**For the biometric scan to work correctly, please ensure the following:**
* The live selfie photo is a firsthand capture: it should be a direct photo of the person, not taken by another party.
* The live selfie photo should be taken at a similar angle to the face in the supplied photo ID.
* The distance between the person’s face and the camera must be appropriate to capture both shoulders and the full face, and to see sufficient facial features and detail.
* The live selfie photo must be in focus and cannot be blurry.
* There can be no alteration, or appearance of alteration, of the live selfie photo of any kind.
* The live selfie photo and the space where the photo is taken must be well-lit. Facial features must not be obscured by shadows.
* **Objects cannot block facial features:** There should be no objects in the photo that hide any facial features. This includes (but is not limited to) the following:
* Sunglasses
* Headwear
* On-ear or over-ear headphones and headsets
* Other accessories
* Clothing
* Fingers blocking the camera
* **Exceptions:**
* Eyeglasses with no tints
* Religious clothing, headwear or accessories can be present in the selfie, only if they are also present on the identity document.
* Medical equipment that cannot be reasonably removed can be present in the selfie.
**If the scan doesn’t work the first time, you’ll be prompted to try again.**
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Customer Support
Add a phone number and email that customers can use to contact the business.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Funding Sources
Confirm your funding source details. In many cases, this section is **auto-verified**.
If your funding sources were already confirmed based on your previous inputs, you’ll see a **Verified** status and won’t need to do anything else.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Service agreement
What you'll do:
A listed **signatory** must review and sign the service agreement.
Once signed, this section will show **Signed** and move into review.
Review the Payment Processing Terms and Business Account Terms.
Use the section headers to expand and review specific topics, or download the agreement as a PDF if you prefer.
Select the correct signer from the dropdown.
The signer must be a listed signatory for the business.
Check the confirmation box to agree to the terms.
Click Sign to complete the step.
This is a digital signature—no printing or uploading is required.
|
| ------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| {% endstep %} | |
{% step %}
### Final check
Before you leave the portal, confirm all required sections show **Verified**.
* If a section shows **In review**, it’s still processing—you can come back later.
* If a section shows **Add / Needs attention**, open it and submit what’s requested. You’ll also receive an email if anything needs attention.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
### Frequently Asked Questions
What documents will I need?
See: [Document Requirements for Verification](/business-bills-and-invoices/verification-documents)
What happens to bills or invoices I entered before verification?
Nothing is lost. You can continue creating bills and invoices, but **payments won’t process** until verification is complete. Once approved, existing items will begin processing automatically.
How long does verification take?
It varies. Some checks are instant, while others take longer. You’ll receive an email if anything needs attention or when verification is approved.
Why did a section change from “Verified” to “Add”?
This can happen if additional information is needed after review. Open the section and follow the on-screen request to provide what’s missing.
I completed everything—why don’t I see a “Done” confirmation?
The portal doesn’t always show a final “done” screen. If required sections show **Verified** (and the service agreement shows **Signed**), you’re all set. You can return to Digits and watch for email updates.
I received an email saying “needs attention,” but I can’t find where to fix it
Use the link in the email to return to the portal. If you still can’t access the right step, contact support and share a screenshot of the email/request.
What is the industry code, and how do I choose it?
It’s a required classification for verification. Most businesses won’t see a perfect match—choose the closest option. This usually won’t delay verification unless the category is restricted.
Do I need to complete a verification for each business?
Yes. Each business must complete its own verification.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Document Requirements for Verification
Digits verifies your identity and business information to keep your account secure and compliant with US regulations. In most cases, verification happens automatically based on the information you provide. However, if automatic verification is unsuccessful, you may be asked to upload additional documents.
This guide explains what documents may be required and how to prepare them for upload.
***
### Overview
Depending on your account type, you may need to provide documents for:
| Individuals | Businesses |
| ---------------------------- | ------------------------- |
| Photo ID | Registration Document |
| Proof of Tax ID | Proof of Business Address |
| Proof of Residential Address | Proof of Tax Information |
| Proof of National ID Number | Proof of Ownership |
| Proof of Source of Funds | Proof of Industry |
| Proof of Source of Wealth | Proof of Source of Funds |
| | Proof of Source of Wealth |
**For all accounts:** Bank Statement (if bank account verification fails)
***
### General Upload Requirements
All uploaded documents must meet these specifications:
| Requirement | Specification |
| ----------------- | ---------------------- |
| **File formats** | JPEG, JPG, PNG, or PDF |
| **PDF size** | 1 KB – 15 MB |
| **Image size** | 100 KB – 15 MB |
| **Maximum pages** | 15 pages (for PDFs) |
**We cannot accept:**
* Edited or digitally altered documents
* Documents older than 12 months (unless otherwise specified)
* Blurry, cut-off, or low-quality images
* Documents with missing required information
* Screenshots of documents (unless specifically permitted)
***
### Bank Statement
If automatic verification of your bank account fails, you'll need to provide proof of bank account ownership.
#### Accepted Documents
* Bank statements
* Deposit tickets or deposit forms
* Screenshots of your online banking environment
* Official letters issued by your bank
* Checks (with specific requirements below)
#### Requirements
Your bank document must clearly show:
* **Account holder name** — Must match your legal business name or trading name (DBA) exactly
* **Account number or routing number** — Fully visible
* **Date of issuance** — Within the last 12 months
* **Bank identification** — Logo or bank name in official font
#### Special Requirements for Checks
* Account holder name, account number, and bank name must be **printed** (not handwritten)
* Security features must be visible
* Account and routing numbers must be fully visible
* We cannot accept starter checks or temporary checks
#### What We Cannot Accept
* Photos of debit or credit cards
* Documents from third-party financial software
* Statements older than 12 months
* Documents without bank identification
***
### Photo ID
If automatic identity verification fails, you'll need to upload a government-issued photo ID.
#### Accepted Documents
Document Type
What to Upload
Passport
Data page (photo, MRZ code, and personal details)
Driver's License
Front AND back (as separate images)
State ID Card
Front AND back (as separate images)
#### Requirements
Your photo ID must:
* Be **non-expired**
* Show the **machine-readable zone (MRZ)** if present
* Be a **physical document** (not a digital ID)
* Be **signed** if there's a signature field
* Have **first and last name matching** exactly what you provided during signup
#### Image Quality Requirements
* **Full color** — No black and white images
* **Straightened** — All corners and edges fully visible
* **Photo or scan** of the physical document
#### What We Cannot Accept
* Digital IDs or mobile driver's licenses
* Screenshots of photos
* Photos of screens or printouts
* Photos pasted onto other documents
* Expired documents
{% hint style="info" %}
**Name Mismatch?** If your legal name has changed (e.g., after marriage), your photo ID name must still match what you provided during signup. Contact support if you need to update your registered name.
{% endhint %}
***
### Live Selfie Photo
To enhance our platform’s safety and help prevent impersonation fraud, we require all users to verify their identity by submitting a live selfie photo that’s matched against their photo ID.
**For the biometric scan to work correctly, please ensure the following:**
* The live selfie photo is a first-hand capture: it should be a direct photo of the person, and not be taken by another party.
* The live selfie photo should be taken at a similar angle to the face in the supplied [photo ID](https://docs.adyen.com/platforms/verification-requirements/document-requirements#photo-id-requirements).
* The distance of the person’s face from the camera has to be appropriate to capture both the shoulders and the full face in the photo, and to see sufficient facial features and details.
* The live selfie photo must be in focus and cannot be blurry.
* There can be no alteration, or appearance of alteration, of the live selfie photo of any kind.
* The live selfie photo and the space where the photo is taken must be well-lit.
* Facial features must not be obscured by shadows.
**Objects cannot block facial features:** There should be no objects in the photo that hide any facial features. This includes (but is not limited to) the following:
* Sunglasses
* Headwear
* On-ear or over-ear headphones and headsets
* Other accessories
* Clothing
* Fingers blocking the camera
**Exceptions:**
* Eyeglasses with no tints
* Religious clothing, headwear, or accessories may appear in the selfie only if they are also present on the identity document.
* Medical equipment that cannot be reasonably removed can be present in the selfie.
***
### Proof of Individual Tax ID
If automatic tax ID verification fails, you'll need to upload an official tax document.
#### Accepted Documents
Your document must contain one of the following tax identification numbers **and** your name:
| Tax ID Type | Description |
| ---------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------- |
| **Social Security Number (SSN)** | 9-digit number issued to US citizens and residents |
| **Employer Identification Number (EIN)** | 9-digit number for business entities |
| **Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN)** | 9-digit number for individuals not eligible for SSN |
#### Examples of Acceptable Documents
* IRS correspondence showing your SSN, EIN, or ITIN
* Social Security card
* EIN Confirmation Letter (CP 575)
* Tax return documents
* W-2 or 1099 forms
***
### Constitutional Document (Sole Proprietorships)
If you operate as a sole proprietor and automatic verification fails, you may need to provide a constitutional document.
#### Accepted Documents for US Sole Proprietors
| Document | Description |
| ------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------- |
| **SS-4 Confirmation Letter** | IRS acknowledgment of your EIN application |
| **Schedule C** | Profit or Loss from Business (from your tax return) |
| **EIN Confirmation Letter (CP 575)** | Official IRS letter confirming your EIN |
| **DBA Filing** | "Doing Business As" or Fictitious Name filing |
#### Requirements
* Issued within the last **12 months**, OR
* Contains a signature and date not older than 12 months
***
### Registration Document (Organizations)
If automatic verification of your business fails, you may need to provide an official registration document.
#### Requirements
Your registration document must be:
* Issued by a **government agency or official registry**
* Issued within the last **12 months**, OR contain a signature and state of affairs dated within the last 12 months
* Show your **legal business name** and **registration number**
#### Examples of Acceptable Documents
* Articles of Incorporation
* Certificate of Formation (LLC)
* Certificate of Good Standing
* Business License
* State registration certificate
***
### Proof of Signatory
For proof of signatory, the document must contain the following information:
1. The name of the person acting as the authorized signatory
2. The name of the company the authorized signatory represents
3. A date of issuance not older than 12 months, OR the document has been signed and dated by a legal representative within the past 12 months
Acceptable documents include:
* Articles of Organization or Incorporation
* Operating Agreement
* Corporate Resolution
* Secretary's Certificate
* Certificate of Good Standing (if it includes signatory information)
Please note that this can also be an internal company document if your state registry cannot provide documentation that meets the above requirements.
***
### Proof of Business Address
If automatic address verification fails for your organization, you'll need to provide proof of your business address.
#### Requirements
The document must be:
* Issued by a **reliable, independent source** (government agency, utility company, financial institution)
* Issued within the last **12 months**
* Show your **complete business address**
#### Examples of Acceptable Documents
* Utility bills (gas, electric, water, internet)
* Bank statements
* Government correspondence
* Lease or rental agreements
* Official business registration showing address
***
### Proof of Residential Address
If automatic verification of your residential address fails, you'll need to provide proof of your address.
#### Document Age Requirements
Maximum Age
Document Types
3 months
Bank statement, Utility bill (gas, water, electric, internet), Tax document, Salary slip, Employment contract, Government correspondence
#### Requirements
Your document must show:
* Your **full name**
* Your **complete residential address** (including state)
* **Date** within the required timeframe
***
### Proof of National ID Number
If automatic verification of your national ID number fails, you'll need to provide documentation.
#### Requirements
Your document must:
* Show your **full name**
* Show your **national ID number** (SSN for US individuals)
* Be issued by a **government agency**
***
### Proof of Organization Tax Information
If automatic tax verification fails for your business, you'll need to provide proof of your business tax ID.
#### Requirements
The document must:
* Be issued by a **government or tax authority**
* Show your **legal entity name** (not just DBA/trading name)
* Show your **tax ID number (EIN)**
* Show **country of registration**
* Be dated within the last **12 months**, OR be signed and dated by a legal representative within the last 12 months
#### Examples of Acceptable Documents
* IRS EIN Confirmation Letter (CP 575)
* IRS tax correspondence
* State tax registration documents
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** Your "Doing Business As" (DBA) or trading name cannot be accepted as your legal entity name. Make sure to provide documents showing your official legal business name.
{% endhint %}
***
### Proof of Ownership
If verification of your business ownership structure fails, you may need to provide proof showing who owns and controls your company.
#### Required: Ownership and Control Chart
You must provide a visual diagram showing:
* **Complete ownership structure,** including all intermediate companies
* **Legal entity name, structure, and state** for every entity
* **Ownership percentages** between entities
* **Ultimate Beneficial Owners (UBOs)** — individuals who own 25% or more
* **Signature, name, title, and date** (within last 6 months)
#### Supporting Documents
In addition to the ownership chart, you may provide:
* Securities or shareholder register
* Articles of incorporation
* Annual reports
* Certificate of Corporate Status
* Shareholder agreements
* Partnership agreements
* Board meeting records
* Certificate of incumbency
#### Document Requirements
Supporting documents must:
* Include information about UBOs and all intermediate entities
* Be dated within the last **6 months**
* Be issued by an external/official source
***
### Proof of Source of Funds
You may be asked to verify the source of funds being used in your Digits account.
#### Required Information
| Source Type | What You Need | Supporting Documents |
| -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Business profits** | Description of your industry and business model | Latest audited accounts, annual statements, or letter from a regulated accountant detailing profits over the last 2 years |
***
### Proof of Source of Wealth
For certain accounts, you may need to document the total amount and sources of your wealth.
#### Documentation by Wealth Source
| Source | Required Information | Acceptable Documents |
| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Business profits** | Industry and business description | Audited accounts, annual statements, accountant letter |
| **Employment/Salary** | Role, salary, employer details, employment dates | Pay stubs (last 3 months), contract, tax documents, bank statements showing salary deposits |
| **Inheritance** | Date received, amount, relationship to benefactor | Grant of probate with will, tax document, bank statement, solicitor's letter |
| **Rental income** | Annual amount, property address | Proof of ownership, tax document, rental agreement |
| **Capital gains/Dividends** | Annual amount, investment description, holding period | Tax document, investment statement, confirmation letter |
| **Asset sale** | Sale date, amount, asset type, holding period | Sale contract, solicitor letter, bank statement, title deed |
| **Loans** | Loan date, amount, lender info, purpose, duration | Loan agreement, recent loan statement |
| **Gifts/Donations** | Date, amount, donor info, reason, relationship | Letter from donor confirming gift and source of funds |
| **Lottery/Betting winnings** | Date, amount, source | Tax document, bank statement, proof from lottery/casino |
***
### Proof of Industry
If industry verification fails, you may need to provide documentation showing your business classification.
#### Acceptable Documents
Any document that includes an official industry code:
* **Tax documents** showing industry classification
* **Registration documents** with industry codes
* **SIC code** documentation
Your proof of industry can often be satisfied by documents you've already provided, such as tax information or registration documents, if they include industry classification codes.
***
### Need Help?
If you have questions about document requirements or need assistance with verification:
* Review the specific requirements for your document type above
* Ensure your documents meet all format and quality standards
* Contact Digits support at if you're unsure whether a document will be accepted
{% hint style="success" %}
**Tip:** Before uploading, double-check that your document is clear, complete, shows all required information, and meets the file size requirements.
{% endhint %}
# Banks & Cards Overview
Review and manage transactions from your connected bank and card accounts in a clear, account-level view.
***
{% embed url="" %}
### Viewing Your Accounts
All connected financial accounts appear on the left sidebar:
* **Bank Accounts** — checking, savings, or operating accounts
* **Credit Cards** — individual cards with transaction totals for the period
Click any account to see its transactions for the selected date range.
You’ll see:
* **Account balance**
* **Total transactions for the period**
* **Party names, sources, categories, and amounts**
Use the search bar to quickly filter vendors, amounts, and line items.
***
### Reviewing Transactions
Digits displays each transaction in a structured row that includes:
* **Date**
* **Party** (e.g., Stripe, Gusto, vendor names)
* **Source** (bank feed details)
* **Category** (proposed or previously selected)
* **Amount**
* **Running balance**
***
### Editing & Updating Transactions
While Banks & Cards shows the raw transaction list, you can still:
* **Edit a category**
* **Update the party name**
* **Add notes**
* **View supporting bank details**
* **Filter by type, date, or keyword**
See also: [Editing Transactions](/business-agentic-general-ledger/editing-transactions)
***
### Switching the Date Range
Use the date selector at the top to switch between:
* Monthly views
* Quarterly views
* Yearly views
* Custom ranges
The transaction list updates instantly.
***
### Use Banks & Cards when you want to:
* Review raw bank feed data
* Confirm incoming transactions
* Check balances and activity
* Catch unusual charges
* Validate the period’s feed completeness
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Bill Statuses Explained
Get comfy with bill statuses in Bill Pay. See where each bill sits in approval and payment, spot holdups fast, and know exactly what, if anything, you need to do next.
***
Status
What it Means
New
Just uploaded, untouched
Scheduled
Payment approved and queued
Processing
Payment sent but funds not withdrawn yet
Awaiting Vendor
Paid, but vendor hasn’t claimed funds (Digits Pay only)
Overdue
Due date is in the past
Duplicate
Matches an existing bill (same vendor + invoice number)
Verification Required
On hold pending payment verification
Payment Failed
The charge (pay-in) to fund the bill failed
Delivery Failed
The payout to the vendor bounced or was returned.
Rejected
Approver declined the bill; sent back to In Review
Canceled
Payment was canceled
Voided
Bill voided; no payment will be made
Refunded
Payment was refunded
***
Frequently Asked Questions
The payment says "Sent" (Awaiting Vendor), but my vendor hasn't received it.
"Awaiting Vendor" means the money has left your account and is waiting for the vendor to claim it into their bank — usually available to withdraw within 2–3 business days.
If they're getting paid through Digits for the first time, they need to accept the payment invitation (ask them to check spam; you can resend it).
If you see Delivery Failed, the transfer to your vendor bounced or was returned. Open the bill and choose Retry Delivery to send it again.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Managing Bills
Learn how to manage bills in Digits—upload and review invoices, send or approve bills, mark outside payments, fix duplicates, and keep your payables organized and up to date.
***
### First-Time Setup Note
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Note:** Before you can **pay bills through Digits**, [your business has to be verified](/business-bills-and-invoices/business-verification).
* You can complete verification yourself.
* If you work with an accountant, they may complete it on your behalf (with your authorization).
You can still **upload and prepare bills while verification is pending**.\
Once you’re approved, any bills that are ready will process automatically—no need to re-enter anything.
{% endhint %}
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Add a Bill in Digits
Select **Bills** in the left navigation menu.
The Bills dashboard displays bills in a Kanban-style layout:
* **In Review** – Drafts that need additional information, approval, or scheduling.
* **Pending Approval** – Sent to your client for approval.
* **Awaiting Payment** – Approved by your client and ready for payment.
* **Scheduled & Paid** – Payment has been scheduled or completed.
To create a bill, choose one of the following:
* Click **Upload Bill** or drag an invoice file into Digits to create a bill with the vendor, amount, dates, and line items pre-filled.
* Click **Create Bill** to start a blank bill and enter the vendor, amount, bill and due dates, and line items manually.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip**: :sparkles:When you upload a bill file, Digits scans it and pre-fills as much as it can. The bill will first appear in **In Review**.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Review and Complete Details
1. Click the bill to confirm or update the details (d*ate, amount, vendor, memo*).
2. If it’s a **new vendor**, complete the profile by following the prompts to:
* **Review** detected vendor info
* **Choose** a preferred payment method (*ACH, Check, Digits Pay*)
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Approve or Send for Approval
1. (Optional) Add a **memo** if you want extra context for yourself or your team.
2. Choose an **approver** if someone else on your team needs to sign off, or skip this if **you’re the one approving**.
3. Do one of the following:
* Click **Approve** to approve the bill yourself, **or**
* Click **Send for Approval** to route it to someone else’s Checklist
Once the bill is approved, you’ll see the option to **Submit Payment**.
4. Click **Submit Payment** to complete the payment through Digits.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Approver Reviews & Releases Payment
1. If you **send a bill for approval**, here’s what happens next:
* The **approver** (you or someone on your team) gets the bill in their **Checklist** with all the details you prepared.
* They can **review**, make edits if needed, and then **approve** the bill.
* Once approved, Digits moves the bill to **Awaiting Payment**, and after payment is submitted, to **Scheduled** or **Paid**.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
How do I get notified about a bill if I am the approver?
Once someone clicks Send for Approval, the bill appears in your Checklist, and you’ll get a notification to review and approve it.
What if I paid the bill outside Digits?
You can update the status by opening the bill, clicking the menu in the top right, and selecting Mark as Paid.
What if a bill is flagged as a duplicate?
Digits compares the vendor name + invoice number. Review the draft and remove duplicates if needed.
Payments Pricing FAQ
See: [Digits Pay Pricing](/business-bills-and-invoices/digits-pay-pricing)
Can I delete or cancel a bill payment?
Once a bill payment has been submitted, it can't be deleted or cancelled in Digits because the funds are already in flight. If you need to stop a payment, contact Digits Support at and we'll help resolve it.
How long does it take for a bill payment to be delivered?
Processing times depend on the payment method you choose:
* **ACH** — 2–4 business days
* **Check** (printed & mailed via USPS) — 7–10 business days
* **Digits Pay** (email vendor to collect funds via Digits) — 3–5[ business days](#user-content-fn-1)[^1]
Does a bill get booked to one category or split by line item?
Bills in Digits support multiple line items, and each line item can be assigned its own category. If a line item doesn't have a category assigned, it falls back to the bill-level category. This means your bookkeeping stays accurate at the line-item level, even if the bill covers multiple expense types.
To split a bill across categories, click **Split Line Items** when viewing the bill and assign a category to each line.
How do I reassign a bill to a different vendor?
If the bill was linked to the wrong vendor or created a duplicate:
1. Open the bill.
2. In the **Pay To** section, click **Edit** (pencil icon).
3. Search for and select the correct vendor.
4. Click **Save**.
The bill and its associated transaction will be reassigned to the selected vendor.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** You can reassign the vendor any time before the bill is approved (New, Scheduled, Pending Approval, or Rejected). Once approved or paid, the vendor is locked.
{% endhint %}
Can I upload multiple bills at once?
Yes. You can upload up to 10 bills at a time by selecting multiple files or dragging and dropping them into the Bills dashboard.
Why was my ACH payment blocked?
Some banks use **ACH debit blocks** to prevent unauthorized withdrawals. If your bank has one enabled, it may reject ACH payments from Digits even if you've authorized the payment.
To allow ACH payments, contact your bank and ask them to **whitelist** the following **ACH Company IDs (Originator IDs)**:
Originator ID
2638633811
9263863381
8263863381
4263863381
3263863381
2263863380
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
**Tip:** Ask your bank to whitelist **all six IDs** to prevent future ACH payments from being blocked.
{% endhint %}
After your bank confirms the IDs are authorized, retry the payment. If it's still blocked, contact [help@digits.com](mailto:@help@digits.com).
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
[^1]:
# Marking a Bill or Invoice as Paid (External Payments)
If you paid a bill outside Digits (like mailing a check), mark it as Paid so your records stay accurate—Digits won’t move any money.
If a bill or invoice was paid outside of Digits (for example, a mailed check, wire, or a separate system), you can mark it as paid to keep your AP, AR, and reports accurate. No money moves in Digits—this is a record update for tracking and reconciliation.
***
### Marking a Bill as Paid (AP)
If you paid a bill outside of Digits:
1. From the left navigation menu, click **Bills & Invoices -> Bills.**
2. Find the bill, then click **More Actions** in the top-right corner.
3. Select **Mark as Paid**.
4. Choose the **payment date**.
5. Select the **Pay Out Category** — the account the payment came from, usually the bank account the money left or the credit card you paid with.
6. (*Optional*) Add a **reference number** (e.g., a check number) and/or an **internal memo** for context.
7. Click **Mark as Paid** to confirm.
{% hint style="warning" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Good to know:**
* You can only mark as paid if all **required fields** on the bill are complete; otherwise, the action is disabled.
* This does **not** send money or notify the vendor. It’s a record update for tracking and reconciliation.
* **This action can't be undone** (same as invoices—your only recourse afterward is to void).
* You can't set a payment date that falls **on or before a closed-period date**, or before the bill date—those dates are disabled in the picker and will show an error.
{% endhint %}
***
### Marking an Invoice as Paid (AR)
If you paid an invoice outside of Digits (check, wire, or a transfer):
1. Click **Invoices** in the left navigation menu.
2. Open the invoice and select **Mark as Paid**.
3. Choose the payment date.
4. Select the **account where the payment was received**—almost always the bank account the funds landed in.
5. (Optional) Add a **reference number** (e.g., a check number) and/or an **internal memo** for context.
6. Click **Mark as Paid**.
{% hint style="warning" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
**Notes:**
* The **Pay In** list includes only **balance sheet accounts** (bank, asset, liability, and equity accounts). Select the **bank account** where you received the payment.
Revenue was already recorded when the invoice was created, so marking it as paid simply debits the bank account and credits Accounts Receivable to settle the balance. (This is also why revenue accounts aren't offered here—selecting one would double-count income.)
* Marking an invoice as paid confirms the payment was collected **outside of Digits**, and **this action can't be undone**.
* Digits Invoice Clearing is applied automatically only when a customer pays through Digits. You don't select it for offline payments.
* This is a record update—no funds move in Digits.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why is Mark as Paid disabled?
One or more required bill fields are missing. Open the bill, complete all required fields, then try again.
Will marking a bill or invoce as paid update the ledger automatically?
Yes. Digits records the payment against the bill or invoice and updates the ledger so AP or AR stays accurate.
If I manually mark a bill or invoice as paid, can I attach proof of payment?
Yes. Add a note in Comments and upload supporting docs (e.g., a cleared check image) to Vault.
Can I undo Mark as Paid?
No. Once an invoice is marked as paid, the action can't be undone.
If you marked an invoice as paid by mistake, you can:
* **Void the invoice.** This cancels the invoice and posts a reversing entry to reverse the accounting. Voiding is permanent and can't be undone.
* **Duplicate the invoice** if you need to reissue it, then send the new copy to your customer.
Why is "Mark as Paid" greyed out?
Mark as Paid stays disabled until the bill is complete: a real vendor must be selected (not just scanned text), and the bill needs an amount greater than zero, a bill date, a due date, and valid line items. Hover the button to see exactly what's missing.
How does marking a bill as paid affect my books?
Use Mark as Paid (in the bill's ⋯ More Actions menu) when a bill was paid outside of Digits — by check, wire, or from another system.
You'll be asked for the payment date and a Pay Out Category — choose the bank or credit card account the payment actually came from. If you paid from your checking account, select that checking account; if you paid by credit card, select that card.
Digits then records one entry: Accounts Payable goes down, and the payment is recorded against the account you selected. The expense itself isn't affected — it was recorded when the bill was created.\
When the payment appears in your bank or card feed, Digits matches it to the recorded entry, so nothing is double-counted.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Creating & Managing Invoices
Create invoices for your customers, track them from Draft to Paid, update customer details, and record payments you collect outside Digits so your books stay up to date.
***
### Before You Start: Business Verification
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Note:** Before you can **send invoices through Digits**, [your business has to be verified](/business-bills-and-invoices/business-verification).
* You can complete verification yourself.
* If you work with an accountant, they may complete it on your behalf (with your authorization).
You can draft and prepare invoices while verification is pending — ***only sending with a payment link is blocked until approval.*** (An invoice waiting on verification shows a Verification Required status — see below.)
{% endhint %}
### How to Create an Invoice
1. From your dashboard, click **Invoices** in the left navigation menu.
2. Click **New Invoice** in the Draft column, or use the **New Invoice** button in the top-right corner.
3. Add invoice details:
|
Customers
Start typing to find an existing customer. If the customer doesn’t exist yet, click + Add Customer in the dropdown to create a new one.
Each line item requires a product. You can search your existing products or create a new one in line. For each line item, you can set:
Name, description, quantity, and unit price
A revenue category (defaults to the one set on the product, or your global default if none is set)
Department and location (if your organization uses them)
A fixed or percentage-based discount
Line items can be reordered by dragging them.
|
|
Invoice-Level Discounts
You can apply a discount to the entire invoice (fixed amount or percentage), separate from any line-item discounts.
|
|
Dates
Invoice date defaults to today; due date options: Upon Receipt, Net 15, Net 30 (default), Net 45, Net 60, Net 90, or custom.
|
|
Reference number An optional field for tracking purchase orders, project names, or any external reference.
|
|
Invoice Memo
An internal or customer-facing note attached to the invoice.
|
4. Click **Review** to open the send flow.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** :sparkles: Digits automatically generates invoice numbers, but you can set your own custom numbering format in **Settings → Invoices**.
{% endhint %}
***
### Review & Send
On the **Review** screen, you can:
**Branding**\
Customize the invoice appearance with a background color, cover image, and layout style. These are saved to your invoice profile. See: [Customizing Invoice Branding](/business-bills-and-invoices/invoice-branding)
**Email**
* Customize the email subject line and message body (separate from the invoice memo)
* Add multiple recipients, CC, and BCC
Click **Send** to deliver the invoice. Customers receive an email with a payment link.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Sending invoices with a payment link requires completed business verification. You can still draft invoices and send them manually (share the PDF) without verification.
{% endhint %}
***
### Invoice Statuses & Payment Delivery
Every invoice moves through statuses like **Draft**, **Sent**, **Paid**, and **VOID**, and once a customer pays you, you can track the payment all the way to your bank. For the full list of statuses and how to follow a payment's delivery, see [Invoice Statuses & Payment Delivery](/business-bills-and-invoices/invoice-status)
### Editing invoices by status
What you can do with an invoice depends on its status.
#### **Draft invoices**
Draft invoices can be fully edited. You can update line items, amounts, customer details, dates, discounts, categories, and branding before sending.
#### **Sent or overdue invoices**
You can edit a sent or overdue invoice at any time.
You can:
* Add, edit, or remove line items
* Add or remove discounts
* Edit customer info.
* Edit the due date
* Update the invoice branding, memo, and email settings
* Resend the invoice
* Mark the invoice as paid (for offline payments)
* Void the invoice
* Duplicate the invoice to create a new draft
#### **Paid or settled invoices**
Paid invoices are view-only and cannot be edited.
To make changes, duplicate the invoice and issue a corrected version.
#### **Voided invoices**
Voided invoices are also view-only. They are hidden by default.
To view them, open the menu in the top-right corner and select **Show Voided Invoices**.
***
### Resending an Invoice
Need to send an invoice again, a payment reminder for an overdue invoice, or the customer misplaced the original? You can resend any sent invoice without editing it.
1. Open the invoice.
2. Click the **⋯ action menu** in the top-right corner and select **Resend**.
3. Digits opens the **email preview** — review the recipient and message, and adjust if needed.
4. Click **Send** to deliver the invoice again.
Resending doesn't change the invoice — the amount, due date, and payment link stay the same, and it won't duplicate the invoice in your books. It simply sends the email again.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Resend is available for invoices that have already been sent, including **Overdue** invoices — it's the built-in wa
{% endhint %}
***
### Viewing invoices in the Ledger
Because invoices are native ledger items, drilling into an AR entry in the Ledger takes you directly to the invoice rather than a journal entry. From the invoice, you can open a journal view to see the underlying accounting — but edits must be made on the invoice itself, not the journal.
***
### How Customers Pay
Customers receive an email with a payment link and do not need a Digits account to pay. Supported payment methods:
* **Credit card** — the processing fee is paid by the business sending the invoice
* **ACH / bank transfer** — available for authenticated payers via Plaid
A shareable payment link is also available on any sent invoice for direct sharing outside of email.
***
### Connected Invoices
If you use a Connect integration, such as Bill.com, or sync invoices through the Open API, those invoices appear on the **Invoicing** board alongside invoices created in Digits.
This gives you a single view of all outstanding accounts receivable without switching between systems.
#### **Identify Connected Invoices**
Connected invoices display the logo of the integration they came from, such as Bill.com.
This makes it easy to distinguish invoices created in Digits from invoices synced from an external system.
| What You Can't Do | What You Can Do |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
Connected invoices are read-only in Digits. To make changes, update the invoice in the source system.
You cannot:
:x: Edit invoices
:x: Send invoices
:x: Void invoices
:x: Delete invoices
:x: Mark invoices as paid
When you click a connected invoice, Digits opens the transaction details view instead of the invoice editor.
|
You can:
:check: View connected invoices in the Invoicing board
:check: Track invoice status
:check: Open invoice details
|
#### **Connected Invoice Status**
Connected invoices use a simplified status flow:
* **Created** — The invoice is open and has an outstanding balance.
* **Paid** — The amount due is zero.
Unlike invoices created in Digits, connected invoices do not use the full **Draft** → **Sent** → **Paid/Voided** lifecycle.
#### **Sync Behavior**
Invoice updates flow one way—from the source system into Digits.
When an invoice is updated in the source system, the changes appear in Digits after the next sync. Changes made in Digits are not written back to the source system.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I assign invoice line items to different revenue categories?
Yes. Each product can have a default revenue category set — when that product is added to a line item, its category is used automatically. You can also override the category (and department/location) on any individual line item directly while drafting. If neither the product nor the line item has a category set, it falls back to the global default in Settings → Invoices → Ledger Integration Settings.
Can I set departments and locations on line items?
Yes, if your organization uses departments or locations. These can be set per product as defaults and overridden per line item on any invoice.
Can I edit an invoice after it's been sent?
Line items, amounts, and the customer cannot be changed after sending. You can still update the branding, memo, and email content and resend the invoice. To change amounts or line items, void the invoice and duplicate it to create a corrected draft.
Can I send an invoice to multiple people?
Yes. When sending, you can add multiple recipients and include CC and BCC addresses.
What payment terms are available?
Upon Receipt, Net 15, Net 30, Net 45, Net 60, Net 90, or a custom due date. The default is Net 30.
How do I record a payment that happened outside of Digits?
See: [Marking a Bill or Invoice as Paid (External Payments)](/business-bills-and-invoices/external-payments)
Can I download a PDF of an invoice?
Yes. Open any Sent, Overdue, or Paid invoice and use the **Download** button in the right sidebar.
Can I change the invoice number?
Digits automatically generates invoice numbers, but you can edit invoices individually or set your own custom numbering format in **Settings → Invoices**.
How do I void an invoice?
Open the invoice and select **Void Invoice**. This permanently cancels it. Use **Duplicate** to create a corrected version if needed.
Can I create an estimate and then convert it to an invoice?
Not yet. Digits doesn’t currently support creating an estimate and converting it into an invoice. For now, you’ll need to create the invoice directly (or draft it and send it when ready).
Does Digits support automatic sales tax calculation?
Not currently. Add sales tax as a manual line item on invoices, and track it using a sales tax payable category in your chart of accounts.
Who pays the processing fee when a customer pays an invoice by credit card?
The business that sends the invoice pays the processing fee. Your customer is not charged any additional fees.
Do I need to complete business verification if I only accept offline payments?
No. You can create invoices and use the Mark as Paid flow to record payments received outside of Digits without completing business verification. Verification is only required if you want to send invoices with a payment link or collect payments directly through Digits.
Can I link multiple payments (or split deposits) to one invoice?
Not yet. Each invoice can only match one transaction in Digits today. If a customer pays in split/partial transfers, you’ll need to track that mapping outside Digits for now.
Can I create recurring invoices?
Not currently. Recurring invoices are on the roadmap.
How do I view voided invoices?
From the Invoices page, click the **menu** in the top-right corner and select **Show Voided Invoices**. This will display all invoices that have been voided for reference or review.
Payments Pricing FAQ
See: [Digits Pay Pricing](/business-bills-and-invoices/digits-pay-pricing)
How long do invoice payments take to arrive?
Most ACH payments settle within a few business days. Exact timing depends on your account's settlement schedule and on when the payment is submitted relative to bank business days, weekends, and federal holidays—payments submitted on a weekend or holiday begin processing the next business day.
The most accurate estimate is always the estimated delivery date shown on the payment itself in Digits. If a payment is taking longer than expected, [contact support](mailto:help@digits.com)—settlement timing can vary by account, and we can review your account's configuration.
Can I match one deposit to several invoices?
Not today — each invoice matches a single transaction, and there's no partial-payment tracking. If a single deposit covers multiple invoices, track the split outside Digits
Can I add custom fields to an invoice?
Custom fields aren't currently available;, however, if you need to include customer-specific reference information—such as an NPI, tax ID, diagnosis reference, or purchase order (PO) number—you can add it to the invoice in one of two places:
* **For the entire invoice:** Enter the information in the **Invoice Memo**.
* **For a specific line item:** Click the **Expand** (>) button next to the line item, then enter the information in the **Description** field.
Are invoice payment reminders sent automatically?
No. Digits doesn't currently send automatic payment reminders for overdue invoices.\
If you need to remind a customer about an invoice, open the invoice and select Resend to send it again manually.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Editing Customer Information on Invoices
Update customer contact and billing details directly from invoices for accurate, up-to-date records.
***
{% hint style="info" %}
**A Note on Closed Accounting Periods**
If a sent invoice is dated within a closed accounting period, it can't be edited — the Edit option won't appear — so you won't be able to change its customer until the period is reopened. (You also need permission to edit invoices.)
{% endhint %}
#### **On a Draft Invoice**
1. Go to **Bills & Invoicing** → **Invoices** → **New Invoice**, or open any Draft invoice.
2. Select a customer from the dropdown, or type a name or email to create a new one.
3. To edit the existing customer, click the **Edit** (pencil) icon on the customer card. (To remove the customer entirely, click the trash icon.)
4. Update the customer's details:
* Company Name
* Email Address
* Billing Address — Country, Address Line 1, Address Line 2 (optional), City, State/Region, and Zip/Postal Code.
5. Click **Save**. These details are used for this invoice and reflected on all active and future invoices for that customer.
#### **On a Sent or Overdue Invoice**
You can still correct a customer's details after an invoice has been sent (an overdue invoice is just a sent invoice past its due date — the same rules apply).
1. Open the sent invoice and click **Edit**.
2. Click the **Edit** (pencil) icon on the customer card.
3. Update the Company Name, Email Address, or Billing Address, then save. Your changes are reflected on all active and new invoices for that customer.
What you can't do after sending:
* Switch to a different customer. The invoice is already tied to its customer — to bill someone else, void the invoice and start over. (Digits will prompt: "*This invoice is already tied to a customer. Want a different one? Void this invoice to start over.*")
* Remove the customer from the invoice.
#### **Paid Invoices**
Once an invoice is paid, the customer is locked — you can't edit, switch, add, or remove the customer.
#### **International Addresses**
Billing addresses support international customers — just choose the Country in the address fields. A small number of sanctioned countries aren't available.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I edit a customer's information after I send an invoice?
Yes. You can update a sent (or overdue) invoice's customer details — company name, email, and billing address — by opening the invoice, clicking Edit, then the pencil icon on the customer card. The one thing you can't do is switch to a different customer.
If I update a customer's details, does it change my other invoices?
Yes. Editing a customer's details updates them on all of that customer's active and future invoices, not just the one you're working in.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Customizing Invoice Branding
Make your invoices match your brand. Customize logo, business details, and messaging, then preview exactly what customers will see before you send it.
***
### How to Customize Your Invoice
After creating an invoice and clicking **Review**, you’ll land on the invoice preview screen. From here, you can tailor the branding and message to match your style—ensuring every invoice looks polished and professional.
Update the invoice's visual style to reflect your business's brand:
* **Memo** — Add a personalized note or instructions for the customer. This will appear in both the invoice email and the payment link preview.
* **Background Color** — Choose from preset color swatches.
* **Cover Image** — Select a visual header from available options.
* **Logo & Company Details** — To update the logo, company name, email, or address, go to **Settings → Invoices**.
* Once everything looks right, click **Create without Sending** to save the draft to send later.
***
### How to Preview the Customer View
On the **Review** screen of an invoice:
1. After updating the **Branding** and **Memo**, click **Preview**.
2. Review how the invoice will appear to the customer in the **payment link** or **email.**
If something looks off, go back and adjust the **Branding** or update company details from **Settings → Invoices**.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Does changing branding update past invoices?
Branding changes apply to future invoices. Previously sent invoices typically keep the branding they had at the time they were created and sent.
How do I change the logo or address on an invoice?
To change the **logo**, **company name**, **email**, or **address** shown on invoices:
1. Go to **Settings → Invoices**.
2. Upload or update your company logo.
3. Edit your company's name, contact email, and billing address.
4. Changes will automatically reflect on all future invoices.
Can I change the Invoice number?
Digits automatically generates invoice numbers, but you can edit invoices individually or set your own custom numbering format in **Settings → Invoices**.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Invoice Statuses & Payment Delivery
Once an invoice has been sent, Digits makes it easy to track its status—from delivery to payment—so you always know where things stand.
***
### Invoice Statuses
Status
What it mean
Draft
Created but not yet sent. Fully editable.
Sent
Delivered to the customer with a payment link.
Manual Send
Shared outside Digits (e.g., a PDF), not sent through Digits. Shows as Manually Sent in the detail view.
Overdue
A Sent invoice that's past its due date. This is derived from the due date, not a separate saved status — so it returns to Sent or Paid as the invoice is paid or the date changes.
Verification Required
The invoice can't collect payment until the business completes verification.
Processing
The customer submitted a payment and it's being processed. (In the invoice's detail view, a processing payment may already appear as Paid.)
Paid
Payment was collected through Digits.
Marked as Paid
You recorded payment manually (offline). The customer sees this as Paid.
Payment Failed
A payment attempt failed or was rejected.
Payment Error
A payment was returned after processing (for example, an ACH return).
Canceled
The invoice or its payment was canceled. Shows as Invoice Canceled in the detail view.
VOID
You voided the invoice. Permanent. The customer sees this as CANCELED.
Refunded
A completed payment was refunded.
***
### Where to View Invoice Status
After sending an invoice, click into the individual invoice to view the detailed status and history.
You’ll see a summary panel on the right showing:
* **Customer Info**
* **Payment Link** (if enabled)
* **Invoice PDF** for download
* **Delivery Timeline** (when the invoice was scheduled, sent, processed, and delivered)
* **Payment Summary** (when paid, which account, and fee breakdown)
\
This view provides a complete view of the invoice status, delivery milestones, and payment history.
***
### Understanding the Payment Delivery Timeline
Once a customer pays, open the **Payment Delivery** section (the dollar-sign-with-arrows icon) to follow the money to your bank. Each stage is time-stamped.
Stage
What it means
Scheduled
The payment is scheduled for delivery.
Processed
The payment has started processing.
Sent
The funds are on their way — "Funds sent to your account" for ACH, or "Check sent to your address" for a mailed check.
Estimated Delivery
The expected delivery date. If a date isn't available yet, it shows as awaiting.
Delivered
The funds have been received.
You may also see **Rescheduled** (the delivery date changed) or **Payment Returned** (the payment was returned and needs attention).
***
### Where to Find the Payment Link
Click the **Send** (airplane) icon in the right panel to view the invoice delivery details. This is where you’ll find:
* **Customer details**
* The **Digits Payment Link** — which your customer can click to pay online
* **Invoice PDF** — downloadable copy of the invoice
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** If business verification is not complete, you’ll see a message that the payment link is disabled until verified.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What if the payment link is missing?
Check that you completed [Business Verification](/business-bills-and-invoices/business-verification). Until verified, invoices can be created but not paid through Digits.
How do I know if an invoice was paid?
Open the invoice and view the **Payment Summary** on the right-hand panel. You’ll see the payment method, amount, and delivery status.
Where can I download a copy of the invoice?
Scroll to the bottom of the right-hand panel and click **Download** under Invoice PDF.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Products & Services Catalog
The **Products & Services** catalog lets you create and manage reusable products and services for your business. Create an item once with its price, description, and accounting defaults, then add it to invoices as needed. Digits automatically fills in the details, helping you invoice faster and stay consistent.
***
### Where to find the Products & Services catalog
1. In the left navigation, click **Bills & Invoices** → **Products & Services**.
The catalog opens to your list of items, organized by group.
***
### How the catalog is organized
The catalog has three levels:
* **Groups** organize related items, such as *Software*, *Consulting*, or *Hardware*.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
Items that aren't assigned to a group appear under **Items without a Group**.
{% endhint %}
* **Items** are the individual products or services you sell or purchase. Each item includes a name, description, pricing, and accounting defaults.
* **Variants** are optional versions of an item, such as different sizes, subscription tiers, or billing terms. Each variant can have its own SKU and pricing.
***
### Create a group in the catalog
1. In **Products & Services**, click the menu in the top right corner.
2. Click **New Group**.
3. Enter a **Name**. (*ex., Software*)
4. Choose an **Icon** or **upload an image** (*Optional*)
3. Choose a **Color** (*Optional*)
4. Enter a **Description (***ex., Software packages that are available to all customers***)** (*Optional*)
5. Click **Save**
***
### Add an item to the catalog
1. In **Products & Services**, click **New Item**.
2. Enter the item's **Name**. (*Required*)
3. Enter a **Description**. (*Optional*)
4. Assign the item to a **Group**. (*Optional*)
5. Choose how you use the item:
* **I sell this** (default): Enter a **Sell Price**, select an **Income Category**, and optionally choose a default **Department** and **Location**.
* **I purchase this**: Turn on the **I purchase this** toggle, then enter a **Buy Price**, select an **Expense Category**, and optionally choose a default **Department** and **Location**.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
**Note:** You can enter details for both **I sell this** and **I purchase this** for items that you buy and resell. The item will store both sales and purchase information for reuse on invoices and bills.
{% endhint %}
6. Choose how the item is structured:
* **Basic** creates a single product or service.
* **Use Variants** lets you create multiple versions of the item, such as different subscription tiers, service packages, sizes, or billing terms.
7. If you're using variants:
1. Select **Add Variant**.
2. Enter a **Variant Name**.
3. Enter a **SKU** and **Description**. (*Optional*)
4. Enter the **Sell Price** and/or **Purchase Price**.
5. Repeat for additional variants as needed. You can reorder or remove variants at any time.
8. Leave the item **Active** (default), or turn it off if you don't want it available for use.
9. Click **Save**.
***
### Edit an item
In **Products & Services**,
1\. Click to open the item you want to edit.
2. Click **Edit** in the header to enter edit mode.
3. Update the item's details, such as its name, description, group, pricing, categories, or variants.
4. Click **Save & Close**.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** An item's structure can't be changed after it has been created. If you create an item as **Basic**, you can't switch it to **Use Variants** later. To use variants, create a new item instead. Items created with **Use Variants** can be converted back to **Basic** by removing all variants and saving the item.
{% endhint %}
***
### Activate or deactivate items in the catalog
Items remain in your catalog even when they're inactive. Inactive items can't be used on new invoices or bills, but you can reactivate them at any time.
#### Update a single item
In **Products & Services**,
1. Open the item you want to update.
2. Click **Edit** in the header to enter edit mode.
3. Turn the **Active** toggle on or off.
4. Click **Save & Close**.
#### Update multiple items
In **Products & Services**,
1. Click **Edit** in the header to enter edit mode.
2. Select the **checkbox** next to each item you want to update.
3. In the bulk actions bar, choose **Active** or **Inactive** from the **Status** dropdown.
4. Click **Apply**.
***
### Filter items by status
Use the status filters above the catalog to view:
* **Active** items
* **Inactive** items
* **All** items
* **Source**
***
### Edit or delete a group
You can rename a group, mark all items in a group as inactive, or delete the group.
1. In **Products & Services**, open the group you want to update.
2. Click **Edit** in the header to enter edit mode.
3. Click the **⋮** menu next to the group.
4. Choose one of the following:
* **Edit Group Details** to update the group's name or details.
* **Mark Items Inactive** to mark every item in the group as inactive.
* **Delete Group** to remove the group.
***
### Use catalog items on an invoice
When creating or editing an invoice,
1. Click the **Item** field on a line item.
2. Browse the catalog or start typing to search for an item or variant.
3. Select the item or variant from the list.
Digits automatically fills in the item's:
* Name
* Unit price
* Income category
* Department (*if set*)
* Location (*if set*)
If you select a **variant**, Digits uses that variant's pricing and accounting defaults.
{% hint style="info" icon="cart-plus" %}
Need a new item? Click **New Item** at the bottom of the search results. The item is added to your catalog and is available for future invoices.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I use the same item for purchases and sales?
Yes. Enable both **I sell this** and **I purchase this** on the same item to maintain separate pricing and accounting defaults for each.
What's the difference between an item and a variant?
An **item** is the product or service itself. A **variant** is a version of that item, such as a different size, subscription tier, or billing term, with its own SKU or pricing.
What happens if I deactivate an item?
Inactive items remain in your catalog and can be reactivated at any time. Use the catalog filters to view active, inactive, or all items.
Can I create an item while building an invoice?
Yes. Click **New Item** from the item search while editing an invoice. The new item is saved to your catalog and can be reused on future invoices.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Digits Pay Pricing
Simple, transparent pricing for your business. Accept payments and pay bills with clear, upfront fees. No hidden costs, no surprises.
***
### Invoicing (Taking Payments)
Card payments depend on your plan. International cards incur a 1.5% fee, and currency conversion adds 1% when applicable.
#### Credit Cards, Debit Cards, Apple Pay, and Google Pay
Fee Type
Starter
Essentials
Core
Processing Fee
3.2% + 30¢
3.0% + 30¢
2.9% + 30¢
International Cards
Applied when the card is issued outside the U.S.
+1.5%
+1.5%
+1.5%
Currency Conversion
Applied when payment is settled in a different currency
+1.0%
+1.0%
+1.0%
Chargebacks & Disputes
$15 per dispute
$15 per dispute
$15 per dispute
Refunds
Free
Free
Free
Processing fees from the original transaction are typically not returned when a refund is issued.
#### ACH / Bank Transfer
| Fee Type | Starter | Essentials | Core |
| ---------------------- | ---------------- | -------------------- | -------------------- |
| Processing fee | 1.0% | 1.0% (capped at $15) | 1.0% (capped at $10) |
| ACH returns & failures | $7.50 per return | $7.50 per return | $7.50 per return |
***
### Bill Pay (Making Payments)
These fees apply when you make payments using Bill Pay.
#### Standard Bill Pay Fees
Payment Method
Fee
ACH payment
50¢
Check (printed & mailed)
$2.50
Digits Pay ("Collect")
$2
Expedited check (coming soon)
$10
Overnight check (coming soon)
$35
Domestic wire (coming soon)
$20
Returned ACH / payment failure
$7.50 per return
Stop payment
$20 per request
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Vendors & Customers
Get clear, organized visibility into every vendor bill, customer invoice, and 1099 detail—so you can review spend, revenue, and tax readiness with total confidence.
***
:people-arrows: Vendors & Customers:
Managing Your Vendors
Review vendor bills, spending, and 1099 eligibility in one organized view.
***
# Managing Your Vendors
* See vendor spending with transactions automatically grouped.
* At-a-glance insights: total vendors, total vendor spend, and new vendors this period.
* Create or edit vendor-linked transactions (OPEX, Cost of Revenue, Prepaids).
* Get tax-ready: review 1099 eligibility and W-9 status without leaving Vendors.
***
### How to Access Vendors in Digits
1. From your dashboard, click **Vendors** in the left navigation menu.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Set your **Time Period** at the top of the page to control what you’re reviewing.
{% endhint %}
***
### What counts as a vendor transaction?
Entries booked to **Operating Expenses**, **Cost of Revenue**, **Other Expenses**, or **Prepaids / Inventory / Fixed Assets**.
***
### How are vendors added?
:sparkles: Digits automatically adds vendors when it detects new names from **Bank/Connection feeds**, **CSV uploads**, or **Digits Pay** data.
1. To add a vendor **manually** while booking/editing a transaction:
2. Click the **Party** field.
3. Start typing the vendor name.
4. If not found, select **Add** — Digits auto-enriches with logo and public info.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Click or hover a vendor name to view its profile and associated transactions.
{% endhint %}
***
### Create or edit vendor-linked transactions
1. Open **Vendors** and select a vendor.
2. Click **Edit** to enter edit mode.
3. Update **Category** or other allowed fields on the listed transactions.
4. Click **Save** to apply changes.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note:** You can edit a transaction's **Party** (the customer or vendor associated with the transaction) and its **Category**. However, you can't rename customers or vendors. Their names, logos, and descriptions are added automatically through enrichment. If a transaction is linked to the wrong party, reassign it to the correct customer or vendor instead.
{% endhint %}
***
### Filter and sort Vendors
**Vendor filters**
* **Search by name.**
* **Total spend** thresholds.
* Quick toggles: **New Vendors**, **Multiple Categories**.
**Transaction filters**
* **Category:** Use search or scroll to select from **Category Manager**.
* **Source:** Use search or scroll to pick an institution.
* **Match Status:** **Matched** or **Unmatched**.
* **Transaction Amount:** Enter **Min/Max** or use the range slider.
* **Transaction Type:** **Pay In**, **Pay Out**, **Journal**, **Transfer**, **Invoice**, **Bill**.
**Sorting**
* Click any **column header** in a transactions table (e.g., **Date**, **Amount**, **Category**).
* Use the **Sort** control in the vendor list header for vendor-level sorting.
***
### How to Export Vendor Data
1. Click the **menu** in the top-right (*next to Add Transaction*).
Choose one of the following:
* **Download CSV:** save a CSV of customer or vendor transactions to your computer.
* **Export CSV to Vault:** save the CSV to your **Vault** folder for sharing or future access.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What if a vendor appears under multiple categories?
Use the Multiple Categories filter to find them, then open Edit and correct the transaction categories for consistency.
How do vendors get created?
Automatically from feeds, CSV uploads, and Digits Pay. You can also add a vendor from the Party field while editing or creating a transaction.
Can I edit a vendor's name?
No. Editing **vendor names** isn’t supported. To correct a name, stop using the old one and add the correct vendor going forward.
Why did a vendor (or customer) disappear from the list after I recategorized it?
Nothing was deleted. Whether a payee shows up under **Vendors** or **Customers** is determined by the type of category its transactions are assigned to—for example, expense-type categories place a payee in Vendors, and income/revenue-type categories place them in Customers.
When you recategorize a payee's transactions, Digits re-evaluates where that payee belongs. If the new category is a different type, the payee moves to the other list—or, in some cases, may not appear under either tab—even though its transactions remain fully intact in the ledger.
**To find a "missing" payee:** check the other tab (Vendors vs Customers), and confirm the category type you assigned. Its transactions are still in the ledger regardless of which list the payee appears in.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
If a payee isn't showing where you expect, review the category it's coded to in the Category Manager.
{% endhint %}
My payment says "Awaiting Vendor," but my vendor hasn't received it. What does that mean?
**Awaiting Vendor** means the payment has left your account and is waiting for the vendor to claim it. Funds are typically available within **2–3 business days** after the vendor accepts the payment.
If this is the vendor's first payment through Digits, they'll need to accept the payment invitation. Ask them to check their inbox and spam folder, or resend the invitation if needed.
If the payment shows **Delivery Failed** instead, update the vendor's payment information and retry delivery.
Can I delete a vendor?
No. Vendors cannot be deleted.
Can I export vendor and customer lists from Digits?
Yes, partially. You can export a CSV that includes vendor/customer (party) names by downloading a transaction export (for example, Transactions by Vendor, which includes a Party Name column).
However, Digits doesn’t currently provide a “vendor list” or “customer list” master export in a ready-to-upload format that includes full contact fields (like email, address, phone, etc.). If you need a true vendor/customer master list for a transition, you may need to compile it manually from the Vendors/Customers pages for now.
How are Vendors and Customers different from QuickBooks Classes or Divisions?
Digits' Vendors and Customers identify who you do business with. They group transactions by the party you paid or billed, making it easy to review spending, revenue, and vendor activity.
QuickBooks Classes and Divisions are used to segment your books and reports by parts of your business. In Digits, use Departments and Locations for that purpose.
Example: A payment to a vendor is associated with that vendor. A Department or Location identifies the team, service line, office, or region the expense belongs to.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Managing Your Customers
* **Detect anomalies instantly** — surfaces customers posted to multiple categories so you can fix classification errors.
* **Double-check new customers** — review new bookings so future categorizations stay consistent.
* **Analyze revenue over time** — view customer count and revenue trends by period for variance analysis and reviews.
***
### How to Access Customers in Digits
1. From your dashboard, click **Customers** in the left navigation menu.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Set your **Time Period** at the top of the page to control what you’re reviewing.
{% endhint %}
***
### Key Insights
* **Total** — unique customers in the selected period.
* **Revenue** — total earnings from all customers.
* **New Customers** — number of first-time customers in the period.
* **Multiple-Category** — customers whose transactions hit more than one category (useful for catching misclassifications).
***
### How do I explore the customer list?
Your main view shows each customer’s **Name**, **Total revenue**, **Number of transactions**, and a **transactions table** for the selected period. Click a customer to expand and review their individual transactions.
***
### How to Filter and Sort Customer Data
**Customer Filters**
* **Customer Name** — search for any customer.
* **Total Revenue** — filter customers by the amount earned from them.
* **Customer Review** — quick toggles like **New Customers** or **Multiple Categories**.
**Sort options**
* Click any **column header** in the transactions table to sort (e.g., **Date**, **Amount**, **Category**).
* Use the **sort icon** in the customer list header to sort customer-level data.
***
### How to Export Customer Data
1. Click the **menu** in the top-right (*next to Add Transaction*).
Choose one of the following:
* **Download CSV:** save a CSV of customer or vendor transactions to your computer.
* **Export CSV to Vault:** save the CSV to your **Vault** folder for sharing or future access.
***
### How to Make Edits to Customers
1. Click the **Edit** toggle in the header to enter edit mode.
You can:
* Edit a **Transaction's Party**
* Change a customer’s **category**.
* **Apply changes in bulk** or one at a time.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
**Note:** You can edit a transaction's **Party** (the customer or vendor associated with the transaction) and its **Category**. However, you can't rename customers or vendors. Their names, logos, and descriptions are added automatically through enrichment. If a transaction is linked to the wrong party, reassign it to the correct customer or vendor instead.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I fix customers posted to multiple categories?
Yes. From the customer tab, use **Multiple-Categories** under **Insights** to find them, then use **Edit** to correct categories so reporting is consistent.
Can I see only new customers for the month?
Yes. Click the **month or year** in the upper-left corner, then select the time period you want to view from the dropdown.
Does the Customers tab support exports for review meetings?
Yes. Use Download CSV or Export CSV to Vault to share with your team or accountant.
Why don’t I see a customer I’m expecting?
Adjust the **time period** or **filters**, check spelling, or review transactions for that customer’s exact **name/category**.
Can I change transaction details in the customers area?
This page lets you reassign a transaction's Party (which customer it's booked to) and change its Category. You can't rename a customer — names, logos, and descriptions are added automatically through enrichment. For deeper edits, open the transaction in Ledger.
Why did a vendor (or customer) disappear from the list after I recategorized it?
Nothing was deleted. Whether a payee shows up under **Vendors** or **Customers** is determined by the type of category its transactions are assigned to—for example, expense-type categories place a payee in Vendors, and income/revenue-type categories place them in Customers.
When you recategorize a payee's transactions, Digits re-evaluates where that payee belongs. If the new category is a different type, the payee moves to the other list—or, in some cases, may not appear under either tab—even though its transactions remain fully intact in the ledger.
**To find a "missing" payee:** check the other tab (Vendors vs Customers), and confirm the category type you assigned. Its transactions are still in the ledger regardless of which list the payee appears in.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
If a payee isn't showing where you expect, review the category it's coded to in the Category Manager.
{% endhint %}
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
***
# Financials Overview
Get a complete view of your finances with Digits Financials. Review P\&L, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, AR, & AP Aging, track trends, and download reports for fast, accurate review.
***
{% embed url="" %}
***
### How to Access and Navigate Financials
Start by opening **Financials** from the left navigation menu. This brings you to your reporting dashboard: your central hub for reviewing Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, AR/AP Aging, and more.
From here, you can:
* **Switch between report types** using the selector at the top (e.g., P\&L, Balance Sheet, etc.)
* **Filter by date range** (like This Month, Last Quarter, or Custom)
* **Drill into details** by hovering over lines or clicking into totals
* **Download any report** to share with your team, tax professional, or auditors
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** All reports are real-time and customizable—no need to export to Excel.
{% endhint %}
***
### Reports You’ll Find in Statements
Profit & Loss
The **Profit & Loss (P\&L)** view shows how your business performed over time by summarizing revenue, expenses, and profit for each month. This helps you quickly understand what’s driving financial changes and identify trends without diving into spreadsheets.
***
### What You’ll See on the P\&L Page
Quick Insights:
* **Expenses Analysis** – Biggest increases/decreases by vendor or category.
* **Revenue Analysis** – Month-over-month revenue changes and top contributors.\
These callouts help you spot variances instantly.
**Interactive P\&L Table -** The quick toggle switches the P\&L between 1, 3, 6, and 12 months. For a longer view, open Options → Monthly Breakdown, which supports up to 36 monthly columns on the P\&L, independent of the quick toggle.
Click the **Options** button to open additional settings, such as Drill down, number format, monthly breakdown, month-over-month, year-over-year, and more.
**Hover over a line to see:**
* Overview
* YTD totals
* Top Vendors
* Top transactions
Click **View Details** (when available) to open all related transactions.
Click **Download** to export the P\&L for review, tax prep, or sharing.
***
### When to Use the P\&L
The P\&L is especially useful when you need to:
* Diagnose unusual changes in revenue or expenses
* Prepare for meetings or the month-end close
* Understand cash vs. accrual impact (depending on your accounting method)
* Identify top-performing customers or high-cost vendors
* Track year-over-year or month-over-month performance
Balance Sheet
The **Balance Sheet** shows what the business **owns**, **owes**, and **retains** at a specific point in time. It helps you understand financial health, liquidity, and long-term stability—without digging through raw ledgers.
***
### What You’ll See on the Balance Sheet Page
Quick Insights:
* **Assets** – Month-over-month changes in cash, receivables, prepaid balances, and other asset accounts.
* **Liabilities** – Shifts in payables, credit cards, loans, and liabilities.
**Interactive Balance Sheet Table -** Use filters to switch between **1, 3, 6, or 12 months**, and switch between **expanded/collapsed views.** Click the **Options** button to open additional settings, such as Number format, monthly breakdown, month-over-month, year-over-year, and more.
**Hover over an account to view:**
* Overview
* Top transactions
Click **View Details** (when available) to open all underlying transactions.
Click **Download** to export the Balance Sheet for auditors, tax teams, or internal reporting.
***
### When to Use the Balance Sheet
The Balance Sheet is especially helpful when you need to:
* Evaluate liquidity and solvency
* Review loan balances or debt changes
* Check the accuracy of asset capitalization or amortization
* Validate period-end balances during close
* Analyze MoM or YoY financial health
Cash Flow
The Cash Flow report shows how money **moves in and out of the business**, helping you understand runway, operational health, and true cash performance—beyond accounting profit.
***
### What You’ll See on the Cash Flow Page
Quick Insights:
* **Gross Income** – Total cash coming *in* that month (customer payments, refunds reversed, loan deposits, etc.).
* **Gross Burn** – Total cash going *out* (vendor payments, payroll, loan repayments, and other operating expenses).
* **Net Cash** – The month’s overall cash change (Gross Income minus Gross Burn).
**Interactive Cash Flow Table -** Use filters to switch between **1, 3, 6, or 12 months**, and switch between **expanded/collapsed views.** Click the **Options** button to open additional settings, such as Number format, monthly breakdown, month-over-month, year-over-year, and more.
**Hover over any category to view:**
* Overview
* Top transactions contributing to inflows/outflows
Click **View Details** to drill into all related transactions.
Click **Download** to export Cash Flow for forecasting, planning, or investor reporting.
***
### When to Use the Cash Flow Report
This report is ideal when you want to:
* Understand the month-to-month cash runway
* Identify spending spikes or collection delays
* Compare accounting profit vs. real cash
* Support cash-based budgeting or forecasting
* Prepare for investor or board updates
AR Aging
{% hint style="info" %}
**Notes:**
* AR/AP Aging Reports only include activity recorded in Digits after the entity’s **cutover date** (found in **Settings → Accounting**).
* Digits does *not* import legacy bills from **QuickBooks Online (QBO)**.
{% endhint %}
The **Accounts Receivable (AR) Aging** report shows all unpaid customer invoices, grouped by how long they’ve been outstanding. It gives you a clear, time-based view of what customers owe and helps you stay ahead of collections and cash-flow risks.
***
### What You’ll See on the AR Aging Page
Quick Insights:
* **Total Outstanding AR**
* **Invoices by aging bucket** (Current, 1–30 Days, 31–60 Days, 61–90 Days, Older)
***
**Detailed AR Aging Table**
Scroll down to see every outstanding invoice, grouped by customer:
For each invoice, you’ll see:
* Customer name
* Invoice number
* Due date
* Days outstanding
* Amount owed
* Aging bucket
**Hover over any customer row to see more details.**
Click **Download** to export AR Aging for forecasting, planning, or investor reporting.
***
### Where the Data Comes From
Digits automatically includes:
* **All invoices created in Digits Invoicing**
* **Invoices flowing in through Digits Connectors** (e.g., Ramp)
If an invoice was **already paid outside Digits**, use **Mark as Paid** to keep aging accurate.
If you need to add a missing invoice manually, create it via **Invoicing** and it will appear immediately.
***
### When to Use AR Aging
AR Aging is most helpful when you want to:
* Prioritize customer follow-ups
* Identify cash flow risks
* Prepare for end-of-month or year-end reporting
* Track overall collection performance
AP Aging
{% hint style="info" %}
**Notes:**
* AR/AP Aging Reports only include activity recorded in Digits after the entity’s **cutover date** (found in **Settings → Accounting**).
* Digits does *not* import legacy bills from **QuickBooks Online (QBO)**.
{% endhint %}
The **Accounts Payable (AP) Aging** report shows all unpaid vendor bills, grouped by how long they’ve been outstanding. It's your go-to view for managing cash outflows and preventing late payments.
***
### What You’ll See on the AP Aging Page
Quick Insights:
* **Total Outstanding AP**
* **Bills by aging bucket** (Current, 1–30 Days, 31–60 Days, 61–90 Days, Older)
**Detailed AP Aging Table**
Each row includes:
* Vendor name
* Bill date
* Due date
* Bill number
* Amount per aging bucket
* Total owed
Click **Options** to change the number format from rounded to decimal.
Click **Download** to export AP Aging for forecasting, planning, or investor reporting.
***
### Where the Data Comes From
Digits automatically includes:
* Bills uploaded or created through **Digits Bill Pay**
* Bills coming from **Digits Connectors** (e.g., Ramp)
Bills paid outside Digits should be closed using **Mark as Paid** to keep aging accurate.
Need to add a missing bill? Upload it through **Bills,** and it appears immediately.
***
### When to Use AP Aging
Use AP Aging when you need to:
* Plan for upcoming vendor payments
* Identify overdue bills
* Reduce late fees
* Support weekly cash flow planning
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
What is Financials in Digits?
Financials gives you a centralized, audit-ready view of performance across your books. Review standard statements, explore category-level details, customize client-ready reports, and automate recurring reporting.
Why are my AR/AP Aging reports empty?
Two common reasons:
* **Cutover Date** — AR/AP reports only include activity recorded after the entity’s cutover date. You can find this in **Settings → Accounting**.
1. **QBO Connections** — Digits does **not** import legacy bills or invoices from QuickBooks Online. QBO-connected users may see empty reports until items are recreated in Digits.
How do I switch between different financial reports?
Use the report selector at the top of the Financials page to move between P\&L, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, AR Aging, and AP Aging.
What is Net Burn, and why does it show accrual adjustments?
Net Burn is a cash-basis metric that calculates total spend minus income for a specific period. You may notice accrual adjustments in the report — these appear because the Total Spend and Income components initially include accrual-based transactions. The adjustments ensure the final Net Burn figure reflects only actual cash movement. For example, credit card charges or accounts payable transactions may appear in the accrual adjustments section so they can be excluded until the cash actually moves. The Cash Flow report in Financials is the best place to review overall cash inflows and outflows, along with Net Burn.
Why can I only compare six locations at a time on my P&L?
A side-by-side P\&L comparison supports up to six locations (the same limit applies to departments). To cover more, create separate P\&L custom reports — each broken down by a different group of up to six locations — and review or export them together.
Why doesn't my custom report footer doesn't show in the preview?
The footer appears on the cover page in the on-screen preview but not on the interior preview pages. In the exported PDF, it prints on every page — so a disclaimer in the footer will appear throughout the downloaded file.
Does Digits support a 13-period (4-4-5) fiscal calendar?
No. Reporting uses standard calendar periods. You can set your fiscal-year start month, but 13-period / 4-4-5 calendars aren't supported. Note: fiscal-year start is set by Digits Support, not in the dashboard.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Downloading Financial Statements in Digits
Need to share your numbers outside of Digits? No problem. Whether it’s for your tax prep, a lender, or a quick check-in with your bookkeeper, exporting is fast and easy.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Step 1: Open Statements
Click **Financials** → **Statements** from the left-hand navigation.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 2: Choose a Report
Select a report type from the selector along the top.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 3: Adjust Filters
* **Date range** — set it at the top left (YTD, Last Month, Custom, etc.). It applies to the report you're viewing.
* **Report options** — click **Options** (the gear icon) on the report to adjust how it displays. Options vary by report.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 4: Export Options
**Download Financial Package** (Top-right button)
* Choose multiple reports to export together. Available reports include:
* **Ledger** — A list of your transactions categorized by account
* **Trial Balance** — Ledger accounts with focus on debit and credit balances
* **Profit & Loss** — Breakdown of revenue, costs, and expenses incurred
* **Balance Sheet** — Breakdown of assets, liabilities, and shareholder equity
* **Cash Flows** — Breakdown of cash and cash equivalents entering or leaving
* **AR Aging** — Outstanding customer invoices grouped by how overdue they are
* **AP Aging** — Unpaid vendor bills grouped by how overdue they are
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-on" %}
Each report in the package is generated in its standard format—Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, AR/AP Aging as PDFs; Trial Balance as an XLSX file; and Transaction List as a CSV file.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" icon="calendar-days" %}
You can also change the time period right in the download window — just click the dates at the top.
{% endhint %}
**Download Single Report (Per-section button)**
* Found directly above each report
* Downloads just that specific report as a PDF or XLS
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I download more than one report at once?
Yes. Use **Download Financial Package** (top-right). You can select multiple reports, and Digits exports each in its standard format—Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow as PDFs, the Trial Balance as XLSX, and the Transaction List as CSV.
What format are financial exports in?
It depends on the report and how you export it. Individual reports (Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, AR Aging, and AP Aging) can be downloaded as PDFs or XLS files. The Financial Package includes the Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow as PDFs; the Trial Balance as an XLSX; and the Transaction List as a CSV.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Creating a Custom Report
Learn how to create and customize financial reports in Digits—build P\&Ls, balance sheets, and summaries with charts, filters, and simple layouts you can share with your team, investors, or lender.
***
{% embed url="" %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Step 1: Start a New Report
1. From the left-hand menu, click **Financials** → **Custom Reports**.
2. Click **New Report**.
3. Choose your report type (*Executive Summary, Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow*):
*(You can select one, a few, or all.)*
4. Set your **report date range** using the dropdown next to the month/year.
5. Click **Run** to generate your draft.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 2: Customize the Cover Page
1. Click into the report to edit the **Cover Page**:
* **Edit Title** – Give your report a meaningful name
* **Prepared By** – Tag your firm or team member
* **Custom Footer** – Add firm info, notes, or a closing message
* **Show Account Numbers** – Optional toggle
* **Add a Cover Image** – Upload a visual to give the report a polished, branded look
2. When you're done, click **Done** in the top-right. To update later, use the **Options icon**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 3: Executive Summary
Scroll past the cover page to the **Executive Summary** section.
* Click **Add** to insert visual tiles like Cash Flow, Total Cash, Net Burn, or Revenue breakdowns
* Use the **Paint Roller icon** to create custom graphs
Click the **Options** icon to update page details, including:
* Page title
* Time periods for metrics like **Total Cash**, **Expense Analysis**, **Net Burn**, and **Runway**
You can also use the AI writing assistant to generate a polished Executive Summary.
* Click into the **Executive Summary text box** at the top of the report
* In the editing toolbar that appears, click the **Digits logo** to generate an AI-written summary
You can provide bullet points, draft notes, or guidance on tone, and the AI will turn it into a polished summary based on the text you include.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** The AI refines the content you provide. It does not automatically pull financial data into the summary.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 4: Customize Financial Report Pages
Digits auto-generates a page for each selected report: P\&L, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow.
Each page includes:
* Collapse/expand toggles
* Add Graphs and Charts
* Download button
* **Options** to edit page title, time periods, or formatting
**Bonus Controls**
* **P\&L Extras**: Show % of income or total per line item, add YTD totals, filter by department
* **Balance Sheet / Cash Flow**: Enable trendlines, adjust formats, compare periods
* **All Reports**: Add charts, KPIs, text blocks, or list items for commentary
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 5: Add More Pages (Optional)
Scroll to the bottom of the report and click the **+** icon to insert additional pages for:
* Commentary
* KPI dashboards
* Supporting visuals or documentation
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Step 6: Save, Share, or Publish
Once you’re happy with the layout:
* Click **Publish Draft** to save your work
* From the draft view, you can:
* Continue editing
* Share a link
* Export a version for review
When it’s final:
* Click **Publish Final**
* From here, you can **share**, **print**, or click **New Version** to start a fresh draft without losing history
{% hint style="info" icon="download" %}
Use the **Download** button to save the report as a **PDF or XLS** file. If your report includes attached documents, the download arrives as a **ZIP** containing the report plus its attachments, so you can send everything to a client, auditor, or tax preparer in one file.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
**Next step** [Saving & Sharing Custom Reports](/business-insights-and-reporting/business-insights-reportings/sharing-reports) →
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
How do I duplicate or delete a report?
To create a copy of an existing report for a different time period:
1. In **Custom Reports**, locate the report you want to copy.
2. Click the **menu** in the top-right corner of the report tile.
3. Select **Duplicate Report**.
4. You can then select a new time period for the duplicate.
To delete a report, follow the same steps and choose **Delete** instead.
How do I share a report with someone?
See: [Saving & Sharing Custom Reports](/business-insights-and-reporting/business-insights-reportings/sharing-reports)for full instructions on sharing, permissions, and publishing.
Do saved reports update automatically when data changes?
Yes—as long as the report is saved as a **draft**, the data will stay in sync. Once you publish a final version, the data freezes.
How do I hide account numbers in reports?
You can display account names without their account-number prefixes—showing "Sales Revenue" instead of "4100 · Sales Revenue"—across a report. This is useful for cleaner, client-facing, and white-labeled reports.
1. Open the report and enter **edit** mode.
2. On the report's **cover page**, click the **Options** button (gear icon) in the top-right corner to open the **Cover Options** panel.\
*(Note: use the Options button on the cover page—not the Options button on the individual P\&L/statement, which only controls columns and comparisons.)*
3. Find **Show Account Numbers** and change it from **Automatic** to **Off**.
Account numbers are now hidden across all statements in the report (Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow). The setting is saved with the report, so it also applies to shared and exported (PDF/Excel) versions.
To bring the numbers back, set **Show Account Numbers** back to **Automatic**.
Why doesn't my custom report footer doesn't show in the preview?
The footer appears on the cover page in the on-screen preview but not on the interior preview pages. In the exported PDF, it prints on every page — so a disclaimer in the footer will appear throughout the downloaded file.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Monthly Reporting & Exports (P\&L, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow)
Need a month-by-month Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, or Cash Flow over a longer period? Here's how to view monthly columns, understand report limits, and export longer histories.
***
### How to Choose the Reporting Period
Where you set the date range depends on where you’re building the report:
* **Statements:** Use the period selector at the top of the page.
* **Custom Reports:** Open **Options** and set the custom time period there.
***
### How to Show Monthly Columns on Reports
#### In Financials
1. From the left navigation, open **Financials** → **Statements** and choose the statement you want (Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, or Cash Flow).
2. Click **Options** above the statement to open the **Statement Options** panel.
3. Toggle on **Monthly Breakdown**.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
Optional: Add period-over-period comparisons using **Delta** (percent or monthly average), **Month over Month** (percent or delta), or **Year over Year** (percent or delta).
{% endhint %}
#### In a Custom Report
* From the left navigation, open **Financials** → **Custom Reports** and either start a new report or open a draft report.
* Scroll down past the cover and executive summary to the report you want to edit.
* Click **Options** above the statement to open the **Statement Options** panel.
* Toggle on **Monthly Breakdown**.
***
### How many months can I include in one report?
The monthly reach depends on the statement:
| Statement | Interval | Maximum columns |
| -------------------------------- | ------------------- | --------------- |
| **Profit & Loss** | Monthly | 36 months |
| **Balance Sheet**, **Cash Flow** | Monthly | 12 months |
| **Any statement** | Quarterly or yearly | \~10 periods |
***
### Need to Export or Share Your Report?
See [Downloading Financial Statements in Digits](/business-insights-and-reporting/business-insights-reportings/download-financials) or [Saving & Sharing Custom Reports](/business-insights-and-reporting/business-insights-reportings/sharing-reports)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Why don't I see monthly columns?
Make sure **Monthly Breakdown** is turned on in **Statement Options**, and that **Drill down by** is set to **None** — a drill-down disables the monthly view. Monthly columns are available on Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow.
Can I get a monthly view with a Custom date range?
Yes. Monthly Breakdown works with any time period, including Custom— it isn't tied to a preset range.
How do I get more than 36 months into one spreadsheet?
For reporting periods longer than a single statement supports, export your data in batches—for example, one monthly Profit & Loss per 36-month window. Download each report as an XLS file, then combine the data in Excel or Google Sheets for a complete historical view.
Why can't I see the monthly breakdown on my Profit & Loss report?
The Monthly breakdown option is available only when your report is set to a month range (such as 1, 3, 6, or 12 months). It isn't available when the date range is Year to Date.
If you don't see the monthly breakdown:
1. Change the report's date range from Year to Date to a month range.
2. Open Options.
3. Turn on Monthly breakdown
Does Digits forecast cash flow?
The Cash Flow report shows actuals, meaning money that has already moved based on your books. It isn't a projection.
For a forward-looking view, use the Live Runway metric on your dashboard. Runway estimates when your cash would reach zero based on your current cash and net burn rate. You can calculate your burn rate using last month, the last 3-month average, or the last 6-month average.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Saving & Sharing Custom Reports
Once you’ve finished building a custom report, Digits makes it easy to share it with your team, your bookkeeper, or anyone else who needs a clear view of your numbers.
***
### Add Comments Before or After You Share
Add comments anywhere in the layout:
* Click the **speech bubble** icon next to a section
* Use **@mentions** to tag teammates or request input
For full setup instructions, see: [Creating a Custom Report](/business-insights-and-reporting/business-insights-reportings/custom-reports)
***
### Collaboration/Sharing
Once you publish the **Draft** or the **Final Version**, the collaboration panel automatically appears on the right. This panel gives you everything you need to track activity, leave comments, @mention teammates or clients, and manage sharing access.
The same collaboration tools remain available for both draft and final published reports.
Feature
What It Does
Report Activity
Shows the full history of the report — creation, edits, shares, and publish events.
Comments
Leave comments, tag teammates with @mentions, and track feedback or follow-ups.
Share Report
Share via name/email, Send a copy to myself, or Get link for a secure shareable URL.
***
### Print / Save as PDF
1. Click **Download** in the **Draft** or **Final** version of your report.
If the report has no attachments, it downloads as a PDF. If the report includes attachments, it downloads as a ZIP file containing the report PDF and all supporting documents.
***
**Need to download P\&L, Balance Sheet, Cash Flow, AR/AP Aging, or multiple reports at once?**\
See [Downloading Financial Statements in Digits](/business-insights-and-reporting/business-insights-reportings/download-financials)
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can shared reports be viewed without a Digits login?
If you email a PDF, anyone can view it without logging in. However, shared links, comments, @mentions, and in-app access all require a Digits login. This ensures report access stays secure and trackable.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Scheduling Custom Reports
Automate your monthly reporting by scheduling draft or final reports in Digits. Save time, stay consistent, and make sure your reports go out on schedule—without manual prep.
***
### How to Schedule Reports
1. In the left navigation menu, click **Custom Reports**.
2. Click the dropdown next to **New Report** (top right).
3. Click **Schedule Reports**.
4. Choose whether you want to schedule for:
* **A specific recipient**, or
* **Globally across multiple recipients**\
(Global schedules apply to all business accounts associated with your Digits account, unless overridden.)
***
### Scheduling Options
Option
What it Does
Timing Deatails
Auto-Create Draft
Automatically creates a draft report at the start of each month for you to review and edit.
Draft is created on the 1st of each month.
Auto-Publish Draft
Creates a draft report for review.
Delivered at 9 AM CST on the selected date.
Auto-Publish Final
Sends the finalized report automatically.
Delivered at 9 AM CST on the selected date.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I still edit reports after they’re auto-created?
Absolutely. Auto-created drafts behave the same as manually created drafts—you can edit, customize, and publish them anytime.
Can I stop scheduling later?
Yes—just return to the Schedule Reports page and toggle off any option.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
***
# Vault Overview
Digits' Vault centralizes statements, receipts, and contracts. Upload or auto-fetch files, convert PDFs to CSV, and stay in sync with Reconciliations.
***
### How to Access Vault in Digits
1. Click **Vault** in the left navigation menu.
2. From here, you can:
* Click **Upload Document** (top right) to add files.
* Use **Search**, **Filters**, **Sort**, and switch **List/Grid** views (icons in the top right).
***
### How Documents Get into Digits
#### Manual uploads
* Upload PDFs, images, and other document types. Ideal for receipts, vendor contracts, or treasury reports.
#### Drag & drop
* Drag files directly into the Digits window. Files are routed to Vault and processed the same way as a manual upload.
#### Ledger attachments
* Any file attached to a transaction (e.g., a receipt or invoice) is automatically added to **Vault**.
#### Email
* You can email documents directly to the correct Digits business/client using that instance’s unique Digits email address. This is great for forwarding receipts, bills, or statements without logging in.
See: [Sending Documents to Digits by Email](/business-documents/email-documents)
**Mobile app (iOS)**\
Upload documents from your phone using the Digits mobile app. Capture or upload files on the go, and they’ll sync to Digits for processing. Download for iOS
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
:sparkles: Digits will automatically recognize supported documents and link them to the appropriate transaction or route them to the appropriate workflow when possible.
{% endhint %}
#### Auto-fetch via Plaid (U.S. banks/cards)
* When you connect an account through **Plaid**, Digits automatically pulls official bank statements into **Vault.**
* Currently supported include (not exhaustive): *Acorns, Altruist, American Bank (TX) - Business Banking, Aspire, Atlas, Bank of America, CCBank (Business & Personal), Chariot, Chase, Citibank Online, Cogent Bank - Cogent Connection, Columbia Bank (Commercial), Crew Finance, Dama Financial by LeafLink, Dappr, Double Finance, Dupaco Credit Union, Exponent, Fifth Third Bank, First Bank of Ironharbor, Gemini Credit Card, GuideStone Financial Resources, Huntington Bank, Karat Financial, Klutch, Loop Financial (US), Mass Finance Inc., Meow, Mercury, Navy Federal Credit Union, Parker, Percapita Group, Ramp, Regions Bank, Rent App, Safra National Bank, Slash, Spruce, Square, Truist, Upgrade, U.S. Bank, and Wells Fargo.*
#### Automatic sync between Reconciliations and Vault
* Any statement uploaded in **Reconciliations** is also added to **Vault**.
* Any statement added in **Vault** is automatically matched to a reconciliation **when possible**.
***
### What Happens After a Document Lands in Vault
You can bring data into Digits by connecting accounts or uploading files. What happens next depends on **how** and **where** you upload.
Below, you’ll see **what happens to each file type** (statements, CSVs, bills, receipts, and more) based on **how it enters Digits**—including **Connections, Ledger import, Reconciliations, Vault, drag & drop, and email**.
{% hint style="success" icon="key" %}
**Hint:** Where you upload a file determines what Digits does with it.
{% endhint %}
#### Document Type: **Bank or Credit Card Statement (PDF)**
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Ledger → Import Bank Transactions
Imports transactions into the Ledger and auto-categorizes them; Digits will then automatically start a reconciliation.
Upload to Vault
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Drag & Drop
Routed and stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Email to Digits
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Reconcilations
If the transactions were already imported (by bank sync or by going to Ledger → Import Bank Transactions, then Digits will automatically start a reconciliation. If the transactions were not imported, the document will be saved to Vault.
#### Document Type: **CSV**
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Ledger → Import Bank Transactions
Imports transactions into the Ledger and auto-categorizes them.
Upload to Vault
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Drag & Drop
Routed and stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
Email to Digits
Stored in Vault (does not import transactions).
#### Document Type: **Bills**
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Upload to Vault
Automatically creates a bill for review and approval.
Drag & Drop
Routed to Vault. Creates a bill for review.
Email to Digits
Lands in Vault. Creates a bill for review.
#### Document Type: **Check image**
A single upload can include **multiple checks**, which Digits processes individually. Digits also **automatically rotates** sideways or upside-down checks and statements during processing.
How It Gets Into Digits
What Digits Does With It
Connected Account
Extracts check images from imported bank statements, saves them to Vault, and attempts to match them to Ledger transactions.
Upload to Vault
Saves the image to Vault and attempts to match it to a Ledger transaction.
Drag & Drop
Saves the image to Vault and attempts to match it to a Ledger transaction.
Email to Digits
Saves the image to Vault and attempts to match it to a Ledger transaction.
#### Document Type: **Receipts**
| How It Gets Into Digits | What Digits Does With It |
| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Upload to Vault** | Automatically attaches to a matching transaction for easy reference. |
| **Drag & Drop** | Routed to Vault. Attaches to a matching transaction (if found). |
| **Email to Digits** | Lands in Vault. Attaches to a matching transaction (if found). |
#### Document Type**:** **Other files (Word, Excel, general PDFs)**
| How It Gets Into Digits | What Digits Does With It |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Upload to Vault** | Stored in **Vault** for organization and reference only. |
| **Drag & Drop** | Routed and stored in **Vault** for organization and reference only. |
| **Email to Digits** | Routed and stored in **Vault** for organization and reference only. |
***
### Previewing Documents in Vault
Click any document to preview it directly in Digits — no download needed. Previews are supported for:
* **PDFs and images** (PNG, JPG, TIFF, and more)
* **Spreadsheets** (Excel, CSV)
* **Word documents**
* **PowerPoint presentations**
* **Text files**
New uploads are ready to preview shortly after processing completes — you'll see a loading state while the document is being prepared. If a file type can't be previewed, you can always download it to view it.
***
### Filtering Documents in Vault
To narrow down your documents, click the **filter icon** (funnel) at the top of Vault. You can combine filters, and each one shows a count of how many are active.
**Filter by File Type**\
Narrow to a file format:
* **PDF**
* **Documents** (Word docs and similar)
* **Spreadsheets** (Excel, CSV)
* **Images** (PNG, JPG, and other image files)
**Filter by Document Type**\
Narrow to what the document *is*. Digits automatically detects the document type when a file is uploaded. Types include:
*Bill · Invoice · Receipt · Statement · Check · W9 · 1099 · K1 · Tax ID · Tax Return · Balance Sheet · Profit & Loss · Cash Flow Statement · Trial Balance · General Ledger · AP Aging · AR Aging · Schedule · Payroll · Contract · Loan Agreement · Compliance · Equity · Valuation · Adyen Statement · Other*
**Filter by Uploaded By**\
Show only documents uploaded by a specific person.
To remove a filter, uncheck it — or clear all filters to see every document again.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
**Tip:** Filters work together with the search bar ("Filter documents…") — for example, filter to **Statements**, then type an account name to find one statement fast.
{% endhint %}
***
### Exporting a PDF as CSV
1. Open **Vault**.
2. Click the menu next to a document (or open the document detail page).
3. If supported, click **Export as CSV** to export.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Only certain PDFs (like compatible bank statements) can be converted. Unsupported or very large/long files may not show the option.
{% endhint %}
***
### Viewing Linked Transactions
When you click a document, a file info panel appears on the right. If linked to a transaction(s), you’ll see a **Linked Transactions** section showing:
* Transaction date
* Transaction amount
Clicking the transaction takes you directly to its details page in the Ledger.
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
How long does it take to convert a PDF to CSV?
It depends on size and complexity. Short statements (1–2 pages) usually convert in \~60 seconds; longer or more complex PDFs can take up to 10 minutes.
Will Digits automatically attach receipts to the right transaction?
Yes. You can upload, drag & drop, or email receipts, and Digits will automatically attach them to the right transaction when it can (based on details like vendor, date, and amount).
If Digits can’t confidently match a receipt, it will still store it in Vault so you can attach it manually later.
Are there limits on PDF conversion?
Yes. PDFs over \~15 pages may not convert successfully (fix coming soon). Large files (\~7MB+) or highly formatted statements may time out or return incomplete results.
Can I upload documents that aren’t tied to transactions?
Yes. Upload contracts, treasury reports, receipts, and more directly into Vault.
Can I delete or replace a document?
Yes. Use the **Trash** icon in the file info panel.
* If you delete a document from the **Vault**, it will also be removed from any linked transactions.
* If you delete a document from the **transaction details**, you'll get the choice to either:
* Unlink it (keep it in your Vault), or
* Delete it entirely
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb-exclamation-on" %}
One exception: a bill can't be deleted from Vault; delete it from Bill Pay instead.
{% endhint %}
Why don’t I see Export as CSV?
Only certain PDFs (e.g., supported bank statements) can be converted. If the file is too long, too large, or unsupported, the option won’t appear.
Do documents automatically link to transactions or reconciliations?
* If you attach a file during transaction create/edit, it will show as linked in your **Vault.**
* Statements uploaded in **Reconciliations** appear in **Vault**, and statements uploaded in **Vault** are auto-matched to a reconciliation when possible.
Why don't I see check images for my transactions?
Digits automatically extracts check images from imported bank statements—whether the statement comes in through a Connected Account, a manual upload, or your Digits email address—and saves them to Vault. Some banks (such as Mercury) also provide check images directly through their API, but even when they don't, Digits can now pull the images from the statement itself.
You can also add checks yourself by uploading them manually or emailing them to your Digits email address. When Digits receives a check image, it automatically tries to match it to the corresponding check transaction in your Ledger. If it can't find a confident match, the image is stored in Vault so you can manually attach it to the correct transaction.
[Attach Documents to Transactions](/business-documents/attaching-documents)
[Sending Documents to Digits by Email](/business-documents/email-documents)
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Store & track W-9s in Vault
Centralize W-9 collection so tax season isn’t a scramble. This guide shows how to file, find, and sync W-9s with vendor tax status.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Upload W9s to Vault
1. Go to **Vault.**
2. Click **Upload Document** (top right) and select the W9 file.
3. Click **Open**.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** :sparkles:Digits auto-recognizes and names common W9 formats.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Filter and find W9s fast
1. In **Vault**, open **Filters**.
2. Set **Document Type = W9** (or **1099**) to list just the forms you need.
3. Use **Search** (vendor name) or **Sort** (newest first) to narrow results.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Reflect W9 Status in Vendors → Taxes
1. Open **Vendors** → **Show tax status**.
2. Find the vendor and set **W9 Status = W9 Required, W9 Not Required, W9 Available,** or **W9 Status Unavailable**.
3. (If needed) Update **Entity Type** and mark **1099-qualified** transactions.
{% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %}
Note: Eligibility for 1099s is based on **Entity Type** and total **1099-qualified spend**.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
See: [Get Tax Ready with Digits: 1099s, W9s, & Year-End Prep](/business-agentic-general-ledger/get-tax-ready) for more info.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Best practices**
* Request W-9s once a vendor crosses your 1099 threshold.
* Store the most recent signed version; add the year in the file name for clarity.
* Link the W-9 to any internal checklist so reviewers can open it from context.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Can I upload multiple W-9s for the same vendor?
Yes. Keep the most recent as primary and retain prior versions for audit history.
Where should I manage 1099 eligibility?
Use Vendors → Taxes to review 1099 status, W-9 status, Entity Type, and to mark 1099-qualified transactions.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Attach Documents to Transactions
Attach receipts, invoices, or other supporting files directly to transactions in Digits — across Ledger, Banks & Cards, Vendors, and Customers. Everything stays linked, searchable, and organized.
***
### How to Manually Attach a Document to a Transaction
1. Open a transaction from **Ledger, Banks & Cards**, **Vendors**, or **Customers.**
2. Click the **Comments** icon in the upper-right corner.
3. **Browse** or **drag & drop** your file into the attachments box.
* Supported file types: PDF, PNG, JPG/JPEG, TIFF, GIF, BMP, WEBP, XLSX, XLS, DOCX, DOC, PPTX, PPT, ODT, ODS, ODP, RTF, CSV, TXT.
* You can upload multiple files per transaction.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Tip:** Upload contracts, receipts, or bills here instead of keeping them in email threads — everything stays connected and searchable.
{% endhint %}
***
### Viewing Linked Transactions
Once a document is uploaded, it automatically appears in the **Vault**.\
When you open it, you’ll see a **Linked Transactions** panel on the right showing:
* Transaction date
* Transaction amount
* Linked account or category
Click the linked transaction to jump directly to its details view.
***
### Other Ways to Attach or Link Documents
In addition to manually attaching files directly to a transaction, you can also add documents to Digits in other ways. When possible, :sparkles: Digits will automatically link them to the correct transaction.
#### Upload or Drag & Drop
You can upload or drag & drop documents (like receipts, bills, or statements) into:
* **Vault**
* **Reconciliations**
* **Checklist**
* **Bills or Expenses workflows**
Digits will scan the document and attempt to match it to the correct transaction based on details like vendor, date, and amount.
#### Email Documents to Digits
Each business or client in Digits has a **unique email address**.
You can forward or email documents (receipts, bills, statements) to that address, and Digits will:
* Store the file in **Vault**
* Identify the document type
* Route it into the correct workflow
* Attempt to link it to a transaction when possible
#### Important to Know
* Automatic matching is **not guaranteed**
* If Digits can’t confidently match a document, it will remain in Vault
* You can always manually attach the document to the correct transaction
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Do all uploaded documents go into Vault?
Yes — all attachments are stored in your **Vault** for easy access.
Can I upload documents from my phone?
Yes. You can upload documents directly from the Digits mobile app on iOS.
Use the app to capture or upload receipts, statements, and other files on the go. Once uploaded, they’ll appear in Digits and be available for processing and reconciliation.
Download for iOSWill historical attachments from QuickBooks import automatically?
That’s our goal. We’re exploring large-scale QBO document imports to bring over historical attachments.
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}
***
# Sending Documents to Digits by Email
When you forward emails to Digits, we scan for financial documents and route what we find into the right workflows for you.
***
### Email Addresses For Each Digits Instance
Each business (or client) has its own Digits email address, so emailed documents route to the right place. The address looks like:
```
your-company-slug@digits.cc
```
#### Where to find the email address
You can find a Digits email address in two places:
* Open the business (or client), go to **Settings**, and you'll see its unique Digits email address.
* **Firms with multiple clients:** on your firm dashboard, each client's card also shows its Digits email address under the client's name.
***
### Documents Digits Handles Automatically
{% hint style="info" icon="sparkles" %}
Documents are **read and processed automatically** by Digits and used in features like **Bill Pay, Invoicing, Receipts,** or **Reconciliations**, depending on what they contain.
{% endhint %}
**Automatically processed documents can be:**
* PDFs
* Images (for example: JPG, PNG)
* CSV and TXT files
* Email body HTML
***
### Other File Types We Store
Digits also supports **many other file types** via email. These are stored in **Vault,** so everything lives in one place.
You and your team can view or download these files anytime—they just won’t trigger automated Bill Pay / Invoicing / Receipts / Reconciliation flows (for now).
Examples:
* **XLS / XLSX** (spreadsheets)
* **DOC / DOCX** (Word docs)
* **PPT** (PowerPoint slides)
* And many other standard formats
{% hint style="info" icon="envelopes" %}
If an email doesn’t include a supported document, we’ll send an automatic reply letting you know we couldn’t process it.
{% endhint %}
***
### Frequently Asked Questions
Is emailing documents into Digits secure?
Yes. Emailing documents to Digits is designed to be secure.
**What happens when Digits receives the email?**\
As soon as the email reaches Digits, Digits encrypts the contents right away. That means the document is stored in Digits in an encrypted form.
**Is the email protected while it’s being sent?**\
Digits uses an inbound email service provider (SendGrid) that supports TLS and STARTTLS, which can encrypt the email while it’s traveling from the sender to Digits. If the sender’s email system uses TLS/STARTTLS, the message can be protected in transit.
**Is email always fully secure end-to-end?**\
Not always. Email can pass through different systems before it reaches Digits, and Digits can’t control whether every sender and every email system in between uses encryption or stores messages securely.
**What should I do for very sensitive documents?**\
If a document is highly confidential, the safest option is to upload it directly in Digits using the Vault. This avoids email and helps ensure the file is protected by Digits’ encryption from the start.
When is emailing documents into Digits a good option?
Email ingestion is a convenient choice for documents that already arrive via email, such as bills, receipts, statements, and vendor attachments. It’s a simple way to get files into Digits without downloading and re-uploading them.
Can I upload documents from my phone?
Yes. You can upload documents directly from the Digits mobile app on iOS.
Use the app to capture or upload receipts, statements, and other files on the go. Once uploaded, they’ll appear in Digits and be available for processing and reconciliation.
Download for iOS
***
{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" valign="middle" %}
Got a question or feedback? Our team is all ears—come say hello!
{% endcolumn %}
{% column width="33.33333333333334%" valign="middle" %}